Home

now

1. a ri g amp Page Num Jli b 3 lla ell5 Ile a EE We Insert Home up Lock Tab 1e Q R T Y Ju o P i Eitor Boietall End Page T d A m tasoa S JD IE IA IJ IK JIL lE 3 4 5 6 JL E gt zq IZ X Ie Iv IB IN IM k I I ES 1 2 s PgDI Y End gun Enter Ctrl Alt AltGr Ctrl l gt 0 m Ins e English United States I We Page Num 3 s 5 6 E 8 9 0 z 2 Insert Home Up Lock in E qr gp Li bs Gs o CapsLock A S JID MF e IH NJ IK IIL I BE 4 5 l6 ZI P gt Syr Z lx Ic Iv B IN M k 7 ES n 1 2 3 i End 3 gDn Enter Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl i 0 Ins e French France 1 14s I6 I7 e we o IP IF Verl W K EJEA dE dE E MIS ll el 1102 ML me N j frum Tb A Z E JR Tv Jo JP de Entr 7 8 I9
2. Vs J lie l amp JU j Im 2 Bild Num l x I El JE s Ile Iiz lls l Ilo Hlg ae Eng Posi La w HE R T HZ JU JO P 7 Enter Bild 7 8 9 t Ed IT IEP Je JP Ie ILS ev s 8 L Li t B J S D F JG H u IK llo lA z 4 5 l6 gt Y JX C IV B N M ET Shift n 1 2 34 M d dL e Ende V HBild Alt Ait Gr Strg 0 per Y ET Einfg Entf Italian Italy l E J amp A Page Num 1 3 Jl4 l5 Ile p 18 a E dn ie insert Home up Lock Tab Q W JE JR IT IY IU l O P f Enter Deletel Ena Page 7 8 9 a lt ete End Down Home 4 Poup Cpstok A S D F a J IK J L fe 4 5 6 ej gt Shift Z WX JC V B N M A E Ms Shift 4 1 2 3 I lt a End PgDn Enter Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ctrl 0 timi eds Polish Programmers Poland o I amp Page Num m 1 E 3 4 l5 ie E 8 z IEE inser Homel lup Lock Tab Q W HIE R T JY U I O P Page 7 8 9 gt Deletel End Ipown Home 4 _ PgUp Capstock A S D WF e IH Iv IK IIL I 1 Enter 4 5 e dp lt LE p Shift Z WX C V B N M j gt Shift n 1 2 3 e I i End PgDn TM Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl 0 aS Y sl Ins Del Russian Russia wt s Nel
3. ASSIGN assignable 1 2 switches You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu For details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches page 209 ASSIGN assignable 5 switch You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu For details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches page 209 ALARM alarm tone volume adjustment knob Controls the volume of the warning tone that is output via the built in speaker or optional earphones When the knob is turned to the minimum position no sound can be heard However if the MIN ALARM VOL item on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to SET the alarm tone is audible even when this volume control is at the minimum position M Q 491deuo MONITOR monitor volume adjustment knob Controls the volume of the sound other than the warning tone that is output via the built in speaker or optional earphones When the knob is turned to the minimum position no sound can be heard MONITOR audio monitor selecti
4. I l amp EF Page Num 1 l2 Ja lla Js le Iz lla Jl9 lo I l I lt insert Home fup Lock Tab 1 Q ex IW ax E ec R Tally IU O HIP 4 Delete End Page v 8 9 gt al x al AIL al 3 E 4 W Down Home 4 PgUp M Caps Lock JA S D F WG H J K L H Enter 4 5 6 na iL off all set L 4 E H s s gt Shift Z X JC V B N JM i lt E 2 Shift n 1 2 3 d all el xl all mi Tl lL Et End 9 PgDn ens Ctrl Alt eta EHA Alt Ctrl 0 a Y be Del When the area of use is set to NTSC J AREA The keyboard is fixed as the Japanese keyboard Crs The keyboard language cannot be changed It is not possible to enter Japanese hiragana katakana and kanji 79 DU Jm Back Page Num Zant allo ai izl space serj Home jup Lock Tab Q W Ww Ff Enter Delete End Page 7 8 9 l f c wi B A f i el we L lt A Down Home 4 PQUp Caps Lock A D F elm I Wit Jl Ea 4 5 e Li 5 c Ul d amp lt oll oji nil ws gt Shift Zo X C JIV B N IM l lt gt off Shift 4 1 2 3 a oj al x oj zl ej l al all l zll End J _ _ P
5. Indication Remaining recording time 110 lt 120 to 110 minutes 100 110 to 100 minutes 90 100 to 90 minutes 90 85 90 to 85 minutes 85 80 85 to 80 minutes 20 15 20 to 15 minutes 15 10 15 to 10 minutes 10 5 10 to 5 minutes 5MIN flash 5 minutes 4MIN flash 4 minutes 3MIN flash 3 minutes 2MIN flash 2 minutes 1MIN flash 1 minute OMIN flash 0 minutes During shooting in special modes such as Interval Rec or Slow amp Quick Motion the indicated remaining disc time may differ from the time which can be actually shot and recorded This is particularly true when FRAME RATE is set to the maximum value in Slow amp Quick Motion shooting in which case the actual remaining time is about half of the indicated remaining disc time Remaining clips display Displays the remaining number of clips that can be recorded The display flashes once per second when the number of remaining clips is less than 10 Iris setting auto iris override Indicates the F value iris setting of the lens Auto iris override is shown by an indicator made up of two segments each on the upper and lower sides For details see Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment page 64 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Preparing a Power Supply For safety use only the Sony battery packs and AC adaptors listed below BP L80S FL75 Lithium ion
6. FILTER selector GAIN selector Set as low as possible OUTPUT DCC switch CAM OQ WHITE BAL switch A or B9 a White balance setting values are stored in memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH B item is set to MEM on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE BAL switch is changed a message reporting the new setting position appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions as follows The possible settings of the FILTER selector and their corresponding filters to be selected are listed below FILTER selector inner knob ND filter setting 1 CLEAR 2 T ND 3 T6 ND 4 TIL ND If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed a message reporting the setting appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen in display mode 3 Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to it Alternatively any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used The absolute minimum white area is as follows Rectangle centered on the screen The lengths of the sides are 70 of the length and width of the screen The white object must be within the rectangle and have an ar
7. 1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch es to FRONT 2 Setthe AUDIO SELECT switch es for the desired channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL 3 Turn the MIC LEVEL control and adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume Correspondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls On the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the front microphone input The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows MIC CH1 LEVEL Audio recording level of channel 1 Setting Control SIDEI LEVEL CH 1 control on the left FRONT MIC LEVEL control F S1 LEVEL CH 1 control linked with MIC LEVEL control MIC CH2 LEVEL Audio recording level of Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjuswysnipy e 4e deyo channel 2 Setting Control SIDE2 LEVEL CH 2 control on the right FRONT MIC LEVEL control F S2 LEVEL CH 2 control linked with MIC LEVEL control When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls linked together if the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls are set to 0 the audio signals on channels and 2 cannot be recorded Check the position of the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls before adjusting the MIC LEVEL control Recording audio on channels 3 and 4 Selecting the recorded audio You can select th
8. Using the Freeze Mix function Table of Contents 3 Using the Focus Assist function essere 81 Advanced Operations for Shooting eee eee eee eene entente 82 Recording essence marks Ey Setting clip flags with switches 82 Setting the thumbnail image at recording time Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre stored picture data Picture Cache function sess 83 Time lapse video Interval Rec function sss 84 Shooting with Slow amp Quick Motion sss 88 Exchanging discs while recording Disc Exchange Cache FUNCTION se uh RORC OR UOPRII RE as dE 89 Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function 90 Retaking the most recent clip seen 91 Assigning user defined clip titles automatically 91 Assigning user defined names to clips and clip lists 94 Using planning metadata eese 96 Recording video from external devices sss 98 Using the Live Logging function esee 99 Recording proxy data 5 tete estere eee 100 Obtaining GPS location information see 103 Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens X Y 105 Switching between GUI screens eee 105 Information an
9. amp a Page Num e 1 R 3 4 5 6 7 8 n x Insert Home Up Lock Tab Q W E R IIT HY JU l O P Enter Detetel Ena Page 7 8 9 jJ na ub vi KIL EJL H rip uj uj 3l C xU iL Down Home 4 J PoUp ls CapsLock A S D F WG H J K L NI 4 5 6 ell Bj ell AJ ni Pf ol ni alls xl 3l gt Shift Z X JC JV B N M j gt 2 Shift n 1 2 3 I all ul cll ML M TIL bib sll 007 IL End L Pn e ier Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ctrl 0 AHF TP du Be Spanish Spain a gt 96 amp E A Re Blog 2 Ji a ssl4 lis He JE K 4 0 i p Insert Inicio P g urn Tab Q W JE R T IY U l O P Enter Supr Fin AV T 8 9 gt H PE P Pag miiol libi Bloq A S D F G JH J K L 4 5 6 May s es Shift Z X JC JV B N IM Shift 1 2 3 lt a En fL Y AURI iro Control Alt Alt Gr Control x J 0 Ins Supr List of Supported USB Keyboards xipueddy 265 xipueddy 266 When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA PAL AREA and the font setting is Korean The keyboard is fixed as the Korean keyboard a and you can enter Hangul characters The k yb ard language cannot be changed
10. serere Uploading clips e eere ee Eel t Downloading clips cceceeceeceeceeseeseeseeseeseeseesecsecsecsesseeeceeeeeseneeaee Copying clips directly between XDCAM devices 145 Shortcut List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 148 Menu Organization TOP menu and top level menus 149 j 151 OPERA TION m nt dresse OU eens 151 PAINT menu 162 MAINTENANCE menu 170 FILE menu we 187 DIAGNOSIS men 5 tnodo deed dete 191 Menu Operations eeeeeeee sees esee teens enean tn ensis stata sinensis sns en sensns en enacn 193 Displaying Menus n enri i ee tete et gente pert 193 Basic menu operations eese 193 Using the USER menu example menu operation 196 Editing the USER menu iiir ibn 197 Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings 200 Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD j 201 Selecting the display items sees 201 Change confirmation adjustment progress messages 203 Setting the marker display serere 203 Setting the viewfinder sese 204 Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars 205 Setting the shot ID eR 205 Displaying the status conf
11. IRIS VAR V POS 250 to 0 to 249 Adjusts the vertical position of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS SPEED 99 to 99 Adjusts the auto iris speed CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF ON Turns on and off the function which during auto iris adjustment ignores very bright areas by dulling the reaction to high luminescence Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 18 GENLOCK GENLOCK OFF ON Turns genlock on and off GL HD H PHASE 99 to 99 Sets the HD output H phase for genlock operation GL SD H PHASE 99 to 99 Sets the SD output H phase for genlock Does not appear operation when the FORMAT page item SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and the SYSTEM FREQUENCY item is set to 23 9P REFERENCE INTERNAL Displays the type of reference signal used by GENLOCK this unit SDI IN 19 ND COMP ND OFFSET OFF ON Turns on and off the mode which sets ND ADJUST neutral density filter color compensation values CLEAR ND EXEC Clears ND filter color compensation values OFFSET 20 AUTO AUTO BLK EXEC Executes the auto black shading correction SHADING SHADING function If executed when in SLS slow speed shutter mode this performs only fine compensation on edge portions of the screen RESET BLK SHD EXEC Clear black shading compensation values TEST OUT VBS Y R G B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT SELECT connector MASTER 6dB 3dB 0dB
12. 480 to 0 to 479 Compensates the horizontal position of lens file center marker LENS CENTER V 270 to 0 to 269 Compensates the vertical position of lens file center marker TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector LENS R FLARE 9 99 to 99 Adjusts the lens file flare R LENS G FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the lens file flare G LENS B FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the lens file flare B LENS W ROFST 99 to 99 Adjusts the white balance R compensation value of the lens file LENS W B OFST 9 99 to 99 Adjusts the white balance B compensation value of the lens file Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 09 LENS FILE3 SHADING CH SEL R G B TEST Selects the channel adjusted by this menu If TEST is selected the setting is linked to the setting of TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector LENS R G B H SAW 9 99 to 99 Adjusts the H Saw white shading compensation LENS R G B H 99 to 99 Adjusts the H Parabola white PARA 9 shading compensation LENS R G B V SAW 9 99 to 99 Adjusts the V Saw white shading compensation LENS R G B V 99 to 99 Adjusts the V Parabola white PARA 9 shading compensation 10 USB MEMORY USBIN JUMP TO OFF USER ALL For details see Jumping to a SCENE LENS REFER File Related Menu Page when USERI Connecting a USB Flash Drive page 226 a
13. Press the MENU knob Then select the item that you want to delete Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE Switch to the CANCEL PRST position The message DELETE ITEM OK appears Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE Switch to the CANCEL PRST position again To delete items from a page by using the menu 1 4 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a new page page 197 Press the MENU knob Then select the item that you want to delete and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select DELETE and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again and the message DELETE OK YES NO appears Select YES and press the MENU knob To replace items on a page 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a new page page 197 Press the MENU knob Then select the item that you want to replace and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select MOVE and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again Select the position to which you want to move the item and press the MENU knob The item selected in step 2 moves to the position that you selected in step 4 To insert a blank line 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a new page page 197 2 Press the MENU knob Then select the item that you want to replace and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears 3 Select BLANK and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again
14. Tripod Mounting 1 Attach the VCT 14 tripod adaptor not supplied to the tripod Tripod adaptor suonejedeJjg z 1e1deuj Camera mount 2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor Slide the camcorder forward along the groove in the adaptor until it clicks 3 Try to move the camcorder back and forth to confirm that it does not slip off the attachment Tripod Mounting 47 suongeredejd gsajdeyo 48 To remove the camcorder from the tripod adaptor Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the direction of the arrow The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the camcorder is removed If this happens press the red button against the lever a second time and move the lever as shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position If the pin remains in the engaged position you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor Connecting a Video Light Connecting a Video Light With this camcorder you can use the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light powered by 12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W If you connect the video light to the LIGHT connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT switch to AUTO you can turn the light on and off automatically as you start and stop the VDR operation The output of the LIGHT connector on the camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power thro
15. n damp or dusty locations Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain Locations subject to violent vibration Near strong magnetic fields Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong electromagnetic fields n direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods xipueddy To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and interference with audio and video signals It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this unit be powered off Vote on laser beams Laser beams may damage the CCDs If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam be careful not to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the camera Condensation If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm location or if ambient temperature suddenly rises moisture may form on the outer surface of the unit and or inside of the unit This is known as condensation If condensation occurs turn off the unit and wait until the condensation clears before operating the unit Operating the unit while condensation is present may damage the unit Do the following to prevent this from happening When you move or operate the camcorder in an environment where condensation may form be sure to load a disc in advance and close the disc compartment lid For details see Loading and
16. nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR TS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE E _ Trademarks and Licenses 269 xipueddy 270 This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay G cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh G cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com
17. sese 57 Setting the Electronic Shutter Shutter modes erroe be APERTE Ee eS Selecting the shutter mode and shutter speed 61 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment 64 Adjusting the Audio Level eere eere eerte tnter tn nen enoann 66 Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio inputs from the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors eese 66 Manually adjusting the audio level of the MIC IN connector 67 Recording audio on channels 3 and 4 sss 67 Setting Time Data eee eee e eese etes testate KES Eae eevee iais 69 Setting the timecode errea qo ee RE REED 69 Setting the user Bits sei er HR IRE RENTA 69 Synchronizing the timecode serene 70 Chapter 4 Shooting Handling Discs scccssssssscsssssssescsscssessessscsssssesssssscsssssesessescessssesseseseeres 73 Discs used for recording and playback sss 73 Notes on handling isse conta cae als ah ERE ee 73 Write protecting discs esses 73 Loading and unloading a disc sse 74 Formatting a disc 2 2 debe cge n tede ais 75 Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage f nctiOnD ui iscn d one onte atit oe 75 Basic Procedure for Shooting eere eee eee eese eene ee etate atnan Playing back the recorded clip Deleting the recorded clip
18. Salvage XXXX REC INHL 1080 50i 1080 25P 1080 59 94i 1080 29 97P 1080 23 98P 720 50P 720 59 94P 625 50i 525 59 94i HD422 1080 HD422 720 HD420 1080 HD420 720 IMX50 Clip IMX40 Clip IMX30 Clip DVCAM Clip 8CHx16 Clip 4CHx24 Clip 2CHx16 Clip A disc that requires salvage was inserted To record on the disc eject the disc insert it again and execute salvage processing Salvage processing failed For details see Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage function page 75 The loaded disc cannot be salvaged by this unit The XXXX in the message is a code for XDCAM devices that can salvage the disc Refer to the list of device codes see page 76 and salvage the disc using one of the indicated devices The Write Inhibit tab of the disc is in the recording disabled position or salvage processing needs to be done on the loaded disc Set the tab to the recording enabled position Or eject the disc insert it again and perform salvage processing This appears when mixed format recording mode is disabled and the current resolution or system frequency setting of this unit does not match the resolution or system frequency of the inserted disc To carry out recording operations exchange the disc or change the resolution or system frequency setting of this unit or enable mixed format recording mode This appears when mixed format recording mode is disabled
19. To rename pages The names of pages USER 1 to USER 19 created with EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 can be changed The maximum name length is 15 characters The ASSIGN ITEM SEL page cannot be renamed 1 Display the EDIT PAGE NAME or EDIT PAGE NAME2 of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu EDIT PAGE NAME To rename USER1 to USERIO EDIT PAGE NAME2 To rename USER11 to USERI9 Menu Operations E220EDIT PAGE NAME M TOP gt U U U U U U U U U U CCCCCCCCCC NNNNNNNNNW mmm 707070707070707070 70 OONOUIBWN NNNNNNNNNW MMMMM Mmmm 707070707070707070 70 OONOUIAWN For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select the page that you want to rename USER 1 to USER 19 and press the MENU knob A character table appears E220EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP eu U U U U 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP BRSTUUUXYZIX1labcdefshiJk 1mnomrarstuuuxsSz INS DEL RET ESC END 3 Follow steps 3 and 4 described in Setting the shot ID page 205 to enter characters 4 when you have finished entering the name turn the MENU knob to move W to END and press the MENU knob The entered name is now displayed E220EDIT PAGE NAME1 iD IAL ITEM TOP gt USER USER2 USERS USER4 USERS USERG USER USERS USERS USER1 CCCCCCCCCO NNNNNNNUNUT FTT TIEFE TETTE 707070 7070707070701 DOONAN Oo Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings You c
20. path name lt CRLF gt Specify one of the following values in flag according to the specification in lt path name gt When aclip is specified in lt path name gt 444 Lock 666 Unlock When a directory in the General directory is specified in path name 555 Forbid writing to the directory 777 Allow writing to the directory When a file in the General directory is specified in lt path name gt 444 Forbid writing to and execution of the file 555 Forbid writing to the file but allow execution 666 Allow writing to the file but forbid execution 777 Allow writing to and execution of the file Input example SITE CHMOD 444 Clip C0001 MXF Lock clip C0001 MXF SITE TCPR Presets the starting timecode of a clip copied with the STOR command Specify the timecode in the format ffssmmhh ff frames ss seconds mm minutes hh hours This command remains in effect until a STOR command is executed or if no STOR command is executed until the FTP connection is terminated If a SITE UMMD command is executed after this command the SITE UMMD command takes priority and this command is discarded If this command is executed several times in sequence the last command takes priority Syntax SITE TCPR SP timecode gt lt CRLF gt Input example SITE TCPR 00050001 The starting timecode is preset to 01 00 05 00 Recording Continuous Timecode via FTP Connection When you
21. 228 Directory Structure 5 aoo ee e pee nets 228 File operation restrictions sees 229 FTP File Operations sess Making FTP connections hiing erae neis 234 Command list eee reto eee eee 235 Recording Continuous Timecode via FTP Connection 239 Chapter 9 Maintenance Testing the Camcorder before Shooting eese 240 Preparations for testing Testing the camera 2 Testing the VDR 5 nnne nee ntt eee PRESE E Een Maintenance esee erneute eee vto eee Pha ee ee ei ee qoaa eae aerae a eee eene e eSa Eror sS eons Cleaning the viewfinder Note about the battery terminal eene 245 Operation Warnings eere eee esee te sense a tosta tata senses senes tasas suae 246 Table of Contents Appendix Input output Audio performance essere neret 259 Camera Sections n abe RAP SS 259 Viewfinder and related equipment ssse 260 Other quipinent a toot nre ben terne 260 Optical disc drive section 260 Supplied accessories ore et e eae eats 261 Additional equipment eese 261 Chart of Optional Components and Accessories esee 263 List of Supported USB Keyboards eere eerte tnnt 264 Recommended USB Flash Drives As of April 2014 267 Trademarks and Licenses eere eerte eee eee
22. Duration UMID non MXF file File name Syntax STAT SP path name lt CRLF gt The following data is transferred depending on whether a file is specified with lt path name gt File specified The properties of the specified file No specification The size of the data transferred thus far unit bytes Input example STAT Clip C0001 MXF ABOR Requests this unit to abort a file transfer currently in progress Syntax ABOR lt CRLF gt SYST Displays the system name of this unit Syntax SYST lt CRLF gt HELP Displays a list of the commands supported by this unit or an explanation of the specified command Syntax HELP lt SP gt lt command name gt lt CRLF gt The following data is transferred depending on whether a command name is specified with lt command name gt Command name specified Explanation of the specified command No specification Command list Input example HELP RETR NOOP Does nothing except return a response Used to check whether this unit is running Syntax NOOP lt CRLF gt PWD Displays the current directory if the directory is the root directory Syntax PWD lt CRLF gt CWD Changes the current directory moves from the current directory to another directory Syntax CWD SP path name lt CRLF gt Moves to a directory as follows depending on whether a directory is specified with lt path name gt Directory specified To t
23. SueeJog N9 ul suogeiedo s 191deuo 140 Transferring clips Direct FTP function You can transfer clips MXF files between this unit and external devices over a network This unit has an Direct FTP function which allows you to connect to any XDCAM device or computer with an FTP server function and transfer files with a few simple operations in the GUI screen The following table lists the types of file transfers that this unit can execute Transfer Transfer target Function direction Upload One or more clips put Multiple clips with clip list Part of one clip partial put Download One clip get File transfers with this function are limited to clips high resolution data and clip list files To transfer files of other types proxy AV data files in the General and User Data directories and so on operate after establishing an FTP connection see page 228 An FTP server function must be available Service Version 7 0 or higher a The following software requirements must be satisfied nthe case of Windows Microsoft Window IIS Internet Information Upload clip put A Download clip get all ld oo 200 l j e00 SELEISsoo p Gm O PDW HD1500 Laptop computer 9 Material server Remote host nthe case of Macintosh Mac OS X Version 10
24. Wi UMID Unchange Cancel 3 Execute steps 6 to 9 of To upload entire clips page 141 If the connection succeeds the Select Clip to Download screen appears Download Clip via Direct FTP Select Clip to Download MXF If the remote host is a computer only the MXF files in the specified directory appear When more 301 or more clips are stored on a remote host the denominator indicating the clip total at the upper right is shown as and the names of the 301st and following clips are not displayed File names containing other than ASCII characters kanji and so on are not displayed 4 Selecta clip to download and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The download starts When the download finishes the Downloading Result Report screen appears Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen Copying clips directly between XDCAM devices In the field or another environment where the devices are not connected to a network you can copy upload clips between XDCAM devices by connecting them directly The example in the following procedure shows how to copy a clip from this unit to a PDW HD1500 Insert discs into both units and proceed as follows 1 Connect this unit and the PDW HD1500 by a network cable The cable can be either a cross cable or a straight cable Network cable not supplie
25. Advanced Operations for Shooting To shoot and record 1 After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording following the instructions in Basic Procedure for Shooting page 77 secure the camcorder so that it will not move 2 Pressthe REC START button or the VTR button on the lens The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode When you use the PRE LIGHTING function recording starts after the light is switched on The actual recording to disc begins when the camcorder has saved about ten seconds of video in memory so disc access is intermittent While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode the TALLY green tally indicator in the viewfinder flashes 4 flashes second and the message AUTO INTERVAL M S flashes on the viewfinder screen When the camcorder is capturing the picture in memory the REC recording red tally indicator in the viewfinder lights After the length of time for recording on the disc REC TIME has elapsed the camcorder automatically stops recording To interrupt shooting Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens Disc access may occur for recording picture data already stored in memory To continue shooting Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens again To exit Auto Interval Rec mode Do either of the following Set the POWER switch to OFF Set CACHE INTVAL REC to OFF on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu Time r
26. For details see Preparing a Power Supply page 33 Set the POWER switch to ON Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button to switch the LCD monitor to status display and check that the following condition is met The battery status indicator shows at least five segments Bl If it does not replace the battery pack with a fully charged one 4 Basic procedure for shooting from Check that there are no obstructions such as cables near the disc compartment lid Then press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid After checking that the disc is not write protected see page 73 load it and close the disc compartment lid adjusting the black balance and white balance to stopping recording Switch settings After turning on the power and loading a disc set the switches and selectors as shown below and begin operation DISPLAY ON O Iris Automatic Q Zoom Automatic OUTPUT DCC CAM DCC ON F RUN SET R RUN F RUN or R RUN set as needed Q AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 AUTO Basic Procedure for Shooting Dunoous y je1deu 77 Bunooug y je1deuo 78 Shooting 5 6 4 1 1 Flick the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK to adjust the black balance For details of black balance adjustment see page 55 2 Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting conditions and adjust the white balance For details see Adjusting the white balance page 57 3 Aim the
27. HOUR Sets the hour value MIN Sets the minutes value SEC Sets the seconds value YEAR Sets the year MONTH Sets the month DAY Sets the day Turn the MENU knob to move to the item you want to set and press the MENU knob on the left of the selected item changes to and on the left of the setting changes to 2 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock suoneiedeJjg z sajdeuy 39 suongeredejd z ejdeuj 40 4 Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value and press the MENU knob changes to and changes to D To continue the remaining settings repeat steps 3 and 4 c When you finish settings turn the MENU knob to move to OK then press the MENU knob The internal clock is set with the date and time set in steps 3 to 5 The TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears again The time set on the TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed To cancel the setting Before executing step 6 move to ESC at the top right of the window and press the MENU knob Alternatively flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side All settings or changes are discarded and the TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears When you set the time also set TIME ZONE Set TIME ZONE on the UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu For details see Setting the UMID data page 218 Setting the Clock to GPS Time You can set the camcorder clock using clocks on
28. Je deuD 13 M Q Je deUuD 14 REC START recording start button Press to start recording Press it again to stop recording The effect is the same as that of the REC button on the lens SHUTTER selector Set to ON to use the electronic shutter Flick to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter mode setting within the range previously set with the menu When this switch is operated the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area for about three seconds For details about the shutter speed and shutter mode settings see Setting the Electronic Shutter page 60 FILTER selector Switches between optical filters built into this unit When this selector is used with the menu item for filter selection display set to ON see page 203 the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds The unit is equipped with two switchable filters You can switch between four electrical CC filters and four ND filters FILTER selector CC filter outer knob setting A Cross filter B 3200K C 4300K D 6300K a A type of special effect filter A cross of light appears in the highlight section FILTER selector ND filter inner knob setting 1 CLEAR 2 t ND attenuates light to approximately up 3 l 16 ND attenuates light to approximately l 16 4 ea ND attenuates light to approximately P Locations and Functi
29. xepu 278 settings obtained by ATW 58 specifying offset 217 White balance memory 31 Wireless LAN setting 213 Wireless microphone reception level 29 X XLR connection automatic detection function 44 Z ZEBRA switch 26 Zoom position 28 Index The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation PDW 850 Sony Corporation SYM CN 4 544 825 11 1 http www sony net 2014
30. 106 Clip playback screen 9 Unlit THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Unlit suBcuP DISC MENU e Clip list playback screen 9 Unlit THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Lit o suBcuP DISC MENU a The playback screens appear when the LCD monitor is switched to display of video with CHAR or without MONI superimposed text Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button to switch the LCD monitor to these modes see page 18 b The clip list playback screen appears when a clip list is loaded into the unit s memory see page 132 The other thumbnail screens are Expand thumbnail screen Chapter thumbnail screen Essence mark thumbnail screen Overview Clip thumbnail screen TC 0028 06 09 TC00282202 TC 00 28 DareaTiME 30 NOV 2005 13 38 pum 0 00 1 Lit THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Unlit sus cup DISC MENU e Clip list thumbnail screen P Clip List E0001 002 013 TC 00 00 00 00 TC 00 00 12 04 TCo0002808 TC00903535 TCO0004508 PALA TC00005916 TC0001 0618 pATE amp TIME 28 JUL 2006 19 55 Lit THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Lit SUB CLIP DISC MENU Information and controls in thumbnail screens About the display of clip and clip list names You can specify that titles should appear instead of names in the clip name areas of thumbnail screens You can also change the display language To specify that titles see page 94 i
31. A Ie IE JP IF Ie IF Jm YE Je 4 5 6 gt Syr gt IW X jc Iv IB IN lf qs ES 1 2 A l Ctrl gt Alt Alt Gr Ctrl o dn Inser Suppr 264 List of Supported USB Keyboards German Germany
32. Adjustments and Settings from Menus sBumes pojrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 211 sBumes pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 212 2 Move the cursor to the item to set using the MENU knob and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears EDIT FUNCTION ESC 3 Select INSERT and press the MENU knob TEODSCONTENTS Y 000000000 0 2 0 3 9 4 L S R 6 A e P 8 U g u 0 U 4 Add an item as follows Press the MENU knob scroll the page until the desired page appears and then press the MENU knob 2 Press the MENU knob again select the desired item and then press the MENU knob The EDIT ASSIGN SEL page appears again displaying the added item Cc Repeat steps 2 to 4 to add the remaining items You can register up to ten items Operation of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches when UA01 to UA10 are assigned When an on off switchable function or menu item is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches each time the switch is pressed toggles the function on or off When another type of menu item is assigned pressing the switch displays the item and its setting value on the viewfinder screen You can then change the setting by pressing and turning the MENU knob The viewfinder screen display disappears approximately three seconds after the last operation Adjustments and Settings from Menus Setting power saving functions You can limit the function of some output connec
33. All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA hash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh 9 cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed f this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright potice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright potice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distr
34. CLIP The first frame of the clip Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 12 CAM REC TALLY OFF ON Turns the tally illumination control on or off CONFIG 1 BLINK when the battery is almost exhausted or the disc is almost full REC START BEEP OFF ON Turns the REC START STOP alarm sound on or off SDI REC OFF RM PARA Specifies the function for enabling CONTROL synchronized recording with the unit RM A REC trigger signal is output to the recorder connected to the SDI OUT connector PARA Controls synchronized recording with the unit HDSDI REMOTE I F CHARA G TLY R TLY Selects whether to use the function that enables recording control from this unit of an external device connected to the CA camera adaptor or one of the SDI OUT 1 2 connectors HDSDI output of this unit 8 Also selects the indication that shows whether the external device is recording CHARA Use the function and indicate by the controlling external device indicator in the viewfinder see page 30 G TLY Use the function and indicate by the TALLY indicator in the viewfinder R TLY Use the function and indicate by the REC recording red tally indicator in the viewfinder When R TLY is selected the TALLY indicator lights even when the unit is not recording MATCH CLIP NAME OFF ON Specifies whether to superimpose clip name information on the HDSDI output on the SDIOUT 1 2 connectors A clip with the same name as on the c
35. Display type Description 3 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears then press the MENU knob 4 Select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message LOAD OK YES NO appears 5 To carry out the load select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO The access indicator lights When the load is completed the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off If data cannot be loaded If one of the following error messages appears during or after the load operation then the data was not loaded ALL File ID 10 characters and date year month day FID File ID 16 characters DATE Date saved year month day hours minutes seconds MODEL Information on the model Loading saved data from a USB flash drive The data loaded from the USB flash drive overwrites the data saved in the camcorder How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select USER FILE LOAD and press the MENU knob The USER LOAD page appears Saving and Recalling User Files Error Cause Action message NO USB No USB flash Connect or MEMORY drive is reconnect the flashing connected USB flash drive
36. EX is displayed when the extender is on and 08 is displayed when the shrinker is on DIAGNOSIS menu No Page Item Description 01 HOURS OPERATION Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on in METER units of hours LASER Displays the total number of output parameters to the optical heads OPERATION rst Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on in units of hours reset possible SPINDLE rst Displays the total time that the spindle has been rotating in units of hours reset possible LOADING rst Displays the number of times that discs have been loaded reset possible SEEK rst Displays the total seek time by the optical heads in units of hours reset possible 02 TIME DATE ADJUST For details see Setting the Date Time ofthe Internal Clock GPS ADJUST page 39 HOUR MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuey 9 JajdeyD 191 No Page Item Description 03 ROM VERSION PACKAGE X XX Displays ROM version 1 SYEXXX SY2K X XX SY2U X XX DRV X XX AT X XX FP X XX 04 ROM VERSION LVIS X XX 2 TSYS XXX TMBP X XX CHRN X XX BRDG X XX PIER X XX CAVA X XX 05 ROM VERSION DSP0 X XX 3 PRXA X XX GPS X XX 06 DEV STATUS I O FP CN DCP VF Displays the status of each internal device of this unit D A DCP1 DCP2 EEPROM CN DCP DR FRAM AT FAN MB LSI DCP1 DCP2 TG SCI
37. Input System Connecting a microphone to the MIC IN connector You can attach the ECM 680S stereo microphone not supplied to the microphone holder of the HDVF 20A viewfinder not supplied 1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp Microphone holder clamp 2 Place the microphone in the microphone holder Wind the microphone spacer sheet type supplied with this unit and the ECM 680S around the microphone while peeling off the protective sheets on both sides of the microphone spacer Place the microphone in the holder so that UP is at the top Close the microphone holder Tighten the screw suonejedeJjg z je1deuj On how to perform this operation refer to the operation manual for the microphone 3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector then set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel on which you want to record the audio from this microphone to FRONT for CH 1 CH 2 or F for CH 3 CH 4 4 Secure the microphone cable with the cable clamps Connecting microphones to the AUDIO IN connectors You can connect up to two monaural microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors using a CAC 12 Microphone Holder not supplied Preparing the Audio Input System 43 suongeredejd z ejdeuj 44 The following is the procedure for attaching an electret condenser microphone such as the ECM 678 673 On how to attach the CAC 12 refer to the operation manual for t
38. MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 28 The lighting up conditions of each item can be set on the l LED STD page of the OPERATION menu 1 The standard SHUTTER setting differs depending on the recording format 1080 50i 1080 59 94i 720 50P 720 59 94P The SHUTTER selector is set to OFF 1080 23 98P shutter is ON 1080 25P so shutter is ON 1080 29 97P 9 shutter is ON 2 When SHUTTER SELECT on the SHUTTER SELECT page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to DEGREE the standard setting is SHUTTER selector OFF regardless of the recording format Layout of the status display on the viewfinder screen The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder settings and operating status a center marker a safety zone marker etc When the menu screen is not displayed and the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY ASPECT switch is set to on the items for which an ON setting was made on the VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 or VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu or with related switches are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen The messages that give details of the settings and adjustment progress and results can also be made to appear for about three seconds while settings are being changed during adjustment and after adjustment For details about the display item selection see Selecting the display items page 201 For details about setting change and adjustment progress mes
39. SETTING WRR VALID CH ALL CHI SEL Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the wireless receiver or channel 1 only ALL Enable both channel 1 and 2 CHI Enable channel 1 only Select this setting to use the wireless receiver as a monaural receiver WRR CH SELECT TXI TX2 Specifies the target channel for other items in this menu TX1 Channel 1 TX2 Channel 2 WRR DELAY comp OFF ON Enables or disables the delay compensation function for wireless audio input OFF Disables the function ON Enables the function the audio in all EE output is delayed by about 8 ms TX channel number B Displays the name of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT The channel number and name shown here are recorded inside the Description tag in the clip metadata file C MO1 XML where is 0001 to 9999 TX AUDIO PEAK PEAK channel number J Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT is over the peak TX INPUTLEVEL MIC LINE channel number D Displays whether the input level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT is set to MIC or LINE TX ATT LEVEL channel number D Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected b
40. SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER 1 1000 SHUTTER 1 2000 2 Turn the MENU knob to move to the shutter mode or shutter speed you want then press the MENU knob on the left of the selected item changes to and on the left of the setting changes to 2 J Turn the MENU knob until ON appears then press the MENU knob on the left of the selected item changes to and on the left of the setting changes to e To set another mode or speed return to step 2 Note that only the shutter speeds set to ON can be selected with the SHUTTER selector 4 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen To set the shutter speed in degree units On the SHUTTER SELECT page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can specify degrees angle of opening of the shutter to select the shutter speed in standard shutter mode When you enable degree settings the unit disables all items on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu except SHUTTER ECS and SHUTTER SLS Setting the Electronic Shutter 1 Display the SHUTTER SELECT page of the MAINTENANCE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 Select SHUTTER SELECT and turn the MENU knob to display DEGREE M27OSHUTTER SELECT T
41. SSEC 10SEC ISSEC 20SEC 30SEC 40SEC SOSEC IMIN to 85MIN PRE LIGHTING OFF 2SEC SSEC 10SEC NUMBER OF FRAME When SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC FORMAT is set to HD422 50 HD420 HQ or HD420 SP 2 6 12 When either SYSTEM LINE or REC FORMAT is set to another setting 1 3 6 For details see Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre stored picture data Picture Cache function page 83 and Time lapse video Interval Rec function page 84 TRIGGER INTERVAL M ISEC to 10SEC 15SEC 20SEC 30SEC 40SEC S50SEC 1MIN to 1OMIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 40MIN SOMIN 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 12H 24H DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF ON For details see Exchanging discs while recording Disc Exchange Cache function page 89 CLIP CONT REC OFF ON For details see Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function page 90 LIVE LOGGING OFF LIVE VIEW For details see Using the Live Logging function page 99 Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuay 9 Jajdeyo 153 No Page Item Settings Description 06 ASSIGNABLE ASSIGN SW 1 For details see Assigning SW ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt functions to ASSIGN switches ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt page 209 ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt ASSIGN SW lt 5 gt ASSIGN SW lt RET gt ZOOM SPEED 0 to 20 to 99 RETURN VIDEO OFF ON 07 POWER SAVE ETHERNET USB DSABL ENABL For d
42. The data is saved in the following directories which are created automatically when a USB flash drive is mounted Proxy AV data MSSONY PRO XDCAM MEMDISC PROAVID Sub Metadata MSSONY PRO XDCAM MEMDISC PROAVID Clip Planning metadata MSSONY PRO XDCAM MEMDISC PROA VID General Sony Planning USB flash drives must be formatted with the FAT32 file system If a drive is formatted with any other file system reformat it on this unit see page 102 Never remove a USB flash drive or disconnect the battery pack or power cord while it is being accessed while this unit s ACCESS indicator is lit Doing so can corrupt the data on the USB flash drive and make it unusable To enable proxy data recording and copying to USB flash drives Before starting set ETHERNET USB in the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to ENABL 1 mthe OPERATION menu display the MEMORY REC page See Basic menu operations page 193 for more information about menu operations 2 Select MEMORY REC and turn the MENU knob until ENABL appears O320MEMORY REC TOP MEMORY REC ENABL COPY CURRENT CLP EXEC COPY ALL CLIPS EXEC ABORT COPY gt EXEC DEL ALL MEM CLP EXEC FORMAT MEMORY EXEC This enables proxy data recording and copying from discs to USB flash drives tis not possible to make proxy data recording settings while this unit is in the following states Wireless LAN connections are enabled The Live Lo
43. by the DISPLAY switch see page 19 El Gain value Indicates the gain value in dB of the video amplifier as set by the GAIN selector E Shutter speed Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode However ifthe SHUTTER selector see page 14 is set to OFF nothing is displayed For details of the displayed shutter speed see Setting the Electronic Shutter page 60 Operation alarm display area and clip transfer status display area For details see Operation alarm messages page 250 It also displays clip transfer status when an optional CBK WA100 is connected Audio level Indicates the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2 The peak indication of the VDR level meter is related as follows to the audio level HHHHDDUU PEREON 52 28 20 12 dB Q Audio channel 1 level indicator Audio channel 2 level indicator VDR level meter indicator The segment colors change from gray to white at or above the AU REF LEVEL set on the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu This setting does not affect the relationship between the number of lit segments and the audio levels The example in the above figure shows the colors when AU REF LEVEL is set to 20 dB Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls M Q 491deuo 31 M Q Je1deuo 32 Remaining disc capacity Indicates the remaining recording time in minutes of the disc Examples of remaining recording time indication
44. clips For details of the chapter function see page 117 RESET RETURN button Resets the value shown in the time counter display According to the settings of the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch see page 22 and the F RUN SET R RUN switch see page 22 this button resets the display as follows To reset Counter to 0 00 00 00 Settings of switches DISPLAY switch COUNTER DISPLAY switch TC PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch PRESET F RUN SET R RUN switch SET DISPLAY switch User bits data to 0000 00 U BIT 00 PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch PRESET F RUN SET R RUN switch SET Timecode to 00 00 00 00 a Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the disc those bits which can be used to record useful information for the user such as scene number shooting place etc For details see Setting Time Data page 69 This button returns to the previous screen when pressed during thumbnail display For details see GUI screen operations page 114 DISPLAY switch This cycles the data displayed in the counter display through the sequence COUNTER TC and U BIT COUNTER Display the elapsed recording playback time hours minutes seconds frames TC Display timecode U BIT Display user bit data For details see Status display on the LCD monitor page 19 M Q 491deuo BRIGHT brightness button Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight Each press of
45. displayed ON or OFF STATUS Selects whether or not the AUDIO STATUS AUDIO window is displayed ON or OFF STATUS GPS Selects whether or not the STATUS GPS window is displayed ON or OFF Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsig nuaw 9 JajdeyD 207 Adjustments and Settings from Menus Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions You can set the gain values for the L M and H positions of the GAIN selector which switches the gain of the video amplifier How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select the item for the switch position GAIN function the gain value changes when the GAIN selector is operated ON When the button assigned with the TURBO GAIN function is set to TURBO GAIN the gain value does not change when the GAIN selector is operated unless the button is pressed again then press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the GAIN SW page Item Description GAIN Sets the gain value Oo LOW corresponding to the L position B of the GAIN selector oy GAIN
46. distinguish reading and writing from partial reading and writing Read Read data sequentially from the start to the end of the file Partial read Read only a part of the data in the file Root directory Write Write data sequentially from the start to the end of the file Partial write Write data to a part of the file only Operations other than Read and Partial read are possible only when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording enabled File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write INDEX XML Contains data for management of the Yes No No No No material on the disc ALIAS XML 9 Contains conversion tables for assigning Yes No No No No user defined names to clips and clip lists DISCMETA XML Contains metadata to indicate the disc Yes Yes No No No properties MEDIAPRO XML _ Contains a list of materials on the disc Yes No No No No basic properties related information and information about access methods SYSPRO XML Contains system setting information and Yes No No No No menu setting information for the devices Overview suoneiedo aji4 g 1e1deuj 229 suolesado aji4 g seydeyp 230 File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Other files Files other than the above No No a Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE b Only file
47. eoueuejure N 6 Je deuD 244 B Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN and check that the timecode indication starts changing again and continues to change even when you restart recording and stop recording again Set the DISPLAY switch to U BIT and check that the user bit data that was set is displayed Maintenance Maintenance Cleaning the viewfinder Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner Never use organic solvents such as thinners Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning ____ __ p 3 C Viewfinder barrel Eyecup holder Protecting filter Packing ring Eyecup 1 Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel For the detaching procedure see Detaching the eyepiece page 37 2 Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder 3 Remove the protecting filter together with the packing ring from inside the eyecup holder 4 Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring Fog proof filter Depending on the temperature and humidity the protecting filter may mist because of vapor or your breath To ensure that the viewfinder is always clear replace the protecting filter with a fog proof filter option part No 1 547 341 11 Fitting the fog proof filter Replace the protecting filter on the packing
48. monochrome and camera video color effective for framing shots UAOI to Assigns the items assigned UA109 in the ASSIGN SEL menu VF COLOR Assigns the VF color detail DETAIL function PLAY amp SDI Assigns the REC trigger REC S S signal output function during playback to the recorder connected to the SDI OUT connector CC 5600K Assigns the function that applies an electrical 5600 K filter ZOOM TELE WIDE 9 For use with a lens that supports serial communications assign the ZOOM TELE setting to ASSIGN 3 and the WIDE setting to ASSIGN 4 ZOOM WIDE TELE For use with a lens that supports serial communications assign the ZOOM WIDE setting to ASSIGN 3 and the TELE setting to ASSIGN 4 sui pejreieq pue s ejds q nue y 9 saldeyp SHOT MARKI Assigns the function that records a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark SHOT MARK2 Assigns the function that records a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark 210 Adjustments and Settings from Menus a Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switches allow you to display or not to display all markers b This function cannot be assigned to the RET button on the lens c RETURNI to 4 are displayed when an optional CA FB70 CA TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected d Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu you can use this switch to display the
49. sampled at 24 bits for high quality Dual layer Professional discs can record about 95 minutes of high quality video and audio data The generous recording times and the high quality of the recorded video and audio allow this unit to meet the most stringent requirements of production teams in a wide range of genres from news gathering through digital cinema and program production The unit supports a variety of HD formats including formats with 720 lines of resolution 1 The MPEG 2 422P HL codec performs 4 2 2 sampling and records at a video bit rate of 50 Mbps 2 Image compression uses the MPEG 2 Long GOP system 3 The PDW HD1500 supports recording of up to eight channels in MPEG HD422 format Format compatibility with earlier models The unit is capable of recording in the MPEG 2 MP HL 35 25 Mbps formats used by earlier XDCAM HD devices These formats offer longer recording times than the MPEG 2 422P HL 50 Mbps format It is also capable of recording and playback in the MPEG IMX 50 40 30 Mbps and DVCAM 25 Mbps formats Features 9 MeIAJOAQ JE deUD M Q Je deUuD 10 Rich selection of interfaces HDSDI and SDSDI output connectors Allow free combination of HDSDI and SDSDI signals Timecode and other text data can be superimposed on signals from one of the two interfaces Composite signal output connector Selectable video input connectors The unit is designed to support recording in every type o
50. 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail screen 2 Select Clip Properties The Clip Properties screen appears Clip Properties Clip No 001 035 Name Tel visionLCD Title1 Capping Literally years of spe Title2 R troprpjecteurs BRAVIA AV Format meea 1080SP 4ch Frame Rate PB 59 94P Capture 23 98P TC DUR 00 23 00 25 0 00 09 22 Created 30 NOV 2005 13 35 00 00 Modified 20 MAY 2006 15 02 00 00 Rec Device PDW 700 SN 10001 Horizontal Scroll Be Clip No Clip number total number of clips Name Clip name P Titlel Title 1 Title2 Title 2 P AV Format Recording format Frame Rate The frame rate from the time when the clip was shot For clips shot using Slow amp Quick Motion PB Capture where PB is the playback frame rate and Capture is the shooting frame rate Thumbnail Operations Su99JoS IMD ui suonejedo s Je deyo 121 SueeJog MH ui suonejedo s Ja deyo 122 TC DUR Timecode of the first frame Recording time Created Date and time of creation Modified Date and time of most recent modification Rec Device Name of device that created clip product number 1 Titles can be displayed in European languages when the area of use see page 38 is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a or 4 mark is displayed for an item you can press the left or right arrow button to scr
51. 2 inputs and the CH2 connector for channel 3 and 4 inputs AUDIO OUT connector XLR type 5 pin male Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4 The audio signals are selected by the MONITOR switch lt USB connector This is a USB 2 0 connector Connect one of the following devices depending on what you want to do Device Enables Windows USB Text input wth the on screen keyboard or mouse software keyboard see page 122 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 25 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 26 Device Enables USB flash drive Recording of proxy data see page 100 Loading of planning metadata see page 134 Saving and loading user setting data see page 220 Optional CBK Making wireless LAN WAO01 Wi Fi connections see page 213 Adaptor Optional CBK CBK WA100 status indicator WA100 Wireless Wireless LAN connection Adaptor Before using this connector you must set ETHERNET USB on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to ENABL see page 212 HDVF 20A viewfinder optional Plug Connect to the VF connector on the camcorder Stopper Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the camcorder when it is slid from side to side Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Camera operator tally indicator Lights up while camcorder is recording This indicator can be covered when not
52. 39 Mounting the Lens eere eerte ntntne 41 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length 42 Preparing the Audio Input System ees 43 Connecting a microphone to the MIC IN connector 43 Connecting microphones to the AUDIO IN connectors 43 Attaching a UHF portable tuner for a UHF wireless microphone AAE t D EEEE urere iL Ta d c DR ae 45 Connecting line input audio equipment seseeeees 46 Tripod Mounting eee eee eee ee esent tnn stats ean s tasas insta enses essen ein insu 47 Connecting a Video Light eee eee eee esee eee es testas tatus ene tntnann 48 Table of Contents Using the Shoulder Strap scccsscssssssscsssssssssssssssssssssseessscsssesssessesenes 49 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position eere eere 50 Connecting the Remote Control Unit eee eese eerte tntnan 50 Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Setting the Recording Format eee eee eee estet tates ento aenea enano 53 Setting the system frequency sse 53 Setting the video recording format esse 54 Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc 54 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 55 Adjusting the black balance eene 55 Adjusting the white balance
53. AUTH and ENCRYPTION settings To enter an SSID Select SSID press the MENU knob to display the Wi Fi gt SSID page and then press the MENU knob again When you press the MENU knob once more an W appears over the first character in the input string and the unit enters character input mode See steps Sand 4 in Setting the shot ID page 205 for information about how to enter characters To set ENCRYPTION options Depending on the setting of ENCRYPTION you must set the following options When ENCRYPTION is WEP Item name Setting WEP KEY INDEX 1 to4 INPUT SELECT network key format and length ASCIIS 5 characters ASCII format ASCII13 13 characters ASCII format HEX10 10 hexadecimal digits HEX26 26 hexadecimal digits KEY network key ASCII characters or hexadecimal number format specified with INPUT SELECT When ENCRYPTION is TKIP or AES Item name Setting INPUT SELECT ASCII8 63 63 characters network key format ASCII 8 bit format and length HEX64 64 hexadecimal digits Adjustments and Settings from Menus sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 215 sBumes pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 216 Item name Setting KEY network key ASCII characters or hexadecimal number format specified with INPUT SELECT See steps Sand 4 in Setting the shot ID page 205 for information about how to enter the key To specify a connection
54. AV data files C S01 MXF Clip lists Metadata files E MOI XML The following names cannot be assigned Clips C0000 MXF Clip lists E0000E01 SMI E0100E01 SMI to E9999E01 SMI E0000 SMI E0100 SMI to E9999 SMI The following names should be avoided Clips C5000 MXF to C9999 M XF Clip lists E0001 SMI to E0099 SMI To assign clip names on this unit The title assigned to a clip is also used as the name of that clip or the file name 9 Turn the MENU knob to select AUTO NAMING and then press the MENU knob 6 Turn the MENU knob to display TITLE and then press the MENU knob The same name will now be given to newly recorded clips f TITLE00001 When sub item AUTO NAMING is set to Lg urran An FTP client software that supports UTF 8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII TITLE00001 MXF characters Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF 8 When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP AUTO TITLING menu is a space or period the clip name is the title string minus the first letter To use clip names and clip list names via FTP Carry out steps 2 to 4 of To assign clip names on this unit page 94 It is possible to write transfer and rename clips and clip lists with user defined names over FTP connections see page 233 f When sub item AUTO NAMING is set to TITLE i How to select an i
55. BAL A 99 to 99 Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN A 99 to 99 Only the value of R GAIN is changed B GAIN A 99 to 99 Only the value of B GAIN is changed COLOR TEMP B Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of temperature WHITE B C TEMP BAL B 99 to 99 Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN B 99 to 99 Only the value of R GAIN is changed B GAIN B 99 to 99 Only the value of B GAIN is changed Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 03 BLACK MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 Adjusts the master black level FLARE R BLACK 99 to 99 Adjusts the R black level B BLACK 99 to 99 Adjusts the B black level MASTER FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the flare level of the master R FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the R flare level G FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the G flare level B FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the B flare level FLARE OFF ON Turns the flare correction circuit on or off TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector 04 GAMMA GAMMA OFF ON Turns the gamma correction function on or off STEP GAMMA 0 35 to 0 45 to 0 90 Sets the gamma correction curve by steps MASTER GAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the master gamma correction curve
56. GPS satellites The following actions are required on the camcorder in order to use this function GPS must be set to ON on the GPS SETUP page of the OPERATION menu GPS positioning 1 Display the TIME DATE page in the DIAGNOSIS menu and turn the MENU knob until the cursor is pointing to GPS ADJUST Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock DO2OTIME DRTE 0DJUST GPS ADJUST HOUR MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY Press the MENU knob The EXECUTE OK message appears the cursor is pointing to NO which is flashing Turn the MENU knob to select YES then press the MENU knob The camcorder clock is set to the time using clocks on the GPS satellites Mounting the Lens First power off the camcorder and then mount the lens using the following procedure For information about using the lens refer to the operation manual for the lens QUU A Y Lens mount kb f securing rubber i OS 1 Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount 2 Align the center pin on the lens with the center slot in the lens mount and insert the lens into the mount 3 Holding the lens in place push the lens locking lever down to lock the lens If the lens is not firmly locked it may come off while the camcorder is being used This could cause a serious accident Make sure the lens is firmly locked It is recommended that the lens mount securing rubber b
57. KEY SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the saturation level of the low luminance part L KEY SAT RANGE LOW L MID H MID Sets the luminance level at which KNEE HIGH the low key saturation function becomes effective Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 16 SATURATION MODE SATURATION MODE KNEE L KEY Switches the saturation function mode High intensity processing KNEE SAT or low intensity processing BLACK GAMMA LOWKEY AST can be selected KNEE SATURATION OFF ON Turns the knee saturation on off when SATURATION MODE is set to KNEE BLACK GAMMA OFF ON Turns black gamma correction on off when SATURATION MODE is set to L KEY LOW KEY SAT OFF ON Turns the LOW KEY SATURATION function on off when SATURATION MODE is set to L KEY 17 NOISE SUPPRESS NOISE SUPPRESS OFF ON Turn on and off the noise suppression function NOISE SUP LEVEL OFF LOW HIGH Selects the level of the noise suppression function 18 SCENE FILE STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD 1 2 3 4 5 STANDARD Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of the camcorder STANDARD Clears all current detail adjusted settings and switch settings and returns the settings to the standard settings saved in the reference file SCENE RECALL EXEC Recalls the scene file from the memory of the camcorder or the USB flash drive SCENE
58. List as command to save the newly created clip list to the disc To reedit clip lists on the disc Use the Load Clip List command to load the clip lists you want to edit and perform the steps 2 to 4 in the previous section You can also delete clip lists on the disc For details see Managing clip lists page 132 Clip lists can be created and edited even when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording disabled However if you need to save the clip list set Write Inhibit tab to enable recording before you create or edit the clip list To add sub clips You can add sub clips to clip lists from with the clip thumbnail screen or the clip list thumbnail screen However you must use the clip list thumbnail screen to edit clip lists Adding sub clips from the clip thumbnail screen The following procedure explains operations in the clip thumbnail screen You can proceed in the same way in the expand thumbnail screen and the chapter thumbnail screen Expanded blocks are added as sub clips in the expand thumbnail screen and chapters are added as sub clips in the chapter thumbnail screen See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations Scene Selection Clip List Editing 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the clip that you want to add as a sub clip multiple selections possible Display the Thumbnail Menu Select Add Sub Clips and then press the SET S SEL button or the M
59. MENU knob The name of the clip list selected here appears in the clip list thumbnail screen When you execute the Save Clip List command in the Disc Menu the clip list will be saved under that name To create a new clip list Select New File and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To clear clip lists The following procedure clears the current clip list from the unit s internal memory See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu 2 Select Clear Clip List and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to clear the clip list 3 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The current clip list returns to the unnamed state no name To delete clip lists The following procedure deletes a clip list from the disc See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 2 4 In the clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu Select Delete Clip List and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A list of clip lists appears Select the clip list that you want to delete and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion Delete Clip List 0001 Delete this Clip List OK Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or t
60. NTSC AREA or PAL AREA A Japanese keyboard appears if the area of use setting is NTSC J AREA SetTitle of Clip 001 041 Cancel 3 Edit the string in the edit box To enter characters Use the arrow buttons or turn the MENU knob to select a key and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Functions of special keys Key Function gt Move the cursor one character forward or back Move the cursor to Home or le gt I End position Back Space Deletes the character in front of the cursor CapsLock Turns the Shift key on permanently until pressed again and enables input of capital letters and symbols Shift Enables input of capital letters and symbols Turns off after entry of one character 4 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob You return to the Clip Properties screen and the results of the editing are reflected in the clip information To enter text using a USB keyboard or USB mouse You can connect a Windows USB keyboard or a Windows USB mouse to the USB connector see page 25 D and use them together with the software keyboard to enter text Connect a Japanese keyboard if the area of use has been set to NTSC J AREA Connect a keyboard that corresponds to the font selected with Disc Menu item Settings gt Select Font if the area of use has been set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA 1 Some USB keyboards or USB mice may not be recognized In
61. OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE and DIAGNOSIS menus For details about how to operate the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu see Editing the USER menu page 197 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON Normally the USER menu appears If it does not turn the MENU knob to move to USER in the TOP menu and press the MENU knob If the USER menu has been used before the last accessed page appears In this case go to step 2 If this is the first time the USER menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the USER menu appears In this case follow the procedure below Press the MENU knob Then turn the MENU knob to move to the desired page number This indicates that the menu Screen can be scrolled 2 Press the MENU knob again The page selected in is displayed Go to step 3 Menu Operations When you set items on the ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE and DIAGNOSIS menus move to the menu that contains the desired item in the TOP menu and then press the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears 005eREC FUNCTION SLOU amp QUICK FRAME RATE CACHE INTVAL REC C EXCHG CACHE P CONT REC E LOGGING 3 Press the MENU knob and appear OOSOREC FUNCTION SLOW amp QUICK FRAME RATE gt CACHE INTVAL REC e Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item and then press the MENU knob changes to and changes to Turn t
62. PW Operations in GUI Screens Overview You can perform scene searches play the searched scenes and select scenes edit clip list in Graphical User Interface GUI screens The GUI screens are your gateways to discs and the data saved on discs Switching between GUI screens The most important GUI screens are Clip thumbnail screen Displays thumbnails of clips on the disc Clip is displayed as the title at the upper left of the screen see page 106 Clip list thumbnail screen Displays thumbnails of sub clips in a clip list Clip List is displayed as the title at the upper left of the screen see page 106 There are also two playback screens Clip playback screen Playback screen for normal video Clip list playback screen Playback screen for clip list video You will use the THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK button and the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button to switch between these four screens Each press of these buttons switches between the screens as shown in the following figure The THUMBNAIL and SUB CLIP indicators light as follows according to the type of screen that is currently displayed To switch between these four screens a disc with recorded clips must be loaded in the unit The GUI screens can display European languages Japanese Korean Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese for clip names and titles Overview su 199 MD ul suogeiodo S 1e1deu 105 SU88J9S f15 ul SuoHesadO s Ja deyuD
63. REC TALLY BATT indication indicator xc 9 5 9 3exc Problem VDR operation Action to take The upper limit of 300 recorded clips reached Cannot record Exchange the disc Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator 3c 05 Sabre Problem VDR operation Action to take The upper limit of files reached Cannot record Exchange the disc Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator BATT flash P w DD 9 w 9 w Problem VDR operation Action to take Battery almost exhausted Operation continues Replace the battery Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator BATT and E flash 9 xt e LIM Sen X Problem VDR operation Action to take Battery exhausted Operation stops Replace the battery Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator ey w Problem VDR operation Action to take Internal temperature high Operation continues Power the unit off and move it to a cool place Operation Warnings eoueuejure N 6 Je deuD 249 eoueuejure N 6 Ja deu9 250 Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator w C w Problem VDR operation Action to take Internal drive sensor error gt k oO og co o o0 os O Ox qn Operation continue
64. REGEN CLOCK switch to REGEN and record timecode that is continuous with timecode read from the disc To record with the Live Logging function enabled On the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu set LIVE LOGGING to one of the following LIVE Live mode VIEW Live view mode tis not possible to enable the Live Logging function while this unit is in the following states The proxy data recording function is enabled During Slow amp Quick Motion shooting tis not possible to set the Live Logging function to Live View mode while this unit is in the following states The Picture Cache function is enabled The Interval Rec function is enabled The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled Advanced Operations for Shooting The Live Logging function is disabled automatically whenever you enable the proxy data recording function Recording proxy data You can connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector and use it to save proxy data Here proxy data refers to proxy AV data for the clips on the disc as well as to metadata D You can then connect this USB flash drive to a computer to view the recorded proxy AV data to edit and enter metadata titles comments essence marks and so on and to create clip lists 1 When recording of proxy data finishes the planning metadata that has been loaded into this unit if any is also copied to the USB flash drive
65. SMPTE registration office When no organization code has been acquired it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary string As a rule the code 00 must be entered Freelance operators who do E not belong to an origination should enter There are no problems in recording or playing back audio video signals if ORGANIZATION is not set USER CODE Enter the 4 byte alphanumeric strings for user identification The user code is registered with each organization locally It is usually not centrally registered When the user code is less than 4 bytes enter the user code from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space character 20h in the remaining strings The methods used depend on the organization User code cannot be entered when no organization code has been entered TIME ZONE Set the time difference from UTC The UTC is calculated based on the local time using the time zone If the time zone is not set the UTC is not recorded correctly When you change the time zone adjust the internal clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and then the power on again Adjustments and Settings from Menus sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuey 9 JajdeyD 219 geq Bumes sn Buipeo1 pue Bues 7 Jeydeuo 220 Saving and Loading User Setting Data Saving and Recalling User Files The camcorder is equipped with a USB connector which enables you to save the settings in the USER menu as a user
66. SY RM N CA STATUS CA CA FB70 Displays the version information and signal level of the CA FB70 SERIAL camera adaptor Camera Adaptor XXXXXXXX only VER VX XXXXXX APR 30 2014 COMMENTXXXXX XXXX OPTICAL LEVEL CCU CAM NOSIGNAL CAM CCU NOSIGNAL c CA STATUS CA CA TX70 Displays the version information of the camera adaptor CA TX70 SERIAL Camera Adaptor XXXXXXXX only VER VX XXXXXX APR 30 2014 COMMENTXXXXX XXXX suiy pejreijeq pue s ejds q nue y 9 Jaldeyp 192 Menu List Menu Operations Displaying menus Viewfinder OLCD monitor DISP SEL EXPAND button MENU ON OFF switch Q POWER switch To use the MENU ON OFF switch open the cover of the menu operating section When the camcorder is powered on set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON to display the menu on the viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor If this is the first time the menu has been used after the camcorder has been powered on the USER menu is displayed If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears When the menu is not displayed on the LCD monitor Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button below the LCD monitor to select the CHAR display To clear the menu display from the screen Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF When the cover of the menu operating section is closed this switch is automatically set to OFF When the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY ASPECT switch on the v
67. Save the clip list see page 131 To save clip lists To save under a specified name See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu 2 Select Save Clip List as and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A list of clip lists appears Disc Menu l l Save Clip List Name amp Date Sorted by Name DVD og BI 08 AUG2007 11 50 E0003 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0004 03 AUG2007 17 51 lt E0005 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0006 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0007 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0095 18 MAY2006 10 25 E0098 13 JUN2006 13 43 Display Select gt To switch the information displayed for clip lists Press the right arrow button Scene Selection Clip List Editing su 199 f15 ul suogeiado g 1e1deu 131 SueaeJog MH ui suonejedo s sajdeyo 132 With each press the display changes in the order Name amp Date Name amp Title Name amp Short Date To sort clip lists Select one of the following orders by selecting Settings gt Sort Clip List By in the Disc Menu Name A Z Sort in ascending order by clip list name Date Newest First Sort by date and time of clip list creation newest first 3 Select the desired clip list name and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To save under the same name The following procedure saves the current clip list under its current name the name that appears i
68. Selecting the FID Display only lens file page 217 LID Display only L MF Display only 28 FORMAT SYSTEM LINE 1080 720 The selectable SYSTEM SYSTEM 59 91 29 9P 50i 25P FREQUENCY settings differ FREQUENCY 23 9P 59 9P 50P depending on the setting of REC FORMAT HD422 50 HD420 HQ SYSTEM LINE Tor demus see HD420 SP IMX50 Setting the Recording Format IMX40 IMX30 page 53 DVCAM ASPECT RATIO SD 16 9 4 3 The selectable settings differ When the REC depending on the setting of REC FORMAT item is set to FORMAT For details see IMX50 IMX40 Setting the Recording Format IMX30 or DVCAM page 53 AU DATA LEN IMX 16bit 24bit When the REC FORMAT item is set to IMX50 IMX40 or IMX30 COUNTRY NTSC J AREA NTSC For details see Setting the Area AREA PAL AREA of Use page 38 Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuey 9 JajdeyD 159 No Page Item Settings Description 29 SOURCE SEL FRONT MIC SELECT MONO STREO Input mode selection for front When stereo microphone microphone is connected REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM EXT For details see Recording video EXT VIDEO SOURCE VBS SDSDU HDSDI from external devices page 98 WIDE MODE EXT AUTO 16 9 When the input signal is SD select the method that determines whether the signal is treated as a wide signal AUTO When wide picture information is detected in the input signal treat the signal as a wide signal and set the up converter opera
69. Selects whether to display in the video monitor screen the title contained in a planning metatdata file that is loaded into this unit Disable Do not display titles Enable Display titles Setting Format Disc Selects whether to disable the Format Disc command Disable Disable the command Enable Enable the command Select Font Selects the language font used to display clip names clip list names and title2 clip titles Select USB Keyboard Language Selects the language of the USB keyboard used in the software keyboard screen Select Mouse Pointer Speed Selects the speed of the USB mouse pointer used in the software keyboard screen from among the following 5 Fast 4 3 Middle 2 1 Slow To display the Disc Menu To display the Disc Menu press the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button with the SHIFT button held down in one of the following screens Clip thumbnail screen Clip list thumbnail screen Clip playback screen Clip list playback screen To return to the original screen press the RESET RETURN button Overview su 199 N9 ul suoneiedo G 1e1deu 113 SU88J9S f15 ul SuoHesadO Gg Ja deyuD 114 RESET RETURN button DISPSEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT _0 G7 WM O EXPAND CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U BIT O THUMBNAIL MENU 0S io emn eo lO T AUDIO SELECT mom LER 900 RUN SET RUN oswa SS QV epelez S FA SLE dii
70. Some Essence Mark cannot be Moved Command Disabled Clip is Locked All Clips are Locked All Clips are Unlocked A File with the Name you Specified Already Exists Specify a Different Name Set NAMING FORM to free An attempt is made to execute a Move Sub Clips operation see page 129 when there are no sub clip in the current clip list or when there is only one An attempt is made to execute a Delete Shot Mark see page 117 operation on a clip with no shot marks recorded in eoueuejure N 6 Je deuD An attempt was made to display a nonexistent chapter An attempt is made to delete an essence mark that cannot be deleted with a Delete Essence Mark operation Rec Start and Cut essence marks cannot be deleted An attempt is made to move an essence mark that cannot be moved with a Move Essence Mark operation Rec Start and Cut essence marks cannot be moved An attempt was made to execute the Format Disc command with Setting Format Disc set to Disable An attempt is made to delete a clip set the clip thumbnail or delete a shot mark when the clip is locked An attempt is made to execute a Lock All Clips operation when all clips are already locked An attempt is made to execute an Unlock All Clips operation when all clips are already unlocked A file name that was specified in a Set Clip Name operation already exists An attempt was made t
71. Temporarily sets the master gain value GAIN TMP 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB 21 APR APR EXEC Suppresses white flecks by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function APR SLS EXEC Suppresses white flecks in SLS Slow Speed Shutter mode by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function h The execution time for this function is about 30 minutes More time may be required when temperatures inside the unit are low APR PRESET EXEC Deletes white flecks data that was added by execution of the APR and automatic black balance adjustment functions Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nue 9 JajdeyD 183 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nue 9 saldeyp 184 No Page Item Settings Description 22 NETWORK 1 NETWORK SETUP EXEC Displays the NETWORK SETTING page so that you can make network settings EGER DHCP Display only Enables or disables automatic acquisition of This menu is an IP address from a DHCP server not used when using the CBK IP ADDRESS Display only IP address WA100 SUBNET MASK Display only Subnet mask Wireless DEF GATEWAY Display only Default gateway nee LINK SPEED Display only Link speed DUPLEX Display only Communications method DNS1 Display only DNS server 1 UPnP Display only Enable or disable UPnP NETWORK DHCP ENABLE Selects whether to enable automatic SETTING DISABLE acquisition of the IP addre
72. The recording format is regarded as different whenever the system frequency video resolution video codec bit rate or number of audio channels or number of bits does not match Regardless of frame frequency group matching it is not possible to mix clips with different video resolutions number of system lines in the same clip list When the unit is in a mode that calls for playback across clips that were recorded in different recording formats video and audio playback may stop at the point where the format changes from one format into another and then start again Frame frequency groups The system frequencies supported by this unit are divided into frame frequency groups as shown in the following table Frame frequency group System frequency 59 94 Hz 59 94P 59 941 29 97P 50 Hz 50P 50i 25P 23 98 Hz 23 98P You can record clips with different recording formats for example HD422 and HD420SP clips by putting this unit into mixed format recording mode To enable mixed format recording mode Set MIXED RECORDING on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to ENABL If you want to disable mixing of clips with different recording formats leave this item set to DSABL However regardless of the mixed format recording mode setting it is always possible to mix clips in the following format groups HD420 HQ SP and LP e 1080 59 94i and 1080 29 97P 1080 50i and 1080 25P Ad
73. To search for a thumbnail position and play from there See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Select the thumbnail that you want to play 2 Press the PLAY PAUSE button Selecting clips by type Filter Clips function You can select clips of a certain type from among all of the clips on a disc Filter Clips function For example you can do the following Select clips in a certain video format from a disc that contains clips in different video formats Select clips that have been set NG as a clip flag and delete all of those clips in one operation Select only clips that have been recorded on the basis of a specified planning metadata entry and transfer those clips to an external device using the Direct FTP function see page 140 To filter clips See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Display the clip thumbnail screen 2 if you want to select clips by video format select the thumbnails of clips in that format 3 Display the Thumbnail menu 4 Select Filter Clips and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Filter Clips screen appears Filter Clips Select Filter Condition e Clip Flag OK Clip Flag g NG D Select the clip filtering condition Item name Filtering condition Clip Flag OK Clip flag set in the clip Clip Flag NG OK NG KP KEEP Clip Flag none KP KEEP Clip Flag none Current Plann
74. USB M INHI appears if you connect and attempt to access a write protected USB flash drive In this case remove the USB flash drive set it to enable recording and connect it again The message MEM REC NG appears if you start recording without a USB flash drive connected After recording stops connect a USB flash drive refer to To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive and copy the proxy data that could not be written to the USB flash drive during recording It is not possible to record proxy data to a USB flash drive while the Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled If you attempt to do so the message MEM REC NG appears and the data is not recorded To record the proxy data stop recording and copy the data to the USB flash drive as explained below in To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive and then resume shooting Never disconnect the battery pack or power cord while recording to a USB flash drive while the ACCESS indicator of this unit is lit If you do so recording processing will not end normally and the clip proxy data that was recorded to the USB flash drive before the interruption will be lost The message MEM REC NG appears if the USB flash drive runs out of memory during recording while the ACCESS indicator of this unit is lit and the clip proxy data that was being recorded immediately before the message appeared is lost If this occurs
75. USB A USB flash Reconnect to MEMORY drive error confirm the ERROR occurred error and flashing consult a Sony service representative FILE The USB flash Data saved ona ERROR drive contains USB flash drive flashing data that cannot using a be loaded into camcorder this camcorder whose model is not the same as this camcorder cannot be loaded into this camcorder Returning the user file settings to the standard settings How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 Select USER PRESET and press the MENU knob Saving and Loading Scene Files You can save various settings for shooting a particular scene as a scene file By loading the scene file you can quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files on a USB flash drive You can also load data from the USB flash drive into the camcorder memory Data that can be saved in a scene file You can save the following data in a scene file Values adjusted using the PAINT menu Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and ECS mode The white balance data included in a scene file depends on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu Sa
76. Warnings page 246 TALLY switch Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator function zi network connector RJ 45 type This is a IOBASE T 100BASE TX connector for network connection Before using this connector you must set ETHERNET USB on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to ENABL see page 212 For safety do not connect the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this port Follow the instructions for this port When you connect the network cable of the unit to peripheral device use a shielded type cable to prevent malfunction due to radiation noise E EARPHONE jack stereo minijack You can monitor the E E sound during recording and playback sound during playback When an alarm is indicated you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone You can use this with the EARPHONE jack on the front of the unit at the same time Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built in speaker Youcan select monaural or stereo on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu LINE AES EBU MIC selectors These select the audio source of the audio input signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors LINE Line input audio equipment AES EBU AES EBU format audio signal MIC Microphone input When these switches are in the MIC position and the 48V OFF switch is set to 48V if you inadvertently connect any audio device other than a microphone to the A
77. an operation that cannot be performed when the Live Logging function is set to Live View mode The operation will be ignored An essence mark or clip flag operation was attempted while the SUB CLIP indicator was lit Press the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button to turn the indicator off and try again No clip list is selected Create a new clip list or load a clip list from the disc There is no clip list Create a clip list There are no sub clips in the clip list Register a sub clip or load another clip list The In and Out point positions are invalid Set correct In and Out points The total number of sub clips is over the upper limit 300 An attempt was made to register a clip in a clip list with a different resolution FAN Stopped DR FAN Stop NVRAM NG Update Err Unknown USB NO USB MEMORY USB MEMORY INHIBIT USB M INHI USB MEMORY ERROR M Shortage USB MEMORY FULL MEM REC NG M access ILL TIME The main unit or drive fan has stopped Avoid use under high temperatures turn off the power and contact a Sony service representative An error was detected while accessing internal memory Power the unit off and contact a Sony service representative A firmware update failed Power the unit off and contact a Sony service representative An unsupported USB device was connected to this unit A USB flash drive write operation was a
78. and put the unit into the following state Recording playback serch and other disc operations Stopped THUMBNAIL indicator Off Disc access by clip deletion disc formatting or other operation Stopped Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function Off Recording of video from external devices Disabled Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function Disconnected Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu Values other than VIEW OFF or LIVE MENU ON OFF switch OFF Unsaved current clip list Save or clear FTP File Operations Login is not possible unless the unit is in the state described above Start the command prompt Enter ftp SP IP address gt and press the Enter key lt SP gt refers to a space For example if the IP address of this unit is set to 192 168 001 010 enter ftp 192 168 1 10 Refer to the Windows help for more information about the FTP command If the connection succeeds you are prompted to enter a user name 4 Enter the user name admin and press the Enter key When the user name is verified your are prompted to enter a password D Enter the password and press the Enter key The password is set to the model name pdw 850 when the unit is shipped from the factory The login is complete when the password is verified See Command list page 235 for the protocol supported by this u
79. as the target level If the audio level meter shows a maximum level of 0 dB then it indicates that the input audio level is excessive Excessive input level LETT mimis NN Target input level 4 1 243 Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio inputs from the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector the input from these connectors is automatically selected for audio recording In this case start the operation from step 2 You can turn on and off the XLR connection automatic detection function on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Adjusting the Audio Level MIC LEVEL control 1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector set the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch to REAR To adjust both input signals set both switches to REAR 2 Setthe AUDIO SELECT switch es corresponding to the channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL 3 With the LEVEL control s for the channel s selected in step 1 adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume Correspondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls On the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the input to each of the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors The corr
80. browser For details see To use a web browser to load planning metadata page 138 To sort planning metadata You can sort planning metadata by operating in the same way as in To sort clip lists page 133 However in step 3 select Sort Planning Metadata by The planning metadata will be displayed in the specified order the next time you load planning metadata To check planning metadata properties You can check the properties of the planning metadata that is loaded into this unit s memory including the date and time of creation and the clip titles See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Planning Metadata Properties and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Planning Metadata Properties screen appears File Name Planning metadata file name Assign ID Assign ID Created Date and time of creation Modified Date and time of most recent modification Modified by Name of person who modified the file Title1 Title 1 P Title2 Title 2 Material Gp Number of clips recorded with this planning metadata 1 This can be set as the clip name see page 96 To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a or 4 mark is displayed for an item you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string int
81. changes as follows HDSDI D SDSDI gt VBS 1 HDSDI cannot be selected when an SD recording format is selected After you complete this setting you can record the video signals of external devices by inputting the HD SDI signals selected in step 3 to the SDI IN connector Recording analog composite signals You can record analog composite signals input to the GENLOCK IN connector When an HD recording format MPEG HD422 50 or MPEG HD420 HQ SP is selected analog composite signals are upconverted to HD signals before recording Even if the GENLOCK item on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to OFF the unit automatically genlocks to external video signals that are input to the GENLOCK IN connector When GENLOCK is set to OFF the genlock is cancelled when the input of external video signals stops and the unit switches to camera shooting 1 Display the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION menu 2 Select REC VIDEO SOURCE and turn the MENU knob to display EXT 3 Select EXT VIDEO SOURCE and turn the MENU knob to display VBS After you complete this setting you can record external video signals by inputting analog composite signals to the GENLOCK IN connector Using the Live Logging function The Live Logging function allows you to transfer proxy AV data to a computer as you are shooting or to send and receive metadata between this unit and a computer On this unit you can transfer data
82. connected To check the network settings of this unit Select Network Config and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The following network settings appear Item Setting Host Name Host name IP Address IP address 9 Subnet Mask Subnet mask Transferring clips Direct FTP function Item Setting DHCP Setting that specifies whether to acquire the IP address automatically from a DHCP server Enabled Acquire automatically Disabled Do not acquire automatically Address Status Method used to set IP address Manual Set Manually DHCP DHCP function AutoIP Auto IP addressing function Undefined Nothing specified Default Gateway Default gateway a An IP address determined by a DHCP server appears instantly in this field Select OK and press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob to return to the previous screen Select gt and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A network settings screen for the remote host appears Upload Clips via Direct FTP Select Host 1 Host Name Port 21 Device Type PDW HD1500 Description Path IClip User Name admin Password sese Cancel Connect Item Setting Host Name Host name or IP address If this is a host name a DNS server must be available on the connected network Specification of an IP address is recommended Port Port used by the FTP server normally 21 Item Setti
83. control unit differs from the one on the camcorder the switch position on the camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote control unit Also it is possible to keep the settings that are in effect before you connect the remote control unit In this case you should set the control knob to the relative value mode on the remote control unit For details refer to the operation manual supplied with the remote control unit Connecting the Remote Control Unit RED Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Setting the Recording Format The recording formats supported by this camcorder are as follows Video Recording format Resolution System frequency MPEG HD422 50 1080 59 94i 29 97P Bit rate 50 Mbps 50i 25P 23 98P 720 59 94P 50P MPEG HD420 HQ 1080 59 941 29 97P SP 50i 25P Bit rate 35 25 23 98P Mbps 720 59 94P 50P MPEG IMX 50 40 525 59 94 gt 50 40 30 DIL Bit rate 625 ic Mbps 50i9 25P DVCAM 525 59 94 D Bit rate 25 Mbps 2997P 625 50i9 25P a 59 94i 29 97P 59 94P When the area of use is set to NTSC J AREA NTSC AREA 50i 25P 50P When the area of use is set to PAL AREA b When the combination of the SYSTEM LINE and SYSTEM FREQUENCY settings is 1080 59 9i or 720 59 9P c When the combination of the SYSTEM LINE and SYSTEM FREQUENCY settings is 1080 50i or 720 50P Audio Recording format Number of channels 24bit 48kHz 8 channels 4 channels
84. details see Setting the shot characters ID page 205 ID 2 Blank up to 12 characters ID 3 Blank up to 12 characters ID 4 Blank up to 12 characters 22 SHOT DISP SHOT DATE OFF ON For details see Recording shot SHOT TIME OFF ON data superimposed on the color SHOT MODEL NAME OFF ON Man page 203 SHOT SERIAL NO OFF ON SHOT ID SEL OFF ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 SHOT 16 9 CHARA OFF ON SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF ON 23 SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL OFF ON For details see Displaying the STATUS SYSTEM OFF ON status confirmation screens STATUS FUNCTION OFF ON page 208 STATUS AUDIO OFF ON STATUS GPS OFF ON Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuey 9 JajdeyD 157 sBumes pejreieq pue s ejds q nua 9 saldeyp 158 No Page Item Settings Description 24 WHITE WHITE SWITCH lt B gt MEM ATW Specifies the operating mode SETTING when the WHITE BAL switch is set to the B side MEM Auto white balance ATW Auto tracing white balance SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF 1 2 3 Specifies the transition time when the WHITE BAL switch is changed to a new setting 1 is fastest ATW HOLD OFF ON Selects whether ATW auto MEMORY tracing white balance settings are saved in the memory A or B selected by the WHITE BAL switch in addition to the dedicated ATW memory OFF Not saved ON Saved For details see To save white balance settings obtained by ATW page 56 ATW SPEED 1 2 3 4 5 Switches the transition spee
85. disc access stops after the REC START button is pressed equals the Picture Cache time However if you start recording within the Picture Cache time immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode changing the Picture Cache time or performing playback or recording review the picture data for the duration of the Picture Cache time will not be stored in memory Thus the time disc access stops after the STOP button is pressed becomes shorter than the Picture Cache time In Picture Cache mode you cannot set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET to make Advanced Operations for Shooting timecode settings To make timecode settings first exit Picture Cache mode When power is lost during recording in Picture Cache mode If the POWER switch is turned off during recording in Picture Cache mode the camcorder gets powered off after disc access has continued for a few seconds so that the picture at the moment when the POWER switch is turned off is recorded If you remove the battery pull out the DC cable or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording in Picture Cache mode video and audio stored in memory will be lost without being recorded to the disc For this reason make sure you do not replace the battery while recording Time lapse video Interval Rec function Using the memory in the camcorder you can capture time lapse video There are two modes for this function which is known as Interval Rec Auto Interval Rec mode I
86. displayed for clips without a title To check clip information name title etc For details see Checking clip properties page 121 Using planning metadata Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata about the clips to be shot and recorded To use planning metadata you need to load a planning metadata file into the unit s memory before starting to shoot There are three ways to load files Automatically load a file that has been written to the following directory on a Professional Disc via an FTP connection If you do not want to load a file automatically add a load property to the PlanningMetadata tag and set the value of the property to false as shown in the shaded part of the following example Example PlanningMetadata load false version 1 00 Use a GUI screen to load a file that has been written to the following directories on a Professional Disc or a USB flash drive see page 134 Use a web browser to load a planning metadata file see page 138 p File creation rules File location File name Format that can be used in the General directory see page 232 Extension XML Professional Disc General Sony Planning directory 9 USB Flash drive General Sony Planning directory ASCII characters up to 63 characters including the extension Extension XML Advanced Operations for Shooting a The General Sony Planning dir
87. displays or hides all markers Adjustments and Settings from Menus sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 209 Function Description RETAKE P Assigns the function that deletes the last recorded clip ATW Assigns the function that turns auto tracing white balance ON and OFF RETURN VIDEO HD Y 9 Assigns the function that displays in the viewfinder the HD Y 10801 signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector D RETURN VIDEO HDSDI Assigns the function that displays the HDSDI signal input on the SDI IN connector in the viewfinder 9 LENS RET Assigns the functions executed by the RET button on the lens recording review and so on Function Description CLIP FLAG Assign the functions that set OK or clear OK NG and KEEP CLIP FLAG flags during recording or NG playback CLIP FLAG KEEP DIGITAL Assigns the function that EXTENDER electronically magnifies the central part of the picture AII video output is magnified including recorded video x2 x3 x4 and x2x3x4 are available for selection CLIP CONT Assigns the function that REC turns the Clip Continuous Rec function on and off REC SWITCH Assigns the function that starts and stops recording TURBO SWITCH Assigns the turbo gain function ZEBRA Assigns the zebra pattern display function FREEZE MIX Assigns the function that mixes a still picture
88. extended recording sessions too long to fit on one disc by recording to the unit s internal memory while you exchange the disc Disc Exchange Cache settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states The Interval Rec function is enabled The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode During Slow amp Quick Motion shooting The unit s internal memory is not unlimited so the video and audio may be interrupted if it takes too long to exchange the disc To enable the Disc Exchange Cache function 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select DISC EXCHG CACHE and turn the MENU knob to display ON The TALLY green tally indicator lights in the viewfinder To exchange discs with the function enabled When the disc exchange cache function is enabled the following procedure allows you to exchange discs while continuing to record Advanced Operations for Shooting Bunoous y je1deu 89 Bunooug y e1deuo 90 Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording The REC recording red tally indicator lights in the viewfinder and the tally indicator lights Press the EJECT button with the unit still in the recording state The REC recording red tally indicator in the viewfinder and the tally indicator flas
89. for i manufacturing sales of any storage media storing MPEG 4 Visual video information ii distribution broadcasting of MPEG 4 Visual video information in any manner such as online video distribution service internet broadcasting TV broadcasting Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from MPEGLA Please contact MPEG LA for any further information MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 http www mpegla com Recommended USB Flash Drives As of April 2014 Trademarks and Licenses xipueddy 267 xipueddy 268 MPEG 2 Video Patent Portfolio License ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG 2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG 2 PATENT PORTFOLIO WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 PACKAGED MEDIA means any storage media storing MPEG 2 video information such as DVD movie which are sold distributed to general consumers Disc replicators or sellers of the PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for their own business from MPEG LA Please contact MPEG LA for any further information MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 http www mpegla com About IJG Independent JPEG Group This software is based in par
90. four screws placed in the tuner fitting For three of these screws insert the screwdriver through the corresponding hole and tighten the Screw Make sure that all four screws are fully tightened 2 Loosen the adjustment screws on the tuner fitting Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP L80S FL75 Battery Pack to be Preparing the Audio Input System 45 suongeredejd z sajdeyo 46 attached and tighten the adjustment screws to fix its position Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR 862 About the WRR tuner fitting service part number A 8278 057 B contact a Sony service or sales representative BP L80S FL75 Adjustment Screws Mount plate supplied with WRR 862 Phillips type Screwdriver Attach the battery pack On how to attach the battery pack see To attach the battery pack page 33 Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting WRR 862 Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT connector of the camcorder and the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN CHI or CH2 connector Set the switches as follows Setthe LINE AES EBU MIC selector for the channel to which the audio output cable is attached to MIC Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switch for the channel to which the audio output cable is connected to REAR for CH 1 CH 2 or R for CH 3 CH 4 Preparing the Audio Input System If the XLR connection automatic detection function is on the
91. from that device with the Handling Discs 75 Bunooug y je1deuo 76 power off clips are reconstructed on the basis of markers recorded on the disc when the disc is loaded in this unit Therefore processing takes longer than for a quick salvage about 30 seconds although it depends on the state of the disc Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage 1 Insert the disc on which recording did not end normally The following salvage message appears SALVAGE TO RECORD ON THE DISC IT IS NECESSARY TO EXECUTE SALVAGE SALVAGE OK YES N0 N Turn the MENU knob to move to YES and press the MENU knob Salvage processing starts and the message EXECUTING appears A results message appears when the processing finishes If the salvage succeeded the message COMPLETED appears If the salvage failed the message INCOMPLETED appears Clips for which recording did not end normally are lost To exit without salvaging Select NO in step 1 to exit without performing salvage processing However the status of the disc does not change Salvage is still required to recover the clips for which recording did not end normally The salvage message will appear again when that disc is inserted again or when the camcorder is powered on again If salvage processing is not done sections which were recorded normally can be played back but no new recording can be done on the disc Full salvage
92. image of the return video signal on the viewfinder Only the Assign 3 SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens appear f Video momentarily becomes black and audio is momentarily muted when the digital extender is switched on and off g This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2 slide type switch Function Content OFF Assigns no function FRONT MIC Assigns the function that switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected PICTURE CACHE Assigns execution of recording in picture cache mode SUPER VFDISP amp M ENU Assigns a mixing switch function that selects mixing or no mixing of superimposed viewfinder and menu text data into the video signals output from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector when SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu are set to ON MARKER Assigns the function that displays or hides all markers REC VIDEO SOURCE Switches the recording target video between the video shot by the camera and the video input from an external device VBS or SD SDI HD SDI ZEBRA Assigns the zebra pattern display function FREEZE MIX Assigns the function that mixes a still picture monochrome and camera video color effective for framing shots DIGITAL Assigns the function that EXTENDER P electronically magnifies the central part of
93. in the C and E parts For C MXF files some data such as file header metadata may be missing Depending on the transfer destination directory and the file type transfer may not be possible For C MXF files the UMID of the copy source file is not saved However it is saved if an immediately preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been issued For details see File operation restrictions page 229 Syntax STOR SP path name lt CRLF gt Input example STOR Edit E0001E01 SMI RNFR RNTO Rename a file Specify the file to be renamed with the RNFR command and specify the new name with the RNTO command Always follow a RNFR command with a RNTO command Syntax RNFR SP path name before change lt CRLF gt RNTO SP lt path name after change lt CRLF gt Input example RNFR General info txt RNTO General clip_info txt DELE Deletes the specified file on this unit Depending on the directory and file type deletion may not be possible For details see File operation restrictions page 229 Syntax DELE SP lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Input example DELE Clip C0099 MXF STAT Sends information about properties of the specified file or about data transfer status from this unit to the remote computer The following property information is sent depending on the file type MXF file File name File type CODEC type Frame rate Number of audio channels
94. in ECS mode and SLS mode Select ECS mode or SLS mode with the SHUTTER selector and then turn the MENU knob see page 61 MENU knob SHUTTER selector You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to narrow the range of choice in advance or to select in advance whether or not you use ECS or SLS To set the shutter mode and standard mode shutter speed Once the shutter speed is selected it is retained even when the camcorder power is turned off 1 Follow the procedure described in Selecting the display items page 201 to set the VF DISPLAY MODE item to 2 or 3 on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu 2 Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT The current shutter setting indication appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen Examples SS 1 250 ECS 60 0 Hz 3 Before the shutter setting indication disappears flick the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT again and repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears When all modes and speeds are displayed the display changes in the following order Standard mode with system frequency 59 94i 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 SLS mode ECS mode If you have changed the configuration only the selected modes and speeds appear When the unit is shipped from the factory it is configured to display all of
95. make Y Ty 1 leo 125 1250 Lj 1 500 gt 1000 gt 2000 a This speed cannot be selected when the unit is in Slow amp Quick Motion mode and FRAME RATE on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu is set to a value that is greater than the system frequency ECS Extended Clear Scan mode Select this mode for obtaining images with no horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects such as monitor screens Setting the Electronic Shutter the flicker even worse Color flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power supply frequency is 60 Hz However if the power frequency is 50 Hz setting the shutter speed to l 100 can reduce this flicker When a bright object is shot in ECS mode in such a manner that it fills the screen the upper edge of the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs Before using ECS mode check the shooting conditions The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the current system frequency In SLS mode white flecks are more prominent when you set the shutter speed number of frames to higher values Executing the APR SLS function on the APR page see page 183 may alleviate the problem of white flecks in SLS mode Selecting the shutter mode and shutter speed Switching the shutter mode and the shutter speed in standard mode Repeatedly flick the SHUTTER selector to the SELECT side see the next section Switching the shutter speed
96. menu operations page 193 2 Select USB IN JUMP TO and press the MENU knob The USB IN gt JUMP TO page allows you to select one of the following settings Setting Description OFF Disables this function Menu pages do not change when a USB flash drive is connected USER Jumps to the USER FILE page ALL Jumps to the ALL FILE page SCENE Jumps to the SCENE FILE page LENS Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page REFER Jumps to the REFERENCE page USER Jumps to the USER 1 FILE page J Turnthe MENU knob until the name of the desired file page appears then press the MENU knob In the following cases jumping to the target page is impossible even when a USB flash drive is inserted When the power is turned on after you insert a USB flash drive Jumping to a File Related Menu Page when Connecting a USB Flash Drive When OFF is selected on the USB IN gt JUMP TO page When any of the following menu pages is already displayed A file related page such as the USER FILE page of the FILE menu USB MEMORY ALL FILE SCENE FILE LENS FILE or REFERENCE page geq Bunmes asn Buipeo pue Bues 7 1e1deu Jumping to a File Related Menu Page when Connecting a USB Flash Drive 227 suoneledo ei 9 saydeyp 228 chapter Overview A remote computer can be connected to this unit via FTP and used to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data files such as video and audio data files
97. message A and an indicator above or below the viewfinder screen E The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted with the ALARM knob Set the ALARM knob to the minimum position to suppress the sound Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator B C D E E Problem VDR operation Action to take The operation of the WARNING indicator and the indicators in the viewfinder is represented by graphic symbols as follows AX Continuous X 1 flash s Je x 4 flashes s The warning sounds are represented by graphic symbols as follows Continuous beep 1 beep s 4 beeps s Operation Warnings Warning messages ILL REC Verify ERR Cache Full Q Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT D indication indicator 3 xt 329 x m Problem VDR operation Action to take 2 9 Recording error Recording stops Turn off the power and El consult a Sony service a8 representative Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator n co 9 9 e e ey Problem VDR operation Action to take Shockproof memory overflow Recording continues but may be Protect the unit from shocks substandard and vibrations Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator a
98. more information about operations in thumbnail screens 1 mthescreenslike clip thumbnail screen or expand thumbnail screen display the Thumbnail Menu 2 Select Skip Scroll and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A small popup window appears on the scrollbar to indicate the position of the currently selected thumbnail within the set of all thumbnails Expand 007 235 All All All Al a a E a DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 i DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 cup Seashore Thumbnail Operations su 199 ND u suogeiado S 19 dey9 115 SueeJog MH ul suonejedo c sajdeyo 116 3 Turn the MENU knob or press the up or down arrow button The current position moves by an amount equal to 1 of the total number of thumbnails 4 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob at the new position The thumbnail at the position indicated in the small popup window appears in a thumbnail screen like the following P Expand 007 235 All Al ELA 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 A DUR 0 00 00 01 XL XD XT DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 CLIP Seashore DUR 0 00 00 01 1 Expand thumbnail screen To select multiple thumbnails Move the selection frame to the first thumbnail that you want to select Then with the SHIFT button held down Turn the MENU knob or press the right arrow button To cancel the multiple selection move the selection frame without t
99. name with the smallest number Example If names C0001 to C0020 are in use the name C0021 If the clip name is a user defined name a serial number is appended to the clip name Example If the name is EveningNews EveningNews 1 To cancel the processing Do one of the following Select Abort Immediately and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob If you are transferring multiple clips select Abort After this clip and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The transfer of subsequent clips will be cancelled after transfer of the current clip finishes Transferring clips Direct FTP function Set the ETHERNET USB item on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to DSABL When several files are to be transferred the entire transfer task is cancelled when the first transfer failure occurs Subsequent clips are not transferred When the transfer of all files has finished the Uploading Result Report screen appears Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen Upload Clips via Direct FTP Uploading Result Report 3C Uploaded 5 All Clips Uploaded Successfully To upload part of a clip You can select part of a clip in the expand thumbnail screen or the chapter thumbnail screen and upload that part Expand thumbnail screen The clip is divided arbitrarily into parts of equal leng
100. number appears and press the MENU knob Select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message SAVE OK YES NO appears If a file number is followed by NEW FILE this means that the file is empty If data is stored in the file the file number is followed by the file name To carry out the save select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO When the saving is completed the message COMPLETE appears If no USB flash drive is connected The message NO USB MEMORY will appear Connect a USB flash drive and carry out the operation once again If you select a file number where data has already been saved The message OVERWRITE OK YES NO appears To stop overwriting press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO To overwrite select YES and press the MENU knob You can select the information displayed on each USER SAVE or USER LOAD page For details see To select the file information Note items to be displayed page 222 Set the file ID before saving data on the USB flash drive About the USER menu settings to be saved on a Otherwise the file ID is not saved with the other data USB flash drive Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu How to select an item in the menu screen Turn are saved on the USB flash drive as a user file the MENU knob to move to the desired item Note 1 The following i
101. of auto white balance you can make the picture warmer or colder How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items in the OFFSET WHT page Item Description OFFSET When this item is set to ON WHITE A the offset adjusted on this page is added to the white balance for channel A WARM COOL A When OFFSET WHITE A is ON sets the offset for the white balance of channel A using the color temperature Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature WARM COOL BAL precisely if the adjustment by lt A gt WARM COOL lt A gt is not satisfactory Adjusts the value more Item Description OFFSET When this item is set to ON WHITE lt B gt the offset adjusted on this page is added to the white balance for channel B When OFFSET WHITE lt B gt is ON sets the offset for the white balance of channel B using the color temperature Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature WARM COOL lt B gt WARM Adjusts the value more CO
102. or near tall structures Move to a location with a clear view of the sky The recording of GPS information may be interrupted depending on the strength of the received signal even if a positioning icon is displayed To display the state of GPS data reception in the viewfinder Set DISP GPS to ON on the VF DISP 2 page of the OPERATION menu to display the GPS data reception status at all times in the viewfinder Verifying the GPS location When recording or playing video with GPS data you can check the location on the GPS INFORMATION screen in the viewfinder To display the GPS INFORMATION screen in the viewfinder 1 SetSTATUS GPS to ON on the SET STATUS page of the OPERATION menu 2 PushtheSTATUS ON SEL OFF switch on the camcorder to the ON SEL position The displayed screen changes each time the switch is pushed Push the switch until the GPS INFORMATION screen appears The GPS INFORMATION screen below is displayed for a few seconds Advanced Operations for Shooting Dunoous y je1deu 103 Bunooug y e1deuo 104 GPS INFORMATION LATITUDE N 35 40 LONGITUDE E135 25 ALTITUDE 0123m CALC 13 03 31T REAL 13 03 31T TIME ZONE 9 00 GPS DOP 02 12 12 Displayed items Item Description LATITUDE Latitude 3 LONGITUDE Longitude a ALTITUDE Altitude 9 CALC Calculated date and time REAL Current date and time TIME ZONE Time zone offset from UTC a When
103. picture when CONVERTER SD is upconverted to HD FIELD Use the field picture ADPT Optimize the ratio of conversion from the frame or field picture UC DETAIL 99 to 99 Adjusts the sharpness of edge enhancement LEVEL by the upconverter UC CRISPENING 8 to 7 Sets the amplitude width at which the upconverter does not emphasize low amplitude signals UC DETAIL LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the maximum level of edge enhancement by the upconverter UC LV DEPEND 8 to 7 Sets the luminance of edge enhancement by LVL the upconverter UC DTL 3 2M 4 5M Sets the center frequency and frequency FREQUENCY 5 0M 4 0M properties of edge enhancement by the upconverter 3 2M 3 2 1 1 MHz 4 5M 4 5 1 4 MHz 5 0M 5 0 0 7 MHz 4 0M 4 0 2 0 MHz UC DTL H V 3 to 4 Sets the horizontal vertical ratio of edge RATIO enhancement by the upconverter 27 SHUTTER SHUTTER SELECT SECOND Selects the shutter speed display unit SELECT DEGREE SECOND Second units DEGREE Degree units shutter opening angle See page 62 for more information about degree unit settings ADD 360 0 to 180 0 to Registers a shutter degree setting in an empty only when 4 5 upper limit number from 1 to 6 this item is disabled if no SHUTTER SELECT of shutter angle number is empty is set to DEGREE degrees DEL Deletes the setting assigned to a number from only when 1 to 6 numbers with no settings assigned SHUTTER SELECT cannot be selected is set to DE
104. recorded the retake function does not work even when the camcorder is in the recording pause state In this case the message RE TAKE NOT ALLOWED appears When you want to replace the last clip with a new clip delete the clip see page 125 Once you carry out a retake operation the last clip is deleted even if you do not carry out a recording operation afterwards Assigning user defined clip titles automatically About the automatic title generation function By default clips on each disc are assigned names in the range CO001 MXF to C9999 MXF For this reason two discs can contain clips with the same names The automatic title generation function allows you to assign titles to all of the clips on several discs which facilitates clip management For example if the titles TITLE00001 to TITLE00020 are assigned to clips CO001 MXF to C0020 MXF on disc 1 then the titles TITLE00021 to TITLE00037 are assigned to clips C0001 MXF to C0017 MXF on disc 2 Titles are made up of prefixes up to 10 characters in length and five digit serial numbers such as TITLE 00001 C0001 MXF p p o TITLE00020 t1 00020 ahr TITLE00001 Clips recorded on Disc 1 f TITLE00037 frn E0002 TITLE00021 Clips recorded on Disc 2 Setting the title prefix You can assign title prefixes by choosing from a prefix list stored in internal memory or by entering the prefix directly
105. recording the current latitude longitude and altitude are displayed During playback recorded information is displayed b The calculated date and time displays the time obtained using positioning data received from three or more GPS satellites After positioning is established the display stops when positioning is subsequently lost The time is displayed when positioning is re established While positioning is established the time displayed is always the same as the current date and time During playback the calculated time is not displayed c The current date and time displays the time obtained from one or more GPS satellites It matches the GPS satellite clock When no GPS satellites are available it displays the time using a crystal operated clock within the module During playback the calculated date and time recorded on the disc is displayed When shooting without available GPS data is displayed Problems when using GPS GPS signals cannot be received The signals from GPS satellites may not be received due to interference caused by obstructions In this case move to a location with aclear view of the sky For details about locations that may obstruct the signal see page 272 Advanced Operations for Shooting Calculated location appears incorrect An error of up to a few hundred meters yards may occur if the received GPS signal is reflected off nearby structures or if the signal is very weak
106. ring with the fog proof filter Be sure to correctly assemble the fog proof filter the packing ring and the eyecup so that the reassembled eyepiece is waterproof When cleaning the fog proof filter wipe it very gently with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti fogging coating Note about the battery terminal The battery terminal of this unit the connector for battery packs and AC adaptors is a consumable part Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations or if they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime Contact a Sony service or sales representative for more information about inspections Maintenance eoueueluley 6 1e1deuj 245 eoueuejuley 6 Je deuD 246 Operation Warnings If a problem occurs when the camcorder is powered or is being operated a warning is issued by various visible and audible indicators These visible and audible indicators are In the status display on the LCD monitor a warning message A in the Layout of the table of warning messages below and a warning indication B Layout of the table of warning messages The WARNING indicator on the side panel of the camcorder C and a warning sound from the speaker and earphones D n the viewfinder a warning
107. s Ja deyo 142 Upload Clips via Direct FTP Select Remote Host Remote Host 1 Remote Host 2 Remote Host 3 Remote Host 4 UPnP Hosts Discovered via UPnP Network Config Cancel 6 Select the remote host the target device to which you want to transfer the clips You can register up to four remote hosts Remote Host 1 to 3 Register these in the settings screen Remote Host 4 UPnP A remote host that supports UPnP universal plug and play is detected and registered automatically see To enable the UPnP function page 141 To check remote hosts discovered by the UPnP function Select Hosts Discovered via UPnP and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob If the UPnP function of this unit is disabled a confirmation screen appears prompting you to enable it Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The UPnP function will be enabled when you power the unit off and then on again The Select Host Discovered via UPnP screen appears Some time may be required before the search for remote hosts finishes Select the name of a remote host from the list and press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A network settings screen appears see step 7 If you establish a connection with the selected remote host the network settings are saved in Remote Host 4 From the next time that you select Remote Host 4 UPnP the remote host that you select here will be
108. set to Cue up amp Play then pressing the SET S SEL button has the same effect Shortcut List su 199 N9 ul suoneiedo G 1e1deuo 147 sBumes pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 148 chapter Menu Organization The following chart shows the organization of menus in this camcorder TOP MENU USER A L USER MENU CUSTOMIZE L ALL L OPERATION B L PAINT C L MAINTENANCE D FILE E DIAGNOSIS F A USER menu USER m OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 SUPERIMPOSE LCD REC FUNCTION L ASSIGNABLE SW VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 r LED MARKER 1 GAIN SW VF SETTING VF DETAIL AUTO IRIS SHOT ID SHOT DISP SET STATUS LENS FILE USER FILE Menu Organization B OPERATION menu OPERATION m OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 SUPERIMPOSE LCD REC FUNCTION ASSIGNABLE SW POWER SAVE VF DISP 1 Fr VF DISP 2 VF DISP 3 VF DISP 4 r LED I LED STD MARKER 1 MARKER 2 FOCUS ASSIST GAIN SW VF SETTING VF DETAIL F AUTO IRIS SHOT ID SHOT DISP SET STATUS WHITE SETTING OFFSET WHT SHT ENABLE LENS FILE FORMAT SOURCE SEL UMID SET Fr CLIP TITLE FILE NAMING MEMORY REC GPS SETUP C PAINT menu PAINT r SW STATUS WHITE BLACK FLARE GAMMA BLACK GAMMA I KNEE 1 KNEE 2 r DETAIL 1 D
109. shot LOW LIGHT Depending on the setting the subject illumination is inadequate Operation Warnings ON BOARD BATTERY EMPTY DCP EEPROM DATA NG DR EEPROM DATA NG DCP DR EEPROM DATA NG The backup battery of the internal clock is empty 9 If this message continues to appear even after the unit is powered off and on again several times then the factory adjustment data is invalid Contact a Sony service representative a Contact a Sony service representative to replace the battery VDR operation messages are displayed in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen see page 31 Take the actions listed in the following table ILL Disc A disc that cannot be used by this unit was inserted Insert another Professional Disc ILL Index Index file or file system error No FS Exchange or format the disc Unknown FS No Support A recorded clip cannot be handled by this unit Exchange or format the disc FORMAT The disc could not be formatted NG automatically Exchange the disc Disc Damage Non AV Full MAX Files Over DUR DI read err Read err DRV ADJ err A disc that cannot be recorded was inserted To record exchange the disc The disc is full Exchange or format the disc The disc was not recognized Try ejecting the disc and inserting it again Or exchange the disc Run Salvage Salvage NG
110. te eee tn enean status tnenaens About GPS MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License MPEG 2 Video Patent Portfolio License About IJG Independent JPEG Group sse Character display software Type sse About libUDnp oett Ede ERR ES Reb eee ee rne ote About Opens SL 1t dee er err d in E P Ren m Table of Contents 7 After purchasing this unit before operating it is necessary to set the region of use Unless this setting is made the unit will not operate For details of these settings see Setting the Area of Use page 38 Before attaching removing optional components or accessories to from the camcorder be sure to turn the power of the camcorder off Before Using the Unit Features 2 3 inch full HD PowerHAD FX CCDs IT Interline Transfer 2 inch progressive image sensors with 2 2 million pixels for full HD resolution 1920 x 1080 PowerHAD FX CCDs featuring a signal processing ASIC with 16 bit A D converters These new image sensor technologies enable the capture of very high quality images with F11 59 94i and F12 50i sensitivity and an SN ratio of 62 dB P 1 With noise suppression on off value is 58 dB Noise suppression uses proprietary Sony signal processing technology to suppress noise in high frequency regions Mechanisms for high reliability A new duct cooling system prevents overheating inside t
111. the battery pack Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing the battery pack Using AC power When using the AC DN10 AC Adaptor Mount an AC DNIO on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack then connect to the AC power supply The AC DNIO can supply up to 100 W of power E GO To an AC outlet J Attaching the Viewfinder Attaching the Viewfinder When the viewfinder is attached do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun Direct sunlight can enter through the eyepiece be focused in the viewfinder and cause fire The viewfinder is supplied separately Attaching the HDVF 20A 200 C35W C30WR When attaching the viewfinder make notes of the following points Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling the viewfinder connector to the camcorder s VF connector If you make this connection when the camcorder power is on the viewfinder may not function properly Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the camcorder s VF connector If the coupling is loose noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not operate properly For more information about the connection of the viewfinder and camcorder contact a Sony service representative 1 Loosen the viewfinder left to right positioning ring attach the viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting shoe and tighten the viewfinder left to right positioning ring Viewfinder left to right position
112. the direction of the rear of the camcorder The disc compartment lid opens A red Phillips screw is visible inside the rubber cap 8 Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the screw counterclockwise the direction shown on the rubber cap This ejects the disc 4 Close the rubber cover firmly You need not return the screw to its original position after taking out the disc Turning on the power makes the disc compartment mechanism operable again Do not touch the disc or try to forcibly remove it until it has been completely ejected Formatting a disc When using a new disc An unused disc requires no formatting operation The disc is automatically formatted so that it is ready to use when loaded into this unit To format a disc on which material is recorded See page 136 for details of formatting a disc When a recorded disc is formatted all the data on the disc is erased Even locked clips see page 124 are also erased Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage function Recording processing does not end normally if for example the battery pack is removed during recording or if the power cord is disconnected during recording Because the file system is not updated video and audio data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip contents recorded up to that point are lost However this unit has a salvage function which can hold losses to the minimum by reconstructi
113. the following on the smartphone tablet or other device 1 Connect the camcorder and the device using Wi Fi 2 Launch a browser on the device and access http lt IP address of camcorder MAINTENANCE Network Setting gt IP Address value rm html For example enter http 192 168 1 10 rm html if the IP address is 192 168 1 10 When the connection is successful the Wi Fi Remote screen appears on the device Thereafter operate the camcorder using the screen displayed on the device You can disable operation of the REC button by dragging the Lock bar to the right To display the page for a smartphone change rm html to rms html in the URL To display the page for a tablet change rm html to rmt html in the URL When rm html is entered the page automatically switches for display on the corresponding device However the appropriate page may not be displayed depending on the device The Wi Fi Remote screen may not match the settings on the camcorder under the following circumstances If this occurs reload the browser window If the camcorder is restarted while connected If the camcorder is operated directly while connected If the device has been reconnected If the browser Forward Back buttons have been used The Wi Fi Remote control may not function if the wireless signal strength becomes weak The smartphone or table device used may not support ad hoc mode depending on th
114. the following points The indication in the counter display on the LCD monitor is changing The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on The RF and SERVO indicators on the color LCD are off B Press the REC START button again Check that recording stops and that the REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off 7 Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6 this time using the VTR button on the lens Press the RESET RETURN button and check that the indication in the counter display on the LCD monitor is 00 00 00 00 Testing the Camcorder before Shooting 8 Press the F REV button then press the PLAY PAUSE button Check that fast reverse playback and normal playback are performed Press the STOP button then press the F FWD button Check that playback stops and fast forward playback are performed 10 Press the STOP button again then press the PREV button Check that the image of the beginning of the current or previous clip is displayed 11 Press the NEXT button and check that the image of the beginning of the next clip is displayed 2 Testing the automatic audio level adjusting functions 1 Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to FRONT 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUTO J Set the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches to F FRONT 4 Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a suitable sound source Check that the level indications for channels 1 to 4 correspond to the sound level resp
115. the modes and speeds in Shutter modes page 60 except SLS mode You can change this configuration by selecting only the required modes and speeds on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu see page 159 Shutter speeds in standard mode can also be switched to angle display by using SHT DISP MODE in the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu see page 180 To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS mode 1 Setthe shutter speed mode to ECS or SLS see the previous item 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired frequency or number of frames When the RM B170 Remote Control Unit is connected You can set the shutter speed of ECS or SLS with the RM B170 To change the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings You can reduce the time required to select the shutter mode and speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance This can be done by using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM B170 or another remote control unit is connected to the camcorder Setting the Electronic Shutter Bunoous 10 suyas pue sjueuasn py e 4e1deuo 61 Bunooys 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e sa deyo 62 1 Display the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 025OSHT ENABLE SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER
116. the picture All video output is magnified including recorded video x2 x3 and x4 are available for selection CLIP CONT Assigns the function that REC turns the Clip Continuous Rec function on and off UAOI to Assigns the items assigned in UA109 the ASSIGN SEL menu VFCOLOR Assigns the VF color detail DETAIL function To add functions that can be assigned to a Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu the ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or not to display all markers b Video momentarily becomes black and audio is momentarily muted when the digital extender is switched on and off c This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2 slide type switch you cannot change those settings using other menus The function assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the menu setting Select the desired function and press the MENU knob The function is assigned and the ASSIGNABLE SW page appears again the ASSIGN switches When shipped from the factory UAO1 to UA10 user assignable items in the ASSIGN switch function list are blank You can register up to ten functions in these items 1 Display the EDIT ASSIGN SEL page of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu and press the MENU knob For details about using the menus see Menu Operations page 193 E210EDIT ASSIGN SEL TOP gt
117. this button to carry out a thumbnail search or create a clip list see page 116 When pressed the whole screen display changes to a thumbnail display Press once more to return to the whole screen display For a thumbnail search using essence marks hold down the SHIFT button and press this button see page 117 SET S SEL set scene selection button and arrow buttons Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit settings and for GUI screen operations The arrow buttons select items and change values and the SET S SEL button confirms settings Pressing this button with thumbnails displayed and the SHIFT button held down adds a sub clip to the current clip list scene selection See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations See page 126 for more information about scene selection El MENU button Displays a special menu for operations in GUI screens see page 110 When the whole screen is displayed pressing this button has no effect and the operation is invalid Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls F RUN SET R RUN free run set recording run switch Selects the operating mode of the internal timecode generator The operating mode is set as explained below depending on the position of the switch F RUN Timecode keeps advancing regardless of the operating state of the VDR Use this setting when synchronizing the timecode with an external timecode SET Sets the timecode
118. this case the message Unknown USB appears 2 Only ASCII characters can be entered from a Japanese keyboard To change the display language font for clip names clip list names and title2 clip titles Select one of the following languages fonts with the Disc menu item Settings gt Select Font European Alphabet The keyboard language can be selected with the Disc Menu item Settings USB Keyboard Language see following section Korean The Korean keyboard is selected automatically You can enter Hangul characters if you have connected a Korean USB keyboard Simplified Chinese The keyboard layout is identical to that of the English United States keyboard Only ASCII characters can be entered Traditional Chinese The keyboard layout is identical to that of the English United States keyboard Only ASCII characters can be entered To change the keyboard language In the Disc Menu select Settings Select USB Keyboard Language and then select the desired keyboard from among the following English United Kingdom English United States French France German Germany Italian Italy Polish Programmers Poland Russian Russia Spanish Spain See List of Supported USB Keyboards page 264 for the characters that can be entered on the various language keyboards The keyboard language cannot be changed in the following cases When the area of use is set to NTSC J A
119. this unit is powered on even when this item is set to AUTO If this occurs turn the zoom and focus rings of the lens all the way to one side and then check to make sure that ALAC has appeared in the viewfinder Contact your dealer or a Sony service representative for more information about lenses that support aberration correction Wi Fi ETHER_RM OFF RM ALL Selects remote control of the camera using a Wi Fi or Ethernet connection OFF Remote control disabled RM Remote control operation of the camera is supported via an CBK WA100 but main line output broadcast is not supported ALL Remote control of the camera and main line output broadcast is supported 15 PRESET WHITE COLOR TEMP lt P gt Display reference color temperature Sets the white balance preset value C TEMP BAL P 99 to 99 Finer setting when the desired color could not be obtained with the COLOR TEMP P color temperature setting R GAIN P 99 to 99 Sets the R gain preset value G GAIN P 99 to 99 Sets the G gain preset value AWB ENABLE P OFF ON When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST turns the function that enables execution of AWB auto white balance on and off Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsig nuaw 9 JajdeyD 181 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nua 9 saldeyp 182 No Page Item Settings Description 16 DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION D
120. unit s memory To switch the title display in the LCD monitor and viewfinder When planning metadata is loaded into this unit you can select the format of the title to display in the LCD monitor and viewfinder See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu Disc Operations su 199 ND ul suoneiedo g 1e1deu 135 SueaJog MH Ul suonejedo s Jajdeyo 136 2 Select Settings and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 3 Select Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob See page 29 for more information about the Clip Info Area 4 Select one of the following and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob ASCII Clip Name Display the ASCII format title see page 96 Clip Name Display the UTF 8 format title see page 96 To display clip names in the clip information area in the viewfinder 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Settings and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 3 Select Planning Clip Name Display whether to display the clip name in the viewfinder screen and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 4 Select Enable and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Clip information is always shown in the warning indicator area of the LCD monitor if the LCD monitor is set to status display Checking user defined essence marks
121. via Ethernet or a wireless LAN P This function allows you to do the following on your computer View proxy AV data Add and edit metadata titles comments essence marks and so on Create clip lists After adding or editing metadata or creating a clip list you can transfer the metadata or clip list from the computer back to this unit for recording on the original disc Advanced Operations for Shooting Bunoous y je1deu 99 Bunooug y e1deuo 100 1 To make wireless LAN connections you must install the optional CBK WAO01 Wi Fi Adaptor or the optional CBK WA100 Wireless Adaptor See page 213 for more information about wireless LAN settings There are two Live Logging operating modes Live mode and Live View mode The following table lists the main functions provided by each operating mode Operating Main functions as seen from this mode unit Live Send clip metadata Write edited clip metadata back to disc Receive planning metadata Receive clip lists Live View Same functions as above Send proxy AV data In Live View mode it is not possible to set time data by setting the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET To set time data first switch from Live View mode to another operating mode Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch time data advances in F RUN mode while the unit is operating in Live View mode In Live View mode it is not possible to set the PRESET
122. 0 enter http 192 168 1 10 If the connection succeeds you will be prompted to enter a user name and a password 3 Enter your user name and password and then press the Enter key The user name and password are set to the following when the unit is shipped from the factory User name admin e Password Model name pdw 850 After the user name and password are verified an XDCAM web page appears To display disc and clip properties 1 Insert a disc into this unit and put this unit into the following state Recording playback search and other disc operations Stopped THUMBNAIL button Off Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips Format Disc and so on in the Disc Menu Stopped Setting of CACHE INTVAL REC on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu OFF FTP connection for file operations Disconnected or logged out Recording of video from external devices Disabled Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function Disconnected Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu Values other than VIEW OFF or LIVE MENU ON OFF switch OFF 2 Display the XDCAM web pages in the browser of your computer see the previous section To display disc properties Click Disc Properties in the Disc menu The disc properties of this unit appear in the Disc Properties page See Checking disc properties page 133 for more info
123. 1 creationDate 2008 01 20T17 00 00 09 00 last Update 2008 03 28T10 30 00 09 00 versionz 1 00 23 Properties propertyId y assignment pupdate 2008 0 1 20T09 00 00 09 00 modifiedBy Chris gt 4 Title usAscii Typhoon xml lang en gt Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo lt Title Properties 3 PlanningMetadata In the above example sp indicates a space and 4 indicates a carriage return When you create a file enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line and do not enter spaces except where specified If the UTF 8 format string exceeds 50 bytes the ASCII format string is used as the clip name string If no ASCII format name is specified the standard format clip name is used When an ASCII format name string exceeds 50 characters and when an UTF 8 format name string exceeds 50 bytes the standard format clip name is used Setting clip names 1 Loada planning metadata file containing clip names into the unit s memory see page 134 and page 138 2 Carry out steps 2 to 5 of To assign clip names on this unit page 94 3 Turn the MENU knob to display PLAN and then press the MENU knob Each time that you start recording the unit automatically creates clip names using the names specified in the planning metadata file An underscore _ and a five digit serial number 00001 to 99999 is appended to each clip name Examples of aut
124. 1 Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select INDEX PIC POS and press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired time 4 Press the MENU knob Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre stored picture data Picture Cache function The camcorder has a large capacity internal memory in which you can cache the last few seconds maximum 30 seconds of captured video and audio so that recording starts from a point just before you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens Picture Cache settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode During Slow amp Quick Motion shooting Setting the Picture Cache mode Picture Cache time To record in Picture Cache mode you need to turn on Picture Cache mode and set the picture data storage time Picture Cache time using the USER menu The Picture Cache time determines the number of seconds recorded from the Picture Cache counting back from the time when you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording However the number of seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache may be shorter immediately after the setting of the VDR SAVE STBY switch is changed and in the special situations explained in the follow
125. 10BASE T 100BASE TX 24 5600K function 210 A AC power 34 ACCESS indicator 18 Accessories 263 Accessory fitting shoe 12 Additional equipment 261 ALARM knob 15 ALL menu 150 Area of use setting 38 Arrow buttons 22 ASSIGN switches 15 23 assigning functions 209 ATW Auto Tracing White Balance 16 Audio control section 22 Audio format 20 AUDIO IN CHI CH2 connectors 25 AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 witches 23 Audio input system 43 Audio level 31 adjusting playback level 15 adjusting recording level 66 AUDIO LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 knobs 22 Audio level indicators 20 AUDIO OUT connector 25 AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches 23 AUTO W B BAL switch 14 BATT indicator 27 Battery attachment shoe 12 Battery pack 33 Black balance adjusting 55 BRIGHT button 19 BRIGHT control 26 Built in speaker 17 C CA camera adaptor connector 13 Camera operator tally indicator 26 CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch 17 CC 5600K function 210 Chapter thumbnail screen 109 Chapter function 117 Clip 126 assigning user defined name 94 assigning user defined title 91 changing index picture 120 continuous playback mode 79 deleting 125 duration 108 finding 116 locking 124 properties 121 selecting by type 119 single clip playback mode 79 thumbnail screen 107 transferring 140 unlocking 125 Clip Continuous Rec function 90 display 29 Clip flag setting 82 124 Clip information 29 Clip list 127 assigning user defined name 94 clearing 132 creating and editing 127
126. 16bit 48kHz 8 channels 4 channels 2 a When the video recording format is set to MPEG HD422 50 b When the video recording format is setto MPEG IMX 50 40 30 c When the video recording format is set to MPEG HD420 HQ SP or DVCAM It is not possible to combine material recorded in different frame frequency groups on a single disc see page 54 This unit can record up to four channels of audio If you select a format with eight channels of audio silence is recorded in channels 5 to 8 Setting the system frequency 1 Display the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu 027OFORMART TOP SYSTEM LINE H 1080 SYSTEM FREQUENCY 59 91 HD422 50 REC FORMAT COUNTRY gt NTSC J AREA For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select SYSTEM FREQUENCY and turn the MENU knob to select the desired system frequency Setting the Recording Format Bunooug 104 suyas pue sjueunsn py e 1e1deuo 53 Bunooys 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo 54 You can select the frequency shown below depending on the combination of the COUNTRY and SYSTEM LINE settings COUNTRY SYSTEM SYSTEM LINE FREQUENCY NTSCQ AREA 1080 59 9i 29 9P NTSC AREA 23 98P 720 59 9P PAL AREA 1080 50i 25P 720 50P Change the COUNTRY or SYSTEM LINE setting as required Setting the video recording format 1 Display the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operat
127. 1OUSER FILE USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE er ID N 1H 7 amp Xt 012345678 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP gRSTUUUXYZIYlabcdefshiJk 1mnoPrarstuuuxsSz INS DEL RET ESC END Follow steps 3 and 4 described in Setting the shot ID page 205 to enter characters When you have finished entering the file ID turn the MENU knob to move B to END and press the MENU knob The entered file ID is now displayed FO1OUSER FI USER FILE L 2USER FILE S USER PRES File ID that has been set appears When you carry out a user file save operation see page 220 the set file ID is saved on the USB flash drive together with the data Saving and Recalling User Files geq umes sn Buipeo pue Buies 7 1e1deu iw N geq Bumes sn Buipeo1 pue Bues 7 Jeydeuo 222 To select the file information items to be displayed You can select the user file information items to be displayed on the USER FILE SAVE page and USER FILE LOAD page P00 to P19 that are used to save and load data to and from a USB flash drive How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display a USER FILE LOAD page or USER FILE SAVE page of the USER FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select DISPLAY MODE and press the MENU knob 3 Select the desired type of file information and press the MENU knob
128. 5 5 V or more 7 0 V or more BATTE M E E E EE F 5 1 to 15 5 V 6 0 to 17 0 V BATTE W E E EN F 4 6 to 15 1 V 5 0 to 16 0 V BATTE W E EN F 3 8 to 14 6 V 4 0 to 15 0 V BATTE W E E F 2 9 to 13 8 V 3 0 to 14 0 V BATT E E M F 2 0 to 12 9 V 2 0 to 13 0 V BATT E W F 0 8 to 12 0 V 1 0 to 12 0 V BATTE F 0 8 V or less 1 0 V or less a You can change the threshold voltages on the BATTERY 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu see page 172 For your safety and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs BP L80S and BP FL75 Indication Battery voltage BP GL95 GL65 IL75 M100 Anton Bauer Battery System BATTE M E E E EEEF 80 to 100 BATTE M E E E I I NF 70 BATTE WM E E EEE 60 BATTE M E E E E 50 BATT E W E E E 40 BATTE W E E 30 BATTE W N 20 BATT E W 10 BATTE 0 For your safety and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs BP L80S and BP FL75 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls MOIAJOAQ Je deuD 21 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 22 GUI screen operations section and audio control section Auro Www CRT CHa PRESt AUDIO IN FRONT REGEN EAR CLOCK Pon zan cog OE THUMBNAIL indicator This lights when thumbnails are displayed THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK button Press
129. 5 6 or higher Transferring clips Direct FTP function Preparations for clip transfers Check the following points This unit and the target transfer device XDCAM device or computer must be supplied with stable power and must be connected to a network The settings under the NETWORK 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu must be set to values that allow network connections The ETHERNET USB item on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu must be set to ENABL For XDCAM devices that support UPnP universal plug and play the UPnP function must be enabled the setting may vary To enable the UPnP function The UPnP universal plug and play function allows devices to be easily connected to networks The following XDCAM devices support UPnP PDW F1600 PDW HD1500 PDW HRI PDW F800 PDW 700 PDW 740 To enable the UPnP function on this unit set UPnP on the NETWORK SETTING page of the MAINTENANCE menu to ENABLE and then power the unit off and on again For the settings on other XDCAM devices refer to the operation manuals supplied with the devices Uploading clips To upload entire clips Proceed as follows to upload selected clips or all clips and clip lists on the disc See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the clip to upload multiple selections possible To upload all clips and clip lists on the disc start fro
130. 619452 byte Maintenance rre oanien Network 1179648 byte WiFi ETE Download aeta byte Certificate Lm Software Update lt lt License Registration TITLEO0001 L 3 DUCCENM ron ong 1 LEN 7 169 Bas Thumbs To download high resolution clip data HIGH resolution file proxy AV data LOW resolution file or metadata Clip NRT metadata click the FTP Download or HTTP Download button to the right of the item that you want Then click Save in the dialog that appears and specify the save destination The specified data is downloaded to the specified location in your computer FTP download limitations The following limitations apply to FTP download operations They do not apply to HTTP download operations The characters that can be used in the names of clip related data files are single byte letters numbers and symbols However the following symbols cannot be used lt gt I If you click Cancel in the download dialog or if the download is cancelled in some other way with the browser still connected to the unit by FTP click Back to Thumbnails to return to the thumbnails screen or exit the web browser To use a web browser to load planning metadata 1 Insert a disc into this unit and put this unit into the following state Recording playback search and other disc operations Stopped THUMBNAIL button O
131. A both SHT DISP MODE SEC DEG Selects shutter speed display seconds or degrees RM F NO DISPLAY CTRL RET Switches the iris F value display type on remote control units such as the MSU 900 CTRL Display based on control value from camera RET Display based on position value from lens FAN CONTROL AUTO R MIN MIN Specifies the control method for the cooling fan This setting is retained even when the unit is powered off AUTO Control the rotation of the cooling fan automatically R MIN Rotate the cooling fan at low speed during recording only and stop the rotation when this unit is used in an environment so cool that temperatures inside the unit do not rise MIN Rotate the cooling fan at low speed and stop the rotation when this unit is used in an environment so cool that temperatures inside the unit do not rise Regardless of this setting the cooling fan rotates at high speed if temperatures inside the unit rise to a temperature near the alarm level Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 14 CAM CONFIG 3 ALAC OFF AUTO Specifies whether to activate the aberration correction function OFF Do not activate AUTO Activate aberration correction when a lens that supports aberration correction is mounted For some aberration correction lenses the aberration correction function may not activate ALAC does not appear in the viewfinder immediately after
132. ABORT appears when the abort processing is completed To delete recorded proxy data To delete data recorded on the disc at the same time that you delete proxy data from a USB flash drive execute the DELETE CLIP command in the Thumbnail menu see page 125 To delete proxy data from the USB flash drive only proceed as follows 1 Select DELE ALL MEM CLP in the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu and then press the MENU knob The message EXECUTE OK appears 2 Select YES and then press the MENU knob During the execution of the deletion the message MEMORY ACCESS appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor When processing finishes the message COMPLETE appears All of the proxy data in the USB flash drive is deleted To format a USB flash drive Proceed as follows to format a USB flash drive with the FAT32 file system 1 Select FORMAT MEMORY in the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu and then press the MENU knob The message EXECUTE OK appears 2 Select YES and then press the MENU knob During the execution of the format the message MEMORY ACCESS appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor When processing finishes the message COMPLETE appears All of the data in the USB flash drive is deleted Obtaining GPS location information To record location information Set GPS to ON on the GPS SETUP page of the OPERATION menu of the camcorder AS is di
133. AN settings Wi Fi STATUS E CONNECT display only Communication connection status EHEHEHEH Displays the signal strength by the number of B s CONNECT Executing the connection sequence WIRELESS MODE 802 11b 802 11g 802 11n display only IEEE 802 11 standard SSID unknown up to 32 characters display only Network name NETWORK TYPE INFRA ADHOC display only Connection mode CH 1 to 14 display only 13 and 14 are for automatically detected channels only Wireless channel AUTH OPEN SHARED WPA WPA2 display only Network authentication ENCRYPTION DISABLE WEP TKIP AES display only Data encryption Wi Fi SETTING This menu is not used when using the CBK WA100 Wireless Adaptor SCAN NETWORKS EXEC SSID Blank up to 32 characters NETWORK TYPE INFRA ADHOC CH ltoll AUTH OPEN SHARED WPA WPA2 ENCRYPTION DISABLE WEP TKIP AES WEP KEY INDEX 1 2 3 4 INPUT SELECT ASCIIS ASCII13 HEX10 HEX26 KEY Blank up to 26 characters For details see Setting up a wireless LAN page 213 Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 185 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nua 9 saldeyp 186 No Page Item Settings Description 26 UP UP CON PROCESS FIELD ADPT Selects the conversion source
134. Battery Pack AC power using the AC DN2B DN10 AC Adaptor Using a battery pack When a BP L80S FL75 Battery Pack is used the camcorder will operate continuously for the time shown below Model name Operating time BP L80S Approx 100 minutes BP FL75 Approx 85 minutes The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency of use of the battery pack and the ambient temperature when used Before use charge the battery pack with a charger suitable for each battery For details on the battery charging procedure refer to the battery charger operation manual Note on using the battery pack A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged To attach the battery pack 1 Pressthe battery pack against the back of the camcorder aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the matching line on the camcorder Q BP L80S FL75 O Align these lines Slide the battery pack down until its LOCK arrow points at the matching line on the camcorder Q LOCK arrow Matching line on the camcorder If the battery pack is not attached correctly the terminal may be damaged Preparing a Power Supply suonejedeJjg z je1deuj 33 suongeledejd z ejdeuj 34 To detach the battery pack Holding the release button in pull the battery pack up Release button During recording and playback while the ACCESS indicator is lit be careful never to remove
135. C START item on the CAM Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position Connecting the Remote Control Unit CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM Paint adjustment when the remote control unit is connected The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled Function of the recording start stop buttons when the remote control unit is connected When the remote control unit is connected you can make a setting to determine which of the recording start stop buttons you will use This setting is made using the RM REC START item on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Relationship between the setting of the RM REC START item and the function of recording start stop buttons When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect before the remote control unit was connected Structure of the paint adjustment data The non volatile memory of the camcorder used for storing paint adjustment data consists of two regions as shown below one is the independent data region that is used when a remote control unit is not connected and the other is the remote control data region that is used when a remote suoneiedeJjg z jedeuj control unit is connected Paint adjustment data is automatically selected and output to the camera section depending on whether or not a remote contro
136. CC FIX Enables or disables automatic knee point SEL adjustment when the OUTPUT DCC switch is set to CAM DCC ON DCC Automatically adjust the knee point according to the luminance of the subject FIX Set the knee point to a fixed value DCC D RANGE 400 450 Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT 500 550 DCC switch is set to CAM DCC ON 600 DCC POINT 99 to 99 Adjusts the DCC minimum knee point DCC GAIN 99 to 99 Adjusts the gain to DCC detected value DCC DELAY TIME 99 to 99 Adjusts the DCC reaction speed DCC PEAK FILTER 99 to 99 Adjusts the response sensitivity to the peak of the DCC detected value 17 AUTO IRIS 2 IRIS WINDOW 1 2 3 4 5 6 VAR Selects the auto iris detection window VAR variable IRIS WINDOW OFF ON Turns on and off the function which displays a IND frame marker for the auto iris detection window IRIS LEVEL 99 to 99 Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value IRIS APL RATIO 99 to 99 Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris detection peak value and average value IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 240 to 479 Adjusts the width of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 135 to 269 Adjusts the height of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS VAR H POS 460 to 0 to 459 Adjusts the horizontal position of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR
137. Connect the network connectors on this unit and the remote computer using a network cable see page 233 Directory structure The following figure shows the directory structure of discs visible to a remote computer This structure is not the same as the actual structure recorded on the disc Overview root INDEX XML ALIAS XML 9 DISCMETA XML MEDIAPRO XML ug hug pug pug ug SYSPRO XML Pa Clip C0001 MXF C0001M01 XML C0001M02 KLV C0002 MXF y pu mw uu pu C0002M01 XML C0002M02 KLV ig 9 component i P0001 MXF 9 m a E0001E01 SMI E0001M01 XML E0002E01 SMI ii fi pu my E0002M01 XML o c o ul uu C0001S01 MXF C0002S01 MXF A UserData 1 General ZZ COND Continued a Root directory b Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE c Files generated when voice over editing is executed on the PDW HRI Continued NS as PROAV t ALIAS XML J ALIAS BUP M CLPR M CMPTR DISCINFO XML p DISCINFO BUP ut ii DISCMETA XML EDTR INDEX XML INDEX BUP File operation restrictions This section explains which operations are possible on files stored in each directory When required the following operation tables
138. Crosstalk 10 dB or lower at 1 kHz reference level Wow and flutter Below measurable limit Headroom 12 16 18 20 dB selectable Camera section Imager 3 chip 2 4 inch type HD PowerHAD FX CCDs Effective Picture Elements 1920 H x 1080 V Optical system F1 4 prism system Built in optical filters CC filter optical A Cross filter B 3200K C 4300K D 6300K ND filter optical 1 Clear 2 1 4 ND 3 jg ND 4 I ND Shutter speed time 1080 59 94i 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 ECS SLS 1080 50i 1 60 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 ECS SLS Specifications 259 xipueddy 260 1080 29 97p 1 40 1 60 1 120 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 ECS SLS 1080 25p 1 33 1 50 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 ECS SLS 1080 23 98p 1 32 1 48 1 50 1 60 1 96 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 ECS SLS 720 59 94p 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 ECS SLS 720 50p 1 60 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 ECS SLS 1 ECS Extended Clear Scan 2 SLS Slow Shutter Shutter speed Slow Shutter SLS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 frame Slow amp Quick Motion function MPEG HD422 50M 1080 mode only 23 98p Selectable from 1 to 48 frame sec as recording frame rate 25p Selectable from 1 to 50 frame sec as recording frame rate 29 97p Selectable from 1 to 59 94 frame sec as recording frame rate Sensitivity 2000 Ix 89 9
139. DEX MIDDLE1 gt gt gt TC 00 25 28 09 TC 00 25 31 13 TC0025 3000 TC00 25 3022 Name C0023 Titlet SCENE 00126 Date 2005 DEC 01 14 55 OK Dur 0 00 02 05 On Clip List 4 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The selected clip is deleted and you return to the clip thumbnail screen In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the RESET RETURN button with the SHIFT button held down To delete all clips 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 SelectLock or Delete AII Clips and then select Delete All Clips A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete all clips 3 Select OK to execute the deletion or Cancel to cancel it and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Locked clips cannot be deleted Scene Selection Clip List Editing Scene Selection Clip List Editing What is scene selection Scene selection is a function which allows you to select material clips from the material recorded on a disc and perform cut editing You can do this by operating on this unit only Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut editing in the field and in other offline situations n scene selection you create a clip list editing data Since the material itself is not affected you can repeat this any number of times Youcan play back the edit list created by scene selection on this unit n scene selection you can add whole clips
140. DISP SEL EXPAND Chapter Thumbnail display chapter thumbnail screen HOLD CHAPTER Essence Mark Thumbnail display essence mark thumbnail screen SHIFT THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Add Sub Clip add sub clip SHIFT SET S SEL Delete Clip delete clip SHIFT RESET RETURN Lock Unlock Clip lock or unlock clip SHIFT STOP Set Inpoint set In point Left arrow SET S SEL Set Outpoint set Out point Right arrow SET S SEL Cue up Inpoint cue up In point Left arrow PREV or left arrow NEXT Cue up Outpoint cue up Out point Right arrow PREV or right arrow NEXT Reset Inpoint reset In point Left arrow RESET RETURN Reset Outpoint reset Out point Right arrow RESET RETURN Cue up cue up SET S SEL Cue up amp Play cue up and play PLAY PAUSE Page Down switch to next page SHIFT down arrow or F FWD Page Up switch to previous page SHIFT up arrow or F REV Go To End go to the last item SHIFT NEXT Go To Top go to the first item SHIFT PREV Select Multi Clip select multiple clips SHIFT right arrow or SHIFT left arrow Exit exit the current thumbnail screen THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK a If Settings gt SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to Cue up amp Play then play starts as soon as cueup is ready b If Settings gt SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is
141. EC and turn the MENU knob to display M INT OOSOREC FUNCTION TOP SLOW amp QUICK H ON FRAME RATE 30P gt CACHE INTVAL REC M i NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL DISC EXCHG CACHE CLIP CONT REC LIUE LOGGING As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows OFF CACHE gt A INT M INT When M INT appears the camcorder is in Manual Interval Rec mode and the TALLY green tally indicator in the viewfinder flashes Select NUMBER OF FRAME and turn the MENU knob to select the desired number of frames to be recorded in each shot As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows 1 3 gt 6 when SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC FORMAT is set to HD422 50 HD420 HQ or HD420 SP 2 6 gt 12 Bunoous y 13 deyo Select TRIGGER INTERVAL and turn the MENU knob to select the desired trigger mode or length of interval As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows M gt ISEC 2SEC lt gt 3SEC gt 4SEC lt gt 5SEC gt 6SEC gt 7SEC gt 8SEC gt 9SEC gt 10SEC gt I5SEC 20SEC gt 30SEC lt gt 40SEC gt 50SEC lt gt 1 MIN gt 2MIN lt gt 3MIN lt gt 4MIN gt 5MIN gt 6MIN gt TMIN 8MIN gt 9MIN gt 10MIN gt 15MIN 20MIN lt gt 30MIN gt 40MIN gt 50MIN gt 1H 2H gt 3H gt 4H 6H lt gt 12H lt gt 24H Here SEC means seconds 5SEC is 5 seconds
142. ENU knob The Add Sub Clip screen appears The clip s selected in step 1 appear in the upper part of this screen and the clip list appears in the lower Scene Selection window The I cursor in the Scene Selection window indicates the location where the currently selected sub clip s will be inserted Add Sub Clip 002 lt 017 035 TC 01 01 2825 TC 00 TC I TC 00 30 40 13 MIL TC00242428 TC00 243427 Scene Selection To display the total duration after addition of the selected clip Press the SHIFT button 4m the Scene Selection window move the I cursor to the location where you want to insert the clip The existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and right of the I cursor 9 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The selected clip is inserted as a subclip and a mark appears on the thumbnail in the Scene Selection window To check the addition results Move the cursor Press the RESET RETURN button This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen 7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips 8 Save the clip list see page 131 In step 1 you can hold down the SHIFT button when you press the SET S SEL button This is a shortcut that displays the Add Sub Clip screen immediately You can also save the clip list immediately in step 5 by executing the Save Clip List command in the Disc Menu Adding sub clips from the clip list thumbnail screen See page 114
143. ERIC 00001 to 99999 When the TITLE item is set to ENABL 32 FILE NAMING NAMING FORM C FREE For details see Assigning user AUTO NAMING C TITLE PLAN X defined names to clips and clip When the NAMING lists page 94 FORM item is set to FREE 33 MEMORY MEMORY REC DSABL ENABL For details see Recording proxy REC COPY CURRENT CLP EXEC data page 100 COPY ALL CLIPS EXEC ABORT COPY EXEC DEL ALL MEM CLP EXEC FORMAT MEMORY EXEC 34 GPS SETUP GPS OFF ON For details see Obtaining GPS TIME ZONE location information page 103 GPS DATUM Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 1e1deu 161 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nue 9 saldeyp 162 PAINT menu No Page Item Settings Description 01 SW STATUS GAMMA OFF ON Turns the gamma correction on or off BLACK GAMMA OFF ON Turns the black gamma correction on or off MATRIX OFF ON Turns the linear matrix correction and user set matrix correction functions on or off KNEE OFF ON Turns the knee correction on or off WHITE CLIP OFF ON Turns the white clipping correction on or off DETAIL OFF ON Turns the detail signal on or off APERTURE OFF ON Turns the aperture function on or off FLARE OFF ON Turns the flare function on or off TEST SAW OFF ON Selects the test signal 02 WHITE COLOR TEMP A Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of temperature WHITE A C TEMP
144. ETAIL 2 SD DETAIL SKIN DETAIL MTX LINEAR MTX MULTI V MODULATION SATURATION m NOISE SUPPRESS SCENE FILE D MAINTENANCE menu MAINTENANCE WHITE SHADING BLACK SHADING LEVEL ADJUST BATTERY 1 I BATTERY 2 AUDIO 1 PF AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 WRR SETTING TIMECODE ESSENCE MARK CAM CONFIG 1 CAM CONFIG 2 CAM CONFIG 3 PRESET WHITE DCC ADJUST AUTO IRIS 2 GENLOCK ND COMP AUTO SHADING APR NETWORK 1 NETWORK 2 WPS Wi Fi UP CONVERTER SHUTTER SELECT META OUT HEADSET SELECT SATURATION MODE E FILE menu FILE USER FILE USER FILE 2 ALL FILE SCENE FILE r REFERENCE USER GAMMA LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE 2 LENS FILE 3 USB MEMORY F DIAGNOSIS menu DIAGNOSIS T1 HOURS METER TIME DATE ROM VERSION 1 ROM VERSION 2 Fr ROM VERSION 3 DEV STATUS CA STATUS TOP menu and top level menus The TOP menu appears when with no menu displayed you hold down the MENU knob and set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The TOP menu contains only top level menus TOP MENU USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PRINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS When you select a top level menu the most recently shown page of that menu appears The CONTENTS page appears when the menu is selected for the first time For details
145. F position You can select the pages to be displayed on the menu For details see Displaying the status confirmation screens page 206 MENU ON OFF switch To use this switch open the cover This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to OFF ON Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen OFF Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen CANCEL PRST preset ESCAPE switch To enable this switch set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF CANCEL PRST Flicking this switch up to this position displays the message to confirm whether the previous settings are cancelled or settings are reset to their initial values depending on the menu operating condition Flicking this switch up to this position again cancels the previous settings or resets the settings to their initial values ESCAPE Use this switch when the menu page which has a hierarchical structure is opened Each time the switch is flicked to this position the page returns to one stage higher in the hierarchy Cover Right side near the rear H HE i SESS M Q Je deuD tae Efi EXPAND CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER TC U BIT Built in speaker The speaker can be used to monitor E E sound during recording and pla
146. GREE 1to6 Display only Displays the shutter opening angle assigned to only when number to 6 and the corresponding speed in SHUTTER SELECT second units as calculated on the basis of the is set to DEGREE selected frame rate This differs as follows depending on the setting of SYSTEM FREQUENCY 59 94i 29 97P 1 216 0 2 180 0 3 90 0 4 45 0 5 22 5 6 11 2 50i 25P 1 180 0 2 150 0 3 90 0 4 45 0 5 22 5 6 11 2 23 98P 1 180 0 2 172 8 3 144 0 4 45 0 5 22 5 6 11 2 Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 28 META OUT OUT META DATA ITEM OFF ON Sets whether to put recorded VANC packet information in DATA ITEM in MXF files when transferring files via FTP OFF Do not include VANC packet information ON Include VANC packet information 29 HEADSET INCOMMICSEL DYNMIC Sets the type of the INTERCOM microphone SELECT CARBON CA FB70 MANUAL CA TX70 INCOM MIC 60dB 40dB Sets the level of the INTERCOM microphone Camera LEVEL 20dB 60dB is selected when MIC SEL is set to Adaptors only DYNMIC or CARBON INCOM MIC GAIN 6dB 0dB 6dB Sets the gain of the INTERCOM microphone INCOM MIC POW OFF ON Turns the power supply for the INTERCOM microphone on off OFF is selected when MIC SEL is set to DYNMIC or CARBON INCOM MIC OFF ON Turns unbalanced input for the INTERCOM UNBAL microphone on off ON is selected when MIC SEL is set to CARBON INCOM SIDE 50 t
147. H indicate the length of interval and FRAME indicates the number of frames The camcorder exits Manual Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off However the NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL and PRE LIGHTING settings are maintained You do not need to set them again the next time you use Manual Interval Rec mode To shoot and record 1 After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording following the instructions in Basic Procedure for Shooting page 77 secure the camcorder so that it will not move 2 Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens Advanced Operations for Shooting The camcorder starts recording in Manual Interval Rec mode When you use the PRE LIGHTING function recording starts after the light is switched on While recording in Manual Interval Rec mode the TALLY green tally indicator in the viewfinder flashes 2 or 4 flashes second and the message MANU INTERVAL SEC FRAME flashes on the viewfinder screen To exit shooting Do one of the following n the single shot mode press the EJECT button In the consecutive mode press the REC START button or the lens VTR button to stop recording Set the POWER switch to OFF After the camcorder has exited from Manual Interval Rec mode it records picture data stored in memory to the disc To exit Manual Interval Rec mode Do one of the following Set the POWER switch to OFF Set t
148. However to choose from a prefix list you must create the list beforehand on a computer and Advanced Operations for Shooting Bunoous p je1deu 91 Bunooug y e1deuo 92 transfer it to the unit s internal memory using a USB flash drive Setting the initial value of the serial number The initial value of the serial number can be set to 00001 the default or to any other number The number is automatically incremented by 1 each time you record a clip When it reaches 99999 it returns to 00001 for the next clip Duplicate clip titles can be generated depending on the serial number setting for example if you reset the serial number to the original value after recording several clips Care should be taken when setting the serial number To assign user defined titles automatically when clips are recorded How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu O300CLIP TITLE TOP TITLE gt DSABL For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select TITLE and then press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to display ENABL and then press the MENU knob O300CLIP TITLE TOP TITLE ENABL SELECT PREFIX EXEC CLEAR NUMERIC EXEC LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC REFIX TITLE 00001 P NUMERIC Clip titles will be generated automatically if you record in this state The tit
149. ID is already set Use one of the following to change the user disc ID or delete it before starting the Dunoous y je1deu multibyte characters in the shaded part of the example in the next section Example of disc name specification Example of disc name specification xml versionz 1 0 encoding UTF 8 272 sp lt PlanningMetadata xmlns http xmlns sony net pro metadata planningmetadata passignId H00123 p creationDate 2009 09 10T08 00 00 05 00 sp lastUpdate 2009 09 10T13 43 52 05 00 p version 1 00 gt 4 Properties propertyId assignment sp class original update 2009 09 10T15 00 00 05 00 modifiedByz Chris e Title usAscii Football Game xml lang ja gt Football Game 10 09 2009 lt Title gt 4 Meta name MediaName content FootBall gt Properties 3 p PlanningMetadata In this example sp indicates a space and e indicates a newline Advanced Operations for Shooting 97 You can check user specified disc name strings in the Disc Properties screen see page 133 where they appear as the user disc ID When you create a planning metadata file enter the specification as a single statement with newlines at the indicated newline positions only and spaces at the indicated space positions only except for spaces in the disc name string To set essence mark names by using planning metadata You can use planning metadata to specify user defined names
150. IT lt CRLF gt PORT Specifies the IP address and port to which this unit should connect for the next file transfer for data transfer from this unit Syntax PORT SP lt h1 h2 h3 h4 p1 p2 gt lt CRLF gt h1 most significant byte to h4 least significant byte IP address p most significant byte p2 least significant byte Port address Input example PORT 10 0 0 1 242 48 IP address 10 0 0 1 Port number 62000 PASV This command requests this unit to Listen on a data port which is not its default data port It puts this unit into passive mode waiting for the remote computer to make a data connection Syntax PASV lt CRLF gt TYPE Specifies the type of data to be transferred Syntax TYPE lt SP gt lt type code options delimited by lt SP gt gt lt CRLF gt lt type code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM data is always transferred as T regardless of the type code specification A ASCII N Non print T Telnet format C ASA Carriage Control E EBCDIC N Non print T Telnet format C ASA Carriage Control J IMAGE Binary default L LOCAL BYTE SIZE byte size Input example TYPE I STRU Specifies the data structure Syntax STRU SP lt structure code gt lt CRLF gt lt structure code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM the structure is always F regardless of the structure code specification F File structure defaul
151. K page of the MAINTENANCE menu M11OESSENCE MARK RET SHOT MARK 1 RET SHOT MARK 2 INDEX PIC POS FIND MODE For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select the essence mark to be recorded and press the MENU knob to display ON 3 Repeat the step 2 as necessary To record shot mark 1 2 When the camcorder is in recording or playback mode operate the lens RET button as follows Shot mark 1 Press the RET button once Shot mark 2 Press the RET button twice in rapid succession Advanced Operations for Shooting ShotMark1 or ShotMark2 appears in the viewfinder screen for about one second near the timecode display If the SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 recording function has been assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1 3 4 5 switches you can also use that switch to record a SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 essence mark On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches see page 209 If you connect a Windows USB keyboard to the USB connector you can record shot marks from Shot MarkO up to Shot Mark9 by pressing the 0 to 9 keys on the numeric keypad Setting clip flags with switches You can set three types of clip flags OK NG KEEP during recording immediately after recording or during playback Setting these flags in each clip that you record makes it easy for editors and other colleagues to find and select the clips they need You can use switches on the unit to
152. L button or the MENU knob To display the chapter thumbnail screen of the previous or next clip with chapters With the chapter thumbnail screen still active press the PREV button or the NEXT button The unit searches in the reverse or forward direction for the next clip with chapters beginning with the previous or next clip Using essence marks to find scenes See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip playback screen or the clip thumbnail screen press the Thumbnail Operations SueeiJoS IND ui suonejedo g Jeydeuj 117 su 19 f15 ul suogejedo Gg Ja deuD 118 THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK button with the SHIFT button held down The Select Essence Mark screen appears The names of essence marks that are not recorded on the disc are displayed in gray Select Essence Mark Shot Markt Shot Mark2 Rec Start Cut If planning metadata with user defined essence mark has been loaded You can select user defined essence marks see page 136 Select Essence Mark N Select the essence mark that you want and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The essence mark thumbnail screen see page 110 displays a list of frames where the selected essence mark is set To switch directly to the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen Before starting set FIND MODE in the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu to R ST When the Rec Start essence mark thumb
153. MID Sets the gain value o corresponding to the M position of the GAIN selector 3 GAIN Sets the gain value g HIGH corresponding to the H position of the GAIN selector GAIN Sets the gain value g TURBO corresponding to TURBO GAIN z function o TURBO OFF After pressing the button SW IND assigned with the TURBO n D amp 2 a o 208 Adjustments and Settings from Menus Item Description SHOCK Turns shockless gain on or off LESS GAIN Turn the MENU knob to select the gain value and press MENU knob Any of 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 or 42 dB can be set for each of the L M H and TURBO positions in any sequence Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Selecting the output signals How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the OUTPUT 1 page Item Setting SDI OUT 1 Selects the signal output from SELECT the SDI OUTI connector OFF Do not output video HD SDI Output HD SDI SD SDI Output SD SDI SDIOUT2 Selects the signal output from SELECT the SDI OUT2 connector OFF Do not output video HD SDI Output HD SDI SD SDI Output SD SDI VF Output
154. Mix function The playback screen changes to black and white and a freeze image appears over the current shooting video To change the standard image Use the PLAY PAUSE button the F REV and F FWD buttons and other controls to find another image and repeat step 2 4 Align the framing of the playback image and the shooting video D Press the button to which you have assigned the Freeze Mix function once more The unit exits Freeze Mix mode B Start recording If you exchange discs before starting to record be careful to keep the unit from moving Using the Focus Assist function Displaying the focus assist indicator in the viewfinder makes it easier to focus This is convenient in situations where it may be difficult to focus using only the video in the viewfinder To display the focus assist indicator 1 Display the FOCUS ASSIST page in the OPERATION menu See Basic menu operations page 193 for more information about menu operations 2 Select FOCUS ASSIST IND and turn the MENU knob until ON appears The focus assist indicator appears 3 Set the following items as required FOCUS IND POS Select the focus assist indicator display position from BOTTM bottom LEFT TOP and RIGHT FOCUS AREA MARK Turn the display of the frame around the focus detection range OFF hide or ON display Focus detection range frame Focus assist indicator The focus assist indicator is not displayed
155. N Playback in single clip playback mode Playback stops when it reaches the start or end of the clip The next and preceding clips are not played even if they exist on the disc The available playback types include normal playback and high speed playback in the forward or reverse directions To move to another clip press the PREV NEXT F REV PREV or F FWD NEXT button or perform a thumbnail search Buljooys y 13 deyo Disc playback start position Although this unit uses optical discs it is designed to offer the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs One of these is the playback start position which works in the same way as with tape as described below After playback stop The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was pressed Press the PLAY PAUSE button to resume playback at the stop position After recording The unit stops at the position where recording ended To play back a clip press the PREV button to move to the start frame of any clip or press the F REV button to move to any position After disc insertion The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most recently ejected Press the PLAY PAUSE button to resume playback at the most recent position Basic Procedure for Shooting 79 Bunooug y Je deyo 80 The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is ejected which allows playback to start at that position whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM pl
156. N is one minute You cannot set a REC TIME that is more than one thirtieth of TAKE TOTAL TIME The setting value changes within the range that can be set For example When TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H the maximum value of REC TIME is 2 MIN 60 minutes divided by 30 gives 2 minutes Cc As required select PRE LIGHTING and turn the MENU knob to select the lighting on time before recording starts As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows OFF 2SEC gt 5SEC gt 10SEC Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording The light switch must also be set to ON With these settings the light turns on and off automatically However the light remains on continuously if the off time is 5 seconds or less When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON the light remains on continuously The light does not turn on and off automatically When the setting is completed the message AUTO INTERVAL M S appears along the bottom of the viewfinder screen M S indicates the shooting interval For example the message AUTO INTERVAL 00M04S indicates that the shooting interval is four seconds The camcorder exits Auto Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off However the TAKE TOTAL TIME REC TIME and PRE LIGHTING settings are maintained You do not need to set them again the next time you use Auto Interval Rec mode
157. NENEENENEEERN BEEBE WO TE nn ND nn Uu 5 E S A E 3 Turn the MENU knob to display the desired area of use Setting Area of use NTSCQU AREA NTSC area Japan 9 NTSC AREA NTSC area for areas other than Japan b PAL AREA PAL area 9 a The composite signal output from this unit is an NTSC signal with no black setup The system frequency is 59 94i b The composite signal output from this unit is an NTSC signal with a black setup 7 5 IRE The system frequency is 59 94i c The composite signal output from this unit is a PAL signal The system frequency is 50i 4 Change the SYSTEM LINE video resolution setting as required Setting Resolution horizontal x vertical 1080 1080 lines 1920 x 1080 720 720 lines 1280 x 720 5 Set the POWER switch to OFF then once again to ON The unit is now ready for use Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock You can set or change the date and time of the internal clock The date and time set are reflected in the timecode How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 DO20T IME DATE 2 ADJUST GPS ADJUST HOUR MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY 2 Press the MENU knob The TIME ADJUST setting window appears
158. NT EXT Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to an INT or an EXT source when the timecode is locked to an external source INT Internal lock EXT External lock LTC UBIT FIX TIME Sets the data to be recorded in U BIT of LTC FIX Records the data that is set by the user TIME Records the present time VITC UBIT SD FIX TIME Sets the data to be recorded in U BIT of VITC FIX Records the data that is set by the user TIME Records the present time WATCH AUTO OFF ON Matches the time of the internal clock with the ADJ time data of the user bits of an external timecode Turns the automatic time correction function of the internal clock on or off UBIT GROUP ID 000 101 Selects the U BIT GROUP ID VITC INS LINE 1 NTSC 12Hto Selects the line into which VITC is to be 16H to 19H inserted PAL 9H to 19H to 22H VITC INS LINE2 NTSC 12H to 18H to 19H PAL 9H to 21H to 22H Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejds q nuaw 9 13 dey9 177 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nue 9 Jaldeyp 178 No Page Item Settings Description 11 ESSENCE RET SHOT MARK OFF ON For details see Recording essence marks MARK 1 page 82 RET SHOT MARK OFF ON 2 INDEX PIC POS OSEC to IOSEC For details see Setting the thumbnail image in 1 sec steps at recording time page 83 FIND MODE R ST CLIP Specify the frame to be cued up when the PREV or NEXT button is pressed R ST The frame where a Rec Start essence mark is set
159. NU knob in step 6 select ESC at the top right of the screen and press the MENU knob The EDIT PAGE screen appears again To delete a page by using the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a page page 199 2 Press the MENU knob Then select the page that you want to delete 3 Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position The message DELETE PAGE OK appears 4 Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position again To delete a page by using the menu 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a page page 199 Menu Operations sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 199 sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 200 2 Press the MENU knob Then select the page that you want to delete and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears 3 Select DELETE and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again and the message DELETE OK YES NO appears at the upper right 4 Select YES and press the MENU knob To replace pages 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a page page 199 2 Press the MENU knob Then select the page that you want to move and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears 3 Select MOVE and press the MENU knob The previous screen appears again 4 Selectthe position to which you want to move the page and press the MENU knob The page selected in step 2 is moved to the position
160. OFF ON Turns black shading Saw and Parabola fo d PARA compensation on and off MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 Master black level adjustment 3 MASTER 6dB 3dB 0dB Temporarily adjusts the master gain value Oo GAIN TMP 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB B 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB a 03 LEVEL VBS VIDEO 99 to 99 Adjusts the composite signal video level g ADJUST LEVEL HD Y LEVEL 99 to 99 Adjusts the Y level of the HD component m signal 2 TEST OUT VBS Y R G B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT amp SELECT connector o 170 MenuList No Page Item Settings Description 04 BATTERY Info BEFOREEND 5 10 Used when a BP GL65 GL95 Battery Pack is 1596 9596 used Sets the remaining power 96 value of Note 100 the battery at which the BEFORE END For your safety warning should be issued andto ensure p END 0 1 2 3 Used when a BP GL65 GL95 Battery Pack is PEE 496 596 used Sets the remaining power 96 value of operation of the f camcorder the battery at which the END warning should Sony be issued recommends Sony BEFORE END 11 5V to 17 0V Used when a BP L60S L80S Battery Pack is the use of the in 0 1V steps used Sets the voltage level of the battery at following which the BEFORE END warning should be battery packs issued 9 e y Sony END 11 0V to 11 5V Used when a BP L60S L80S Battery Pack is in 0 1V steps used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be iss
161. OL BAL precisely if the adjustment by B WARM COOL B is not satisfactory Set the WHITE BAL switch to the channel A or B that you want to set If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B the adjusted value is not reflected in the video output even though you carry out the following operation Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob If you want to set the other channel go back to step 2 Selecting the lens file The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to change the lens file according to the lens in use How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the LENS FILE page of the USER menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 The LENS FILE page shows the name F ID of the currently selected lens file The lens name L ID and manufacturer L MF appear when a lens that supports serial communications is mounted Adjustments and Settings from Menus sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 1e1deu 217 sBumes pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 218 U17OLENS FILE 2LENS FILE SELECT F ID No Offset 2 Select LENS FILE SELECT and press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob Setting the UMID data What is a UMID The UMID Unique Material Identifier is a unique identifier for audio visual mat
162. OP SHUTTER SELECT X eDEGREE ADD DEL _ DEGREE SECOND 1 99 85 1 119 7 1 239 0 1 475 0 1 940 0 1 1880 Six shutter speeds appear A registered shuttle angle appears in the DEGREE field of each line A shutter speed exposure time in units of seconds appears in the SECOND field as calculated by converting from the selected frame rate Each time that you flick the SHUTTER selector to the SELECT side the setting or mode changes in the following order SLS mode and ECS mode appear only when they are enabled on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu Example of standard mode display shutter degrees setting SLS mode lt ECS mode To register user defined settings You can register up to six shutter angle settings If six settings are already registered you must delete one of the registered settings before registering a new one 1 Rotate the MENU knob to move the mark to the DEL position and then press the MENU knob The mark changes into a mark and the mark changes into a mark Also a mark appears before the number M27OSHUTTER SELECT TOP SHUTTER SELECT eDEGREE ADD SECOND 1 99 85 1 119 7 1 239 0 1 475 0 1 940 0 1 1880 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the number of the shuttle angle that you want to change and then press the MENU knob The selected setting is deleted The numbers of settings after the deleted setting are incremented t
163. OT ID ID 1 000 Bun o00000 oo00000 o00000 oo00000 2 Select one of ID 1 to ID 4 and press the MENU knob A Wi mark appears over the first character position in the string and characters can now be input 020O0SHOT ID e ID71 a OOOO0000o0 Oo000000 oo0000000 7 O k 012345678 lt gt ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOP BRSTUUUXYZ IX abcdefshiJk 1mnoprarstuuuxsSz INS DEL RET ESC END J Enter or change the shot ID When you are entering the whole shot ID go to Q Turn the MENU knob to move the Bii mark to the character which you want to change then press the MENU knob 0200SHOT ID H 7 amp k 012345678 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP GRSTUUUXYZIYlabcdefshi3k Imnoparstuvwxyz INS DEL RET 2 Turn the MENU knob until the Bl mark moves to the character position that you want to select then press the MENU knob Example character ESC END 0200SHOT ID eID 1 a ID 2 000000000000 ID 3 OOOOOoOo0000o0 ID 4 o00000000000 01234567 8 HS R KE 9 lt gt ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOP GRSTU UUXYZIYlabcdefshiJjk 1mnorarstuuuxsSz INS DEL RET ESC END 4 Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining characters D When the input is complete turn the MENU knob to move the W mark over END then press the MENU knob This ends the input and returns to the original SHOT ID pag
164. Page Item Settings Description 09 DETAIL 2 KNEE APERTURE OFF ON Turns the knee aperture function on or off KNEE APT LVL 99 to 99 Sets the knee aperture level DETAIL LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the both detail black and white limiters DTL WHTLMT 99 to 99 Sets the detail white limiter DTL BLK LMT 99 to 99 Sets the detail black limiter DTL V BLK LMT 99 to 99 Sets the V detail black limiter V DTL CREATION NAM G R G Y Selects the source signal of the V DTL signal H V CONTROL MODE H V V Selects the operation mode of DTL H V RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page H V H and V increase and decrease in inverse proportion V V DTL only enabled 10 SD DETAIL SD DETAIL OFF ON Turns the SD detail correction on or off SD DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the general level of the SD detail signal SD CRISPENING 99 to 99 Sets the SD crispening level SD DTL WHT LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the SD detail white limiter SD DTL BLK LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the SD detail black limiter SD LEVEL DEPEND OFF ON Turns the SD level depend function on or off SD LV DEPEND LVL 99 to 99 Sets the level of the SD level depend SD DTL FREQUENCY 99 to 99 Sets the frequency of the SDH detail signal SD DTL H V RATIO 99 to 99 Sets the level of the SD V detail signal SD CROSS COLOR 99 to 99 Sets the SD cross color reduction When NTSC AREA level or NTSC AREA is selected on the FORMAT page Menu List
165. R MIC REF setting on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu factory default setting is 60 dB For details see page 173 XLR connection automatic detection function With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CHI or CH2 connector the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu with the REAR XLR AUTO item If the input level on this unit is not at an appropriate setting for the microphone sensitivity loud sounds may be distorted and the signal to noise ratio may be affected In order for the AUDIO IN CHI and CH2 connectors on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power supply female XLR connectors 3 pin are fitted If the microphone cable has a female connector use an adaptor When you detach a CAC 12 Microphone Holder once you have attached to the camcorder be careful not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC 12 in step 1 After detaching the CAC 12 be sure to put the two screws back into their original places Attaching a UHF portable tuner for a UHF wireless microphone system To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system fit one of the following UHF portable tuners DWR S02D Digital Wireless Receiver WRR 855S UHF Synthes
166. REA e When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA and the Disc Menu item Settings gt Select Font is set to Korean Simplified Chinese or Traditional Chinese The keyboard icon on the software keyboard is highlighted when a USB keyboard has been recognized and enabled for use with this unit and the mouse icon is highlighted and a mouse pointer appears when a USB mouse has been enabled SetTitle of Clip 001 041 ER B Ac m x 45 rt Cwsok a d f os ZX cV ECC i Use the proper keyboard for the area of use Some characters may not be entered correctly if you use a keyboard designed for use in another area It is not possible to enter Japanese even on a Japanese keyboard USB keyboard special functions keys In addition to the special function keys of the software keyboard you can use the following special function keys on a USB keyboard Key Function tl When the cursor is in an edit box Move the cursor to the start or end When OK or Cancel has the focus Moves the focus between OK and Cancel Delete Deletes the character after the cursor Shift 4 Selects the string before or after the Shift cursor Ctrl C Ctrl C Copies the selected string X A Z Ctrl X Cuts the selected string Ctrl V Pastes a copied or cut string Ctrl A Selects the entire string Ctrl Z Undoes the immediately preceding operation When the cursor is
167. RGAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the R gamma correction curve GGAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the G gamma correction curve B GAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the B gamma correction curve TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector GAMMA TABLE STD HG USER Selects the gamma type STD Standard gamma HG Hyper gamma USER User gamma GAM TABLE STD 1to5to6 Selects the standard gamma type 1 Corresponds to SD camcorder 2 x 4 5 gain 3 x 3 5 gain 4 Corresponds to SMPTE 240M 5 Corresponds to ITU R709 6 x 5 0 gain GAM TABLE HG 1to4 Selects the hyper gamma type 1 Compress 325 video input tol100 video output 2 Compress 460 video input tol100 video output 3 Compress 325 video input to10946 video output 4 Compress 460 video input to10946 video output GAM TABLE USER 1to5 Selects the user gamma type Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 163 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nua 9 saldeyp 164 No Page Item Settings Description 05 BLACK BLACK GAMMA OFF ON Turns the black gamma GAMMA correction on or off BLACK GAM RANGE LOW L MID H MID Sets the range affected by black HIGH gamma BLACK GAM LEVEL 99 to 99 Adjusts the master black gamma TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector 06 KNEE 1 KNEE OFF ON Turns the knee correction circuit on or off KNEE POINT M 50 0 to 95 0 to Sets t
168. SONY PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER PDW 850 XDCAM PowerH DFX 2 OPERATION MANUAL 1st Edition 2 Table of Contents Before Using the Unit ssscssssssscsssscsscssssscssscssssssssssssessssscssssessesesseseses 8 Chapter 1 Overview yc 9 11 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Powet supply ente et et GR EAS Qe IRE HT de eres 11 Accessory attachments i denierin pense iaei ereenn inin iinan 12 Operating and connectors section eseseeeeeeereeeene 13 HDVF 20A viewfinder optional eese 26 Status display on the viewfinder screen sss 27 Chapter 2 Preparations Preparing a Power Supply eere eee eee ee eene teta enata tns tn enata ea en eus 33 Using battery pack oun ER 33 Using AG power zn Re Eee en E CR eres 34 Attaching the Viewfinder eere eee esee esee entes tn tata ena ens tn enano 34 Attaching the HDVF 20A 200 C35W C30WR e 34 Adjusting the viewfinder position ESSI Moving the viewfinder shoe up Wado Using the BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket 36 Detaching the eyepiece sse 37 Adjusting the viewfinder focus and screen sss 37 Setting the Area of Use eee eee eee esee tees tn enses stata tasas en iiio 38 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock
169. STORE EXEC Stores the scene file in the memory of the camcorder or the USB flash drive FID Blank up to 16 characters Sets the File ID Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nu w 9 JajdeyD 169 MAINTENANCE menu No Page Item Settings Description 01 WHITE WHT SHAD CH R G B TEST Selects the channel adjusted by this menu If SHADING SEL TEST is selected the setting is linked to the setting of TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT VBS Y R G B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT SELECT connector R G B WHT H 99 to 99 H Saw white shading compensation SAW R G B WHT H 99 to 99 H Parabola white shading compensation PARA R G B WHT V 99 to 99 V Saw white shading compensation SAW R G B WHT V 99 to 99 V Parabola white shading compensation PARA WHITE SAW OFF ON Turns white shading Saw and Parabola PARA compensation on and off 02 BLACK BLK SHAD CH R G B TEST Selects the channel adjusted by this menu If SHADING SEL TEST is selected the setting is the same as the setting of TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT VBS Y R G B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT SELECT connector R G B BLK H SAW 99 to 99 H Saw black shading compensation R G B BLK H 99 to 99 H Parabola black shading compensation PARA R G B BLK V SAW 99 to 99 V Saw black shading compensation R G B BLK V 99 to 99 V Parabola black shading compensation 9 PARA m g BLACK SAW
170. TERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE About OpenSSL OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions xipueddy are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright potice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright potice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact Oopenssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL
171. UDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors the device may be damaged al 48V OFF switches Select either of the following positions for the microphones to be connected 48V For a microphone to use an external power supply OFF For a microphone to use an internal power supply REMOTE connector 8 pin Connect an RM B170 B750 remote control unit which makes it possible to control the camcorder remotely Before connecting disconnecting the Remote Control Unit to from the camcorder be sure to turn off the camcorder POWER switch Fl SDI OUT 1 connector BNC type Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal with embedded audio To switch between HDSDI and SDSDI signal output use the SDI OUT 1 SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu M Q 491deuo E SDI OUT 2 connector BNC type Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal with embedded audio To switch between HDSDI SDSDI and VF signal output use the SDI OUT 2 SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu Setting menus timecode or shot data can be superimposed on the camera output video depending on the menu settings and you can view them on the monitor screen AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 audio channel 1 and channel 2 input connectors XLR type 3 pin female These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone When the LINE AES EBU MIC selector is set to AES EBU the CH1 connector is used for channel 1 and
172. UTPUT 1 page is set to ON turn the output of text superimposed information from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector on or off for each item SUPER MARKER OFF ON Turns the marker display on or off in the output from the following connectors SDI OUT 2 connector when SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to HDSDI SDSDI and SDI OUT 2 SUPER is set to ON TEST OUT connector when TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON SUPER ZEBRA OFF ON Turns the output zebra display from the following connectors on or off SDI OUT 2 connector when SDI OUT 2 SELECT is set to HDSDI or SDSDI and SDI OUT 2 SUPER is set to ON on the OUTPUT 1 page TEST OUT connector when TEST OUT SUPER is set to ON on the OUTPUT 1 page 04 LCD LCD COLOR 99 to 99 Adjusts the LCD color LCD OFF ON MARKER amp ZEBRA Turns the marker and zebra display in the LCD monitor on or off Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 05 REC FUNCTION SLOW amp QUICK OFF ON FRAME RATE 1080 23 98P 1 to 48 1080 25P 1 to 50 1080 29 97P 1 to 60 For details see Shooting with Slow amp Quick Motion page 88 CACHE INTVAL REC OFF CACHE A INT M INT CACHE REC TIME 0 2S 2 4S 4 6S 6 8S 8 10S 18 20S 28 30S TAKE TOTAL TIME 5MIN 10MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 40MIN 50MIN 1H 2H 3H AH SH 7H 10H 15H 20H 30H 40H 50H 70H 100H REC TIME
173. WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT OR MADE BY THIRD PARTIES SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS REPAIR OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA RECORDED ON THE INTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEM RECORDING MEDIA EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF ANY SERVICES RELATED TO THIS UNIT THAT MAY RESULT DUE TO CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY KIND Specifications Chart of Optional Components and Accessories LCD monitor ECM 680S 678 BVM L230 LMD series monitor 673 Microphone xipueddy xs CAC 12 Microphone Holder XDCAM HD series recorder PDW HD1500 C35W C30WR Viewfinder HDCAM series recorder HDW 2000 series recorder HDW S280 WRR 855S UHF Synthesize
174. You can display the names of user defined Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark9 essence marks in planning metadata UTF 8 format maximum 32 bytes 1 Display the Planning Metadata Properties screen see page 134 for the planning metadata loaded into this unit The gt button is enabled when the planning metadata contains user defined essence marks see page 96 Disc Operations 2 Press gt and then turn the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The User Defined Essence Marks screen appears User Defined Essence Marks Formatting discs See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Format Disc and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A message appears asking you to confirm the format Format Disc All Clips Clip Lists and Non AV Data General Files will be Deleted Format OK Cancel 3 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To cancel the format Select Cancel and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To continue by formatting another disc Exchange the disc select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To exit the formatting screen Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob with Exit selected To disable the Format Disc command To prevent inadvertent disc formatting resulting in the loss of recorded data you can disable the Format Disc command See page 114 for more informati
175. _ShotMark2 peontent Shoot gt 4 Meta name _ShotMark3 peontent Corner Kick gt 4 Meta name _ShotMark4 pceontent Free Kick gt 4 lt Meta name _ShotMark5 peontent Goal Kick gt Meta name _ShotMark6 pContent Foul gt 4 Meta name _ShotMark7 pcontent PK gt lt Meta name _ShotMark8 pcontent Ist Half 2e Meta name _ShotMark9 content 2nd Half gt Meta name _ShotMark0 peontent Kick Off 2e Properties 3 PlanningMetadata 4 In the above example sp indicates a carriage return You can check user defined essence mark name strings in the User Defined Essence Marks screen see page 136 When you create a definition file enter each statement as asingle line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line and do not enter spaces except where specified except within essence mark name strings indicates a space and 4 Recording video from external devices You can select between recording of data shot by the camera and recording of data input from an external device by using a menu or by using the ASSIGN 2 switch If you want to use the ASSIGN 2 switch you must assign the video switching function to the ASSIGN 2 switch beforehand see page 209 Switching by the ASSIGN 2 switch takes priority over switching by the menu Switching by menu is not possible if the function has been assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch Video breakup
176. a Also display file names that begin with e I Display information other than file name gives the same result as the LIST command F Append to directory names The following data is transferred depending on whether path name specifies a directory or file Directory specified A list of the file names only in the specified directory No specification A list of the file names only in the current directory The wildcard characters any string and any character may be used in lt path name gt Input example 1 NLST I Input example 2 NLST Clip MXF RETR Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on this unit to the current directory on the remote computer Syntax RETR SP path name lt CRLF gt Input example RETR Clip C0001 MXF FTP File Operations STOR Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on the remote computer to the current directory on this unit Depending on the type of file transferred the following items are created C MXF file 9 C MOI XML file metadata C MO2 KLV file user metadata C S01 MXF file proxy AV data UMID the UMID of the copy source file is not saved However it is saved if an immediately preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been issued E EOLSMI file 2 9 E MOI XML file metadata 1 0001 to 9999 2 0001 to 0099 3 The unit can handle files with user defined names
177. about how to use menus see page 193 USER menu This menu allows you to add any desired page from the OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE and DIAGNOSIS menus to suit your needs By gathering frequently used pages on the USER menu beforehand you can call up them quickly whenever you need them This menu is normally displayed when the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON Menu Organization sBunes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 149 sBumes pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 150 USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from the USER menu to suit your needs ALL menu This menu allows you to handle all items in the OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE and DIAGNOSIS menus as if they were in one menu OPERATION menu This menu contains items for changing settings according to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is being operated PAINT menu This menu contains items for making detailed image adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the camera Support of a video engineer is usually required to use this menu Although you can also use an external remote control unit to set the items on this menu this menu is effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors MAINTENANCE menu This menu contains items for making settings for audio timecode essence marks and battery FILE menu This menu is for savi
178. ack video images using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor The indicator lights during playback Press this button again during playback to pause outputting a still image At this time the indicator flashes To play back at approximately four times normal playback speed press the F REV button or F FWD button during playback At this time the PLAY indicator and F REV or F FWD indicator light F FWD fast forward button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the forward direction The indicator lights during high speed playback in the forward direction Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls PREV button This jumps to the first frame of the current clip During the jump the F REV indicator flashes If you press this together with the F REV button the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded clip on the disc STOP button Press this button to stop disc playback NEXT button This jumps to the first frame of the next clip During the jump the F FWD indicator flashes If you press this together with the F FWD button the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded clip on the disc DISP SEL display selection EXPAND expand function button With each press of this button the display in the LCD monitor changes as follows Display indication Meaning Video with The LCD monitor displays superimposed the same text information information CHAR as the viewfinder Video wi
179. ails on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 To load the scene file stored in the camcorder select the desired file number and press the MENU knob O on the left of the file number changes to Wi The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file FO40SCENE FILE SCENE 25 When DISP SCENE FILE on the VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu is set to ON the number of the currently loaded scene file is displayed on the viewfinder screen see page 31 To cancel the selected scene file Turn the MENU knob to move to Bl and press the MENU knob again Bl changes to O The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting this scene file To load a scene file saved on a USB flash drive Select SCENE RECALL and press the MENU knob The SCENE RECALL page appears 2 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears then press the MENU knob Select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message RECALL OK YES NO appears 3 To carry out the recall select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO When the loading is completed the message COMPLETE appears The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file If no file is present with a particular file number this is shown as NO FILE To load scene files from a USB flash drive into the camcorder memory Y
180. al input status and aberration correction function EXT HDSDI SDSDI VBS When the REC VIDEO SOURCE item on the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION menu has been set to EXT then EXT and the signal type HDSDI SDSDI or VBS flashes when a valid signal is input to this unit For details see Recording video from external devices page 98 ALAC Appears when ALAC in the CAM CONFIG 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to AUTO see page 181 D Electric color temperature filter Scene file number The electric color temperature filter display appears when the CC 5600K function is set to ON When DISP SCENE FILE on the VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu is set to ON the number of the currently loaded scene file S1 to S5 appears instead of the filter display Filter Indicates the currently selected filter type see page 14 The optical CC filter position A B C or D appears to the right side of the ND filter display 1 to 4 g White balance memory Indicates the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory A Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A B Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B P Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST or when the preset button on an RM B170 has been pushed T Displayed when ATW is being used Timecode Indicates the elapsed recording playback time timecode user bits or other information selected
181. amera is created on supported devices PROAV DISPLAY DSABL ENABL Specifies whether to display the PROAV directory when this unit is accessed via an FTP connection DSABL Do not display ENABL Display MIXED RECORDING DSABL ENABL For details see Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc page 54 SINGLE CLIP MODE OFF ON For details see Clip playback modes page 79 PB POSITION KEEP TOP When you switch between the clip playback screen and the clip list playback screen specifies the clip or sub clip playback start position KEEP Play from the position where playback stopped TOP Play from the first frame of the first clip or sub clip Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuey 9 JajdeyD 179 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nue 9 Jaldeyp 180 No Page Item Settings Description 13 CAM CONFIG 2 TEST SAW SAW REC SELECT Selects the test signal COLOR BAR ARIB 100 SELECT 75 SMPTE Selects the HD color bar type USER amp ALL OFF ON ONLY Show only USER menu in the top menu RM COMMON OFF ON MEMORY Selects whether or not to share settings for when a remote control unit is connected and when the unit is used alone RM REC START RM CAM PARA When an RM remote control unit is connected selects which recording start stop buttons are enabled RM remote control unit CAM camcorder PAR
182. an return all settings in the USER menu to standard settings How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob Setti ng th e Status For details on menu operations see Basic H menu operations page 193 Display on the ME v Viewfinder Screen and USER FILE SAUE EXEC the LCD Monitor F ID QOQOOO00000000000 a el UENEC This section explains the menu settings for the display of the viewfinder screen These settings are also used for the display of the LCD monitor in the same way Press the MENU knob then select knob The message PRESET OK YES NO To select the items to be displayed on the appears viewfinder screen with the viewfinder FOTOUSER FILE TOP DISPLAY of the DISPLAY ASPECT switch set PRESET Ok YES gt NO to on and the LCD monitor use the USER FILE LOAD EXEC VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 and VF DISP 3 pages of USER FILE SAVE EXEC the OPERATION menu F ID Oooooooo0o00000000 How to select an item in the menu screen Turn 2USER PRESET D EXEC the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 or VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION Select YES and press the MENU knob menu and press the MENU knob The message COMPLETE appears and For details on menu operations see Basic the settings for all items in the USER menu menu operations page 193 are rese
183. and MIN means minutes 1 MIN is one minute M The single shot mode recording only one shot after one operation In the viewfinder the TALLY green tally indicator flashes twice per second A setting value other than M The consecutive mode recording shots repeatedly after one operation In the Advanced Operations for Shooting 87 Bunooys y je1deuo 88 viewfinder the TALLY green tally indicator flashes four times per second 5 Whena setting value other than M the consecutive mode is selected in step 4 select PRE LIGHTING and turn the MENU knob to select the lighting on time before recording starts as required As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows OFF 2SEC gt SSEC gt 10SEC Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording The light switch must also be set to ON With these settings the light turns on and off automatically However the light remains on continuously if the off time is 5 seconds or less When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON the light remains on continuously The light does not turn on and off automatically When the setting is completed the following message appears along the bottom of the viewfinder screen In single shot mode MANU INTERVAL FRAME In consecutive mode INTERVAL SEC MIN H FRAME SEC MIN and
184. and a blank line is inserted above the specified item You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items have already been registered To add delete replace pages You can add a new page to the USER menu delete a page from the USER menu or replace pages using the EDIT PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu To add a page How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the TOP menu see page 193 2 Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 If the CONTENTS page is displayed press the MENU knob Then select EDIT PAGE and press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the EDIT PAGE screen appears onoi O mT jes MON ACC 4 CDI VOO AMNNZC TMNOMOCCC D a A E Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 0 1 OXDONOXMSQN O 4 Press the MENU knob Then select the position where you want to add the page and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears D Select INSERT and press the MENU knob The CONTENTS page appears Select the desired page and press the MENU knob The number and name of the page selected in step 6 is added above the item selected in step 4 To cancel adding a page Before pressing the ME
185. and the current recording format of this unit does not match the recording format of the inserted disc To carry out recording operations exchange the disc or change the recording format of this unit or enable mixed format recording mode System FREQ This appears when the current Mixed REC Index File File System ILL PLAY Lid Closed Lid Open No Clip No Disc STOP ONCE REC mode Loading Unloading Disc Top Disc End Clip Top Clip End system frequency of this unit does not match the system frequency of clips recorded on the inserted disc To carry out recording operations exchange the disc or change the system frequency of this unit This appears when mixed format recording mode is disabled and the current recording format of this unit does not match the recording format of the inserted disc To carry out recording operations exchange the disc or change the recording format of this unit or enable mixed format recording mode There is an unsupported index file on the disc to which you are trying to record Exchange or format the disc There is an unsupported file system on the disc to which you are trying to record Exchange or format the disc An A V phase error occurred during playback Stop the disc The lid of the disc compartment does not open Check the lid The lid of the disc compartment is not closed Close it securely There ar
186. anges to the clip playback screen and playback starts Operations on filtering results You can use the Thumbnail Menu in the filter thumbnail screen to perform the following operations Function Select the information to be displayed at the bottom of the thumbnails Item name Clip Information Lock or Delete All Lock all of the filtered Filtered Clips gt Lock clips All Filtered Clips Lock or Delete All Unlock all of the filtered Filtered Clips clips gt Unlock All Filtered Clips Lock or Delete All Delete all of the filtered Filtered Clips gt Delete clips All Filtered Clips Filter Narrow down the filtering Clips Narrowing results Copy to Clip List Copy all of the filtered clips to a new clip list Upload Clips via Transfer all of the filtered Direct FTP clips to an external device via a network To display clip filtering conditions as Title2 titles For clip lists created with the Copy to Clip List command you can display the clip filtering conditions as Title2 titles When Settings gt Display Title in the Disc Menu is set to On Title2 title2 the clip filtering conditions are displayed automatically in screens such as the Load Clip List screen Thumbnail Operations Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails You can select the information to be displayed at the bottom of the thumbnails in thumbnail screens See page 114 for more information about thu
187. annels 3 and 4 can now be adjusted with the MIC LEVEL control To set to a fixed value In step 2 of the previous procedure To adjust manually set the menu items to FIX Setting Time Data Setting the timecode The timecode setting range is from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 29 hours minutes seconds frames RESET RETURN DISPSEL HOLD refer Dis Lav BRIGHT button 1 Press DISP SEL to set the LCD screen to the status display 2 Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET 3 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit of timecode flashes 4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit Repeat until all digits are set To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET RETURN button D Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN or R RUN F RUN Free run The timecode generator keeps running R RUN Recording run The timecode generator runs only while recording To set the drop frame mode non drop frame mode You can select the drop frame DF mode or non drop frame NDF mode on the TIMECODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu To make the timecode consecutive When the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set to R RUN recording a number of scenes on the disc normally produces consecutive timecode However once you remove the disc and record on another disc the t
188. are connected to the unit via FTP you can create new clips with timecode that is continuous with the timecode of the last frame of the last clip on the disc To record continuous timecode set PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to REGEN and then proceed as follows Use the STOR command to transfer clip files from the computer that is connected to this unit If you issue the SITE UMMD command immediately before the STOR command the original timecode of the transferred file is recorded regardless of the setting of PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch Recording Continuous Timecode via FTP Connection suonejedo e g 1e1deu 239 aoueuajuley 6 Ja deyD 240 chapter Testing the Camcorder before Shooting Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for a shooting session preferably by operating the camcorder together with a color video monitor Preparations for testing Attach a fully charged battery pack 2 Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the BATT indicator shows at least five segments If the BATT indicator does not show at least five segments replace the battery pack with a fully charged one 3 Check that there are no obstructions near the disc compartment and then press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid Testing the Camcorder before Shooting 4 After confirming that the disc is not write protected load the disc and close the disc compartment lid Testing the ca
189. art of a C MXF file name is changed a C MOI XML file or a C M02 KLV file with the same name in the C part is also changed automatically h When a C MXF file is created a C MOI XML file with the same name in the C part is created automatically i When a C MXF file is deleted the C M01 XML file or a C M02 KLV file with the same name in the C part is also deleted automatically Overview Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory Component directory Filename Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write P MXF Audio clip files MXF files Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 yes D generated when you execute voice over editing on the PDW HR1 0001 to 0099 Other files Files other than the above No No a The P part can be handled like a file with a user defined name b Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length and which can be written by XDCAM c Overwriting is not possible d Multiple files cannot be opened at the same time Edit directory e Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE f Selection and deletion of any specified clip is possible Directories cannot be created in the Component directory File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Clip list file 0001 to 0099 E E01 SMI 9 Yes Ye
190. attern disappears MOMENT A zebra pattern appears and stays for about five seconds DISPLAY ASPECT switch Turns the marker indication on and off and switches between 4 3 and 16 9 aspect ratios for viewfinder screen display DISPLAY When the marker indication is enabled with the camcorder the marker indication on the viewfinder screen turns on and off every time you push the switch up to this position ASPECT Each push of the switch down to this position toggles the mask display on and off Make mask display settings on the MARKER 1 page of the OPERATION menu see page 155 Viewfinder cable Microphone holder Status display on the viewfinder screen Indicators The following indicators are arranged above and below the viewfinder screen to show the current state and adjustments of the camcorder TALLY REC oh L 1 mA p l 1L TALLY green tally indicator Lights when the camcorder is the following states Picture Cache mode enabled Disc Exchange Cache mode enabled Recording with HDSDI REMOTE I F on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set to G TLY Flashes when the camcorder is the following states Set to Auto Interval Rec mode or the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode 1 flash per second Recording in Auto Interval Rec mode or recording in the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode 4 flashes per second Set to the single s
191. aximum of 16 frames can be accumulated using the slow shutter function In low light levels this allows clear and noiseless video to be shot and provides a fantasy video effect with ghost images Time lapse function interval recording Using this function slow moving subjects can be shot with the movement compressed in time This is convenient for many applications such as monitoring plant growth or the progress of a construction site Slow amp quick motion function This function allows the shooting frame rate to be different from the playback frame rate for the same effect as overcranking or undercranking a film camera Unlike low speed or high speed playback of normally shot video this provides a smooth slow motion effect or action speeded up beyond actual speed Due to be supported from package version 2 30 1 This function is available when the recording format is MPEG HD422 50 Mbps and the resolution system frequency is 1080 23 98P 1080 25P or 1080 29 97P Freeze Mix function This allows a still image from previously captured video to be aligned with the current video output from the camera Thus you can adjust the camera position to get exactly the same framing for new shots For example this function makes it easy to frame summer and winter shots of a landscape scene in exactly the same way Digital extender function This magnifies the center section of the video It utilizes electronic processing which pre
192. ayer The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the disc is write protected Deteriorating playback conditions Deteriorating playback may be due to the following causes Scratches and dust on the disc surface This includes fingerprints dust from the air tar from cigarette smoke and so on Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are not a problem because they are registered in advance as defects and recording avoids them However scratches and soiling which occur after recording can lead to deteriorating playback conditions Aging of disc recording layers Over several decades the recording layers of optical discs can age and cause deteriorating playback conditions Deteriorating laser diodes performance The performance of the laser diodes used in optical heads can worsen with age leading to deteriorating playback conditions Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate guide to when it is time to replace optical heads To prevent playback conditions from deteriorating Pay attention to the following points when handling discs Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with your hands Do not store for long periods in locations which are dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or in locations exposed to direct sunlight If playback conditions have deteriorated Read errors occur when playback conditions con
193. be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Trademarks and Licenses xipueddy 271 xipueddy 272 About GPS What is GPS GPS Global Positioning System is a system for determining your exact location any where on the planet using a constellation of high precision satellites launched by the U S A The system is composed of a minimum of 24 GPS satellites four each in six orbits at an altitude of approximately 20 000 km 12 400 miles Signals are received from GPS satellites and are used to calculate your location based on satellite orbital information almanac data and the signal propagation time data Calculating your location is called positioning If signals are received from three or more satellites the latitude and longitude of a location can be determined The positions of the GPS satellites is constantly changing hence the time required for positioning may vary or positioning may not be possible depending on the location and time of use GPS is a positioning system that receives signals from satellites GPS should be used in locations with a clear view of the sky to prevent obstruction or reflection of the GPS signals by nearby buildings trees and other tall structures Positioning information may not be recorded in the following locations and conditions where signals from GPS satellites cannot be receiv
194. camera at the subject and adjust the focus and zoom You can adjust the focus by using the Focus Assist function see page 81 4 it necessary set the electronic shutter for an appropriate mode and speed For details see Setting the Electronic Shutter page 60 D To start recording press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens If the recording start stop function is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1 3 4 5 switches or RET button on the lens you can also use this switch On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches see page 209 Basic Procedure for Shooting During recording the REC indicator lights in the viewfinder Perform zooming and focus control if necessary During recording while the ACCESS indicator is lit do not remove the battery pack If you do the internal processing for recording may not finish properly which may cause the last few seconds of recording to be lost For details see Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage function page 75 To stop recording press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens again The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off The material recorded from step 5 to step 6 is saved as a single clip To check the last two seconds of the recording recording review If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is paused the last two seconds of the recording is played back If you hold down t
195. can control the camcorder remotely using the Wi Fi remote control You can start stop recording and adjust the iris zoom and other settings using the remote control This function is useful when the camcorder is mounted in a remote location such as on a crane Some serial lenses cannot be controlled using the Wi Fi remote control When a lens that cannot be operated using the Wi Fi remote control is attached the iris and zoom settings are displayed as 0 on the Wi Fi remote control even when you try to adjust the values from the Wi Fi remote control When a lens that can be controlled using the Wi Fi remote control is attached to the camcorder the zoom cannot be adjusted if the zoom servo function is disabled on the lens When a remote control device is connected to the REMOTE connector of the camcorder and the white balance memory on the camcorder is set to other than A memory A turning the Wi Fi remote control on off may change the color When a remote control device is connected to the REMOTE connector of the camcorder that device has Adjustments and Settings from Menus priority and the camcorder cannot be controlled using the Wi Fi remote control To display the Wi Fi remote control on the camcorder 1 Set Wi Fi to ENABL on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu 2 Set Wi Fi ETHER RM to RM on the CAM CONFIG 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu To configure the remote device Configure
196. ces without this mark eo Professional Disc Notes on handling Handling The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge and is designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or fingerprints However if the cartridge is subjected to a severe shock for example by dropping it this can result in damage or scratching of the disc If the disc is scratched it may be impossible to record video audio or to play back the content recorded on the disc The discs should be handled and stored carefully Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the cartridge Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage Do not disassemble the cartridge The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for indexing discs Apply the label in the correct position Storage Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct sunlight or in other places where the temperature or humidity is high Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain ingress Store cartridges in their cases Care of the discs Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using a soft dry cloth If condensation forms allow ample time to dry before use Write protecting discs Dunoous y je1deu To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental erasure move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of the disc in the direction of the arrow as shown in the following figure Lower surface of the di
197. ches Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio channels 1 and 2 AUTO Automatic adjustment MANUAL Manual adjustment AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 audio channel 1 2 3 4 input selection switches AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 FRONT Audio input signals from the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector REAR Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors WIRELESS Audio input signals from the UHF portable tuner not supplied if it is installed AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 F FRONT Audio input signals from a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector R REAR Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors W WIRELESS Audio input signals from the UHF portable tuner not supplied if it is installed Left side and upper section M Q 491deuo ASSIGNABLE 3 4 switches You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu For details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches page 209 Lid of the disc compartment This opens when the EJECT button on the top pa
198. connected to the network f the remote host is an XDCAM device make sure that it is not displaying a GUI screen f the remote host is an XDCAM device make sure that a disc is inserted Transferring clips Direct FTP function su 199 MD ul suogeiado G 1e1deu 143 SueeJog MH ui suonejedo s sajdeyo 144 When the connection is complete the indicators of all items have turned green the Upload Clips via Direct FTP screen appears To check the connection on the remote host side If the remote host is an XDCAM device check that the NETWORK has appeared in the display or other status display location Upload Clips via Direct FTP Upload to PDW HD150 Current Clip 2 e Em Immediate After this clip The progress bars show the progress of the transfer If multiple clips are being transferred a count of the clips that have been successfully transferred appears If the remote host is an XDCAM device the disc usage also appears It does not appear if the remote host is a computer If a file of the same name already exists at the transfer destination The file name is changed so that it does not conflict with the file at the destination The name of the file on the transfer source this unit appears in the Original field and the name of the file on the transfer destination appears in the Copy field 1 1 If the clip name is a standard name it is changed to the unused clip
199. d aoo PDW HD1500 2 Set up the two units as follows Transferring clips Direct FTP function su 199 f15 u suogeiado g 19 dey9 145 SU9BINS ND ul suoneiedO g Ja deuD 146 Settings on this unit Item Setting POWER SAVE ETHERNET ENABLE page of USB OPERATION menu NETWORK DHCP ENABLE SETTING page of UPnP ENABLE MAINTENANCE menu Settings on the PDW HD1500 Item Setting Item M50 in the ENABLE MAINTENANCE menu DHCP Item M59 in the ENABLE MAINTENANCE menu UPnP Power both units off and on again and wait for about three minutes Check that the IP addresses of the two units have been set as follows by the Auto IP function IP address of this unit Item Setting NETWORK IP 169 254 XXX SETTING pageof ADDRESS XXX MAINTENANCE X any menu number IP address of the PDW HD1500 Item Setting Item M51 in the 169 254 XXX XXX MAINTENANCE X any number menu IP ADDRESS PRESET In the clip list thumbnail screen of this unit select the clip to copy upload Display the Thumbnail Menu Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob With selected the Select Transfer Type screen of the Upload Clips via Direct FTP command appears Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Transferring clips Direct FTP function The Select Remote Host screen appears Select Hosts D
200. d select the clips they need See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip where you want to set a flag 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu Thumbnail Operations 3 Select Set Clip Flag The clip flag setting screen appears Thumbnail Menu ii Set Clip Flag gt Return to Upper Menu 4 OK NG KP KEEP none 4 Select the clip flag that you want to set OK NG KP KEEP A clip flag icon see page 108 appears for clips that have clip flags set To clear clip flags Carry out steps 1 to 3 selecting a clip that has a flag set and then select none in step 4 You can also use switches to set and clear clip flags For details see Setting clip flags with switches page 82 Locking write protecting clips In a clip thumbnail screen you can lock the selected clips so that they cannot be deleted or altered Locking prevents the following operations on clips Deletion Renaming by FTP Changing the index picture Adding and deleting shot marks Setting and clearing clip flags Locked clips are deleted along with other clips when a disc is formatted Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position To lock clips See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the t
201. d Tuner Unit DWR S02D Digital Wireless Receiver a CHE ni mN PDW 850 PFD23A PFD50DLA Professional disc SM CBK WAO 1 CA FB70 yout RM B170 B750 LET 99 1 Wi Fi Adapt ed Remote Control Unit MEHRBREIUR Camera Adaptor CBK WA100 CA TX70 Wireless Adaptor Camera Adaptor E VCT 14 Tripod adaptor Tripod LC DS300 SFT Soft carrying case inet i BC L70 BC L160 ry Battery Battery Charger Charger LC H300 Hard carrying case BC L500 Battery Charger AC DN10 DN2B AC Adaptor a The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted However remove them if they protrude more than 25 cm from the front of the main unit Chart of Optional Components and Accessories 263 List of Supported USB Keyboards When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA PAL AREA and the font setting is European g Alphabet 2 On this unit you can enter any of the characters 1 When the font setting is Simplified Chinese or o PLIN A i k x and symbols supported by the keyboards listed Traditional Chinese a keyboard with the same below layout as the English United States keyboard is Select the corresponding language by selecting selected automatically Settings gt Select USB Keyboard Language in the Disc Menu see page 122 English United Kingdom
202. d by 1 stop two e c EB F5 6 segments Iris opened by 0 5 stop one segment Stopping down the lens iris Iris stopped down by 1 stop two r3 F5 i 6 segments Iris stopped down by 0 5 stop one segment When the RM B170 Remote Control Unit is connected The IRIS control knob of the RM B170 can be used for lens iris setting auto iris In this case the indicator is not displayed To set the automatic iris window 1 Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2 described in the previous item to display the AUTO IRIS page Turn the MENU knob to move to IRIS WINDOW IND then press the MENU knob on the left of IRIS WINDOW IND changes to and on the left of the setting changes to Turn the MENU knob until ON appears then press the MENU knob changes to and changes to The currently selected auto iris window appears on the screen If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on the screen set to OFF 4 Turn the MENU knob to move to IRIS WINDOW then press the MENU knob changes to and changes to 5 Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears then press the MENU knob 3 4 5 6 E SS Sea The shaded parts indicate the area where light detection changes to and changes to If you select VARIABLE the following items become effective and you can set the window of the desired size Set each item to the
203. d controls in thumbnail screens 107 Displaying Menus ie a err tee eee tienes 110 GUI screen operations nennen 114 Thumbnail Operations eere eene eere een een entrato aene enses tenes statue 115 Selecting thumbnails se LIS Searching with thumbnails 116 Playing the scene you have found sese 118 Selecting clips by type Filter Clips function 119 Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails 120 Changing clip index pictures eee 120 Checking clip properties eeeeeeeeereenen 121 Setting Clip flags eere EE pe 124 Locking write protecting clips eere 124 Deleting clips eee PHONE 125 Scene Selection Clip List Editing ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 126 What is scene selection 126 Creating and editing clip lists 50127 Managing clip liste bee e be tb RE eee 132 4 Table of Contents Disc Operations P 133 Checking disc properties 133 Using planning metadata we 134 Checking user defined essence marks 136 Formatting discs ceceeseecseeseseescesseesceteeeeeseeetsees 136 Displaying disc and clip properties in a web browser 137 Transferring clips Direct FTP function Preparations for clip transfers
204. d of auto tracing white balance ATW 1 is fastest AWB FIXED AREA OFF ON Executes AWB auto white balance at the center of the screen FILTER WHT MEM OFF ON Specifies whether to allocate a white balance memory slot for each position number of the FILTER selector 25 OFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE lt A gt OFF ON For details see Specifying an WARM COOL lt A gt Displays reference color ffset for the auto white balance temperature setting page 217 WARM COOLBAL 99to 99 lt A gt OFFSET WHITE lt B gt OFF ON WARM COOL lt B gt Displays reference color temperature WARM COOL BAL 99to 99 lt B gt Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 26 SHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS OFF ON The items which can be set differ SHUTTER SLS OFF ON depending on the setting of the SHUTTER 1 32 OFF ON SYSTEM FREQUENCY item on the FORMAT page For details SHUTTER 1 33 OFF ON see Setting the Electronic SHUTTER 1 40 OFF ON Shutter page 60 SHUTTER 1 48 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 50 OFF ON When the recording format is SHUTTER 1 60 OFF ON 1080 23 98P more shutter speeds SHUTTER 1 96 OFF ON can be selected and the SHT ENABLE 2 page appears to SHUTTER 1 100 OFF ON display them SHUTTER 1 120 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 125 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 250 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 500 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 1000 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 2000 OFF ON 27 LENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT 1to32 For details see
205. d to each other REARI WRR SIDE1 FRONT Selects any of these controls to adjust the LEVEL F S1 audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CHI connector on the rear panel SIDE 1 LEVEL control left side FRONT MIC LEVEL control F S1 LEVEL control left side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other REAR2 WRR SIDE2 FRONT Selects any of these controls to adjust the LEVEL F S2 audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel SIDE 2 LEVEL control right side FRONT MIC LEVEL control F4S2 LEVEL control right side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other s6unes pejreieq pue s ejds q nua 9 Jejdeu AUDIO CH3 FIX FRONT Selects the audio level recorded on channel 3 LEVEL 9 FIX Fixed FRONT Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel of the camcorder 174 Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 08 AUDIO 3 AUDIO CH4 FIX FRONT Selects the audio level recorded on channel 4 LEVEL 9 FIX Fixed FRONT Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel of the camcorder sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD Menu List 175 sBumes pejreieq pue s ejds q nue 9 Jaldeyp 176 No Page Item Settings Description 09 WRR
206. dden parts of the string into view When a or 4 mark is displayed for an item you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view To return to the previous screen Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To edit disc information You can edit the user disc ID title 1 D and title 2 by using a software keyboard 1 Only ASCII characters can be used for the title 1 Disc Operations SueeiJoS IND ui suonejedo g Jeydeuj 133 SueaeJog MH ui suonejedo gc Ja deyo 134 See To edit clip information page 122 for information about operations Using planning metadata Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata about the clips to be shot and recorded To use planning metadata you will need to save a file in advance in the specified location of a media and insert the media into this unit For details see To set clip names by using planning metadata page 96 To load planning metadata files See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Load Planning Metadata Select Drive and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A media selection screen appears Disc Menu i Load Planning Metadata Select Drive Return to Upper Menu 4 D Professional Disc gt USB Flash Drive gt oo Select the me
207. deJjg z e1deuj When the eyecup is worn out replace it with a new one For details of a replacement eyecup contact a Sony service representative Adjusting the viewfinder focus and screen To adjust the viewfinder focus Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder image is sharpest Diopter adjustment ring Attaching the Viewfinder 37 suongeredejd z ejdeuj 38 To adjust the viewfinder screen Adjust the brightness contrast and peaking of the viewfinder screen with the controls shown below DISPLAY ZEBRA TALLY LN E 4S HIGH S r NH LOW p ASPECT PEAKING control CONTRAST control BRIGHT control Setting the Area of Use Setting the Area of Use When using the unit for the first time The area of use is not factory preset Before using this unit you need to set this item You cannot use the unit without setting this item To set the area of use POWER switch MENU knob 1 Set the POWER switch to the ON position The screen for setting the area of use appears in the viewfinder FORMAT SETTING NTRY eNOT SELECTED M LINE B 1080 m o m Do m oc NENNEN WO TE EENEN H ND TURN OFF once B EH EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 2 Press the MENU knob on the left of NOT SELECTED changes to and you can now select the area of use FORMAT SETTING NTRY NOT SELECTED M LINE 1080 m o LI E FORMAT E TURN OFF ONCE E EEEENEEEE
208. deleting 132 loading 132 playback 127 saving 131 sorting 133 thumbnail screen 108 Clip list editing 126 xepu Index 273 x pu 274 Color LCD 17 status display 19 Color temperature 28 setting manually 216 Condensation 255 CONTRAST control 26 Cooling fan control mode 29 Cover 17 Current clip list 127 Customization assigning functions to ASSIGN switches 209 D Date setting 39 DC IN connector 12 DC OUT 12V connector 12 DCC Dynamic Contrast Control 16 DIAGNOSIS menu 150 191 Digital extender function 210 Digital hours meter 191 Diopter adjustment ring 26 Direct FTP function 140 Directory structure 228 Disc capacity 73 formatting 75 136 loading and unloading 74 operations 133 playback conditions 80 playback start position 79 properties 133 restoring lost data 75 salvage function 75 unloading manually 74 write protecting 73 Disc Exchange Cache function 89 Disc Menu 112 DISP SEL EXPAND button 18 DISPLAY switch 19 DISPLAY ASPECT switch 27 E EARPHONE jack 14 25 ECS Extended Clear Scan mode 61 E E Electric to Electric 14 EJECT button 18 Electric color temperature filter 31 Index Electronic shutter 60 Essence mark finding scenes 117 recording 82 thumbnailscreen 110 Ethernet connector 24 Expand thumbnail screen 109 Expand function 116 Extender 28 External battery 29 External device control and single clip playback 30 External input status 31 Eyecup 26 F FFWD button 18 F REV bu
209. desired size Item Setting IRIS VAR WIDTH The width of the window IRIS VAR HEIGHT The height of the window IRIS VARH POS The position of the window in the horizontal direction IRIS VAR V POS The position of the window in the vertical direction B Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen To counter problems with very bright highlights If the subject is too bright the iris may close too much leaving the overall image dark or the highlights may be blown out In such cases setting the highlight clip function on reduces the luminance range avoiding problems from the automatic iris correction In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu set the CLIP HIGH LIGHT item to ON Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjuswysnipy e Je deyo 65 Bunooys 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo 66 Adjusting the Audio Level Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2 You can also adjust the audio level manually For audio channels 3 and 4 menu settings allow you to select automatic adjustment manual adjustment or fixed Target audio level for automatic audio level adjustment Make adjustment using 20 dB
210. destination by WPS operations In infrastructure mode only you can use WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup to specify a connection destination access point semi automatically WPS does not support the following Ad hoc mode IEEE 802 1x The access point must support WPS n addition to the settings made here you must also make network settings on the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the WPS page of the MAINTENANCE menu and then press the MENU knob See Basic menu operations page 193 for more information about menu operations N Select ENABLE and then press the MENU knob The screen changes to the operation screen M240WPS TOP gt Wi Fi x ENABL WPS MODE ONE PUSH WPS START WPS STATUS Co ONE PUSH Connect using the one push method PIN CODE Connect using the PIN code entry method Adjustments and Settings from Menus Set WPS MODE to one of the following When you select PIN CODE A PIN item appears Execute UPDATE in that item to display a PIN code for this unit 4 Select WPS START and then press the MENU knob WPS setup starts During execution the progress and results appear after WPS STATUS SCANNING Scanning for an access point OK Detection successful NG Detection failed When execution finishes the screen changes to the ACCESS PNT page 5 Selec
211. details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches page 209 You can do a menu operation to change the Picture Cache time while the camcorder is in recording mode However the new setting takes effect only after the recording is finished In Picture Cache mode the internal timecode generator operating mode is always F RUN regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode The recording procedure in Picture Cache mode is basically the same as that for normal recording However note the following differences When you record in Picture Cache mode the picture you are shooting now is recorded to disc after the picture data stored in memory equal to the Picture Cache time is recorded to disc For this reason disc access may continue for a short time after you press the REC START button to stop recording During this time the playback control buttons are disabled as in recording mode Also if you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during this time a separate clip is recorded When you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during disc access the start point of the recorded clip may be later than the Picture Cache time especially when there are a large number of clips recorded on the disc In Picture Cache mode you should avoid stop and start recording operations in quick succession The time
212. dia where your planning metadata file is stored and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A list of the planning metadata files stored on the media appears Disc Menu Ba Load Planning Metadata Z Professional Disc lt PM 001 sample 04 AUG 10 PM_002 c PM 003 Name amp Date Sorted by Name If MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu is set to ENABL it is not possible to load planning data from a USB flash drive that is write inhibited Set MEMORY REC to DSABL before starting or enable Disc Operations recording on the USB flash drive and connect it again If the message USB M INHI appears when you connect a USB flash drive disconnect the drive enable recording on the USB flash drive and then connect it again Depending on the type of USB flash drive data may not appear if you attempt to read planning metadata immediately after connecting the USB flash drive In this case connect the USB flash drive again or exit the menu and try again The data will then appear correctly 4 Select the desired planning metadata file and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The selected planning metadata file is loaded into the unit s memory and the Planning Metadata Properties screen appears D Check the information that appears and press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob By connecting this unit and a computer over a network you can read planning metadata using a web
213. dio signals Not recorded Playback control buttons Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode The EJECT F REV F FWD NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE and STOP buttons are disabled To use these buttons stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens The single shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode The F REV F FWD NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE and STOP buttons are disabled To use these buttons exit the Interval Rec mode by pressing the EJECT button Menu operations The settings of the Interval Rec related items on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu cannot be changed To change the settings do either of the following Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode Stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens The single shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode Exit the Interval Rec mode by pressing the EJECT button Item Description When the When you set the POWER camcorder power switch to OFF the camcorder is switched off will switch off by itself after disc access has continued for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in memory If you remove the battery unplug the DC cable or cut power to the AC adaptor picture data stored before recording stops a maximum of ten seconds may be lost Take care when replacing the battery Auto Inter
214. e To insert a space In step 3 above move the ll mark over INS and press the MENU knob To cancel inserting a space move the B mark over RET then press the MENU knob To delete a character In step 3 of Setting the shot ID page 205 move the W mark over DEL and press the MENU knob This deletes the character under the Bl mark in the shot ID row To cancel deleting the character move the MI mark over RET and press the MENU knob To cancel changing shot ID Before executing step 5 of Setting the shot ID page 205 move the mark over ESC then press the MENU knob or flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to ESCAPE Displaying the status confirmation screens You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on the LCDs by displaying the following four screen ABNORMAL screen This window allows you to confirm why the warning indicator lights in the viewfinder Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor You can use the LED page of the OPERATION menu to set whether or not the warning indicator lights SYSTEM screen This screen displays information such as the system frequency the recording format whether output from the TEST OUT connector is on or off and the type of output signal FUNCTION screen This screen displays the functions assigned to the ASSIGN switches ZEBRA ON OFF the detection level and other information AUDIO STATUS screen Th
215. e USER BOX Sets the height of the box HEIGHT cursor distance from center to top or bottom edge USER BOX Sets the horizontal position of H POS the center of the box cursor USER BOX Sets the vertical position of the V POS center of the box cursor CENTER H Sets the horizontal position of POS the center marker CENTER V Sets the vertical position of the POS center marker ASPECT Turns the display of the aspect SAFE ZONE safety zone on and off ASPECT Selects the range of the aspect SAFE AREA safety zone 80 90 92 5 95 a USER BOX is disabled by setting FOCUS AREA MARK to ON on the FOCUS ASSIST page of the OPERATION menu Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the VF SETTING page Item Description ZEBRA Turns the zebra display on or off 9 ZEBRA Selects ZEBRA 1 ZEBRA 2 or SELECT BOTH ZEBRA 1 Adjusts the level of the zebra 1 DET LVL 20 to 70 to 107 display ZEBRA 1 Adjusts the aperture level of the APT LVL zebra 1 display 1 to 10 to 20 ZEBRA 2 Adjusts the level of the zebra 2 DET LVL 52 to 100 to 109 display VF DETAIL Adjusts the sharpness of the LEVEL viewfinder 99 to 99 VFASPECT Specifies whether to set the SD viewfinder
216. e MPEG HD 35 Mbps 4 ch audio More than 145 min PFD50DLA More than 65 min PFD23A 35 Mbps 2 ch audio playback only More than 150 min PFDSODLA More than 68 min PFD23A PFDS50DLA Approx 85 min PFD23A 25 Mbps 2 ch audio playback only Approx 200 min PFDSODLA Approx 90 min PFD23A 18 Mbps 4 ch audio playback only More than 248 min PFDSODLA More than 112 min PFD23A 18 Mbps 2 ch audio playback only More than 265 min PFDS50DLA More than 122 min PFD23A xipueddy Recording playback time MPEG IMX 50 Mbps Approx 100 min PFD50DLA Approx 45 min PFD23A 40 Mbps Approx 120 min PFDSODLA Approx 55 min PFD23A 30 Mbps Approx 150 min PFDS50DLA Approx 68 min PFD23A Recording playback time DVCAM 25 Mbps Approx 185 min PFDS50DLA Approx 85 min PFD23A Recording frame rate MPEG HD422 50 Mbps 1920 x 1080 59 94i 29 97p 50i 25p 23 98p 1280 x 720 59 94p 50p MPEG HD420 HQ 35 Mbps SP 25 Mbps 1440 x 1080 59 94i 29 97p 50i 25p 23 98p 1280 x 720 59 94p 50p MPEG HD420 LP 18 Mbps 1440 x 1080 59 94i 29 97p 50i 25p 23 98p playback only 258 Specifications 25 Mbps 4 ch audio Approx 190 min MPEG IMX 50 40 30 Mbps DVCAM mode 720 x 486 59 94i 29 97p 720 x 576 50i 25p Lens Lens mount 7 inch type 48 bayonet mount Input output Inputs Genlock input BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 Q en Timecode in
217. e GAIN selector 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB positions page 208 GAIN MID 6dB 3dB OdB 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB GAIN HIGH 6dB 3dB OdB 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB GAIN TURBO 6dB 3dB OdB 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB TURBO SW IND OFF ON SHOCKLESS GAIN OFF ON ZEBRA OFF ON For details see Setting the ZEBRA SELECT 1 2 BOTH viewfinder page 204 ZEBRA1 DET LVL 20 to 70 to 107 ZEBRA1 APT LVL 1 to 10 to 20 s6unes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nua 9 Jaldeup ZEBRA2 DET LVL 52 to 100 to 109 VF DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 VF ASPECT SD AUTO 16 9 When the REC FORMAT item is set to IMX50 IMX40 IMX30 or DVCAM VF DETAIL OFF ON VF DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 CRISP 99 to 99 FREQUENCY 9M 14M 18M FAT MODE OFF ON FLICKER OFF ON COLOR DETAIL OFF ON COLOR SEL BLUE RED YELL PEAK COLOR OFF ON CHROMA LEVEL 096 25 96 5096 10096 IRIS OVERRIDE OFF ON For details see Changing the IRIS SPEED 99 to 99 Reference Value for Automatic CLIP HIGHLIGHT OFF ON Iris Aajusiment page 64 IRIS WINDOW 1 2 3 4 5 6 VAR IRIS WINDOW IND OFF ON IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 240 to 479 IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 135 to 269 IRIS VAR H POS 460 to 0 to 459 IRIS VAR V POS 250 to 0 to 249 No Page Item Settings Description 21 SHOT ID ID 1 Blank up to 12 For
218. e MENU knob the menu display switches in the following sequence sBumes pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo Menu Operations 194 Example When using the OPERATION menu TOP menu CONTENTS page Y TOP MENU MENU CUSTOMIZE TION ENANCE p If the menu has not been used D DDUr mm 5 CD m AA DOMZZA zz HD QO mun OH S 5 L 0 P M F Q A If the menu has been used before Menu selection mode Menu selection page 001e0UTPUT1 Y SDI OUT gt Setting item selection mode 00100UTPUT1 SDI OUT1 SELECT Setting value selection mode 00100UTPUT1 eSDI OUT1 SELECT sBumes pojrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD If the TOP menu has not been displayed since the camcorder is powered on TOP does not appear at the upper right on the above screen and you cannot go to the TOP menu In this case follow the procedure in To display the TOP menu page 193 Menu Operations 195 sBumes pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 196 To display the TOP menu when another menu is displayed Move to TOP displayed at the top right of each page of the menu and press the MENU knob Or flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch repeatedly to ESCAPE until the TOP menu is displayed Using the USER menu example menu operation This section explains menu operations using the USER menu as an example The operations are the same for the ALL
219. e USB flash drive TITLES TXT is transferred to the internal memory of the unit The message COMPLETE appears when the transfer finishes The message FILE NOT FOUND appears if no list of title prefixes is found Check the location where the file is stored on the USB flash drive To select a prefix from the title prefix list How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select SELECT PREFIX and then press the MENU knob A list of up to 20 title prefixes appears P00 TITLE PREFIX ESC Tennis Basketball Skiins Skiing_2 Athletics Aquatics Cycling Softball Fencing Sailing When no list of title prefixes has been transferred to the internal memory of this unit only the initial value TITLE appears 3 Select the desired title prefix from the list and then press the MENU knob The CLIP TITLE page appears again and the selected prefix appears in the PREFIX field To enter a title prefix directly How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page on the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select PREFIX and then press the MENU knob A prefix st
220. e are two other ways to review the recording Recording review You can view the last two seconds of the recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the LCD monitor Viewing color playback on a video monitor You can view the recording in color on a color video monitor without the need for any external adaptor You can also view playback video during a fast forward or reverse search For details about the switches and controls used to select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio level see page 15 and page 22 To freeze a picture during playback The following operation can also be done from the RM B170 B750 Remote Control Unit 1 Press the PLAY PAUSE button to start playback 2 Press the PLAY PAUSE button again at the instant when you want to freeze the picture The playback pauses and a frozen picture appears The timecode of the frozen frame is displayed in the counter display and the PLAY PAUSE indicator now flashes one flash second To restart playback Press the PLAY PAUSE button once again Clip playback modes You can set the clip playback mode to either of the following Continuous playback mode The playback target is all of the clips on the disc factory default setting Single clip playback mode The playback target is the currently selected clip only To select single clip playback mode Set SINGLE CLIP MODE in the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to O
221. e audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches or you can have the selection made automatically as follows Adjusting the Audio Level 67 Bunooys 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e sa deyo 68 To automatically select the same audio as on channels 1 and 2 On the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set the AUDIO CH3 4 MODE item to CH 1 2 CH 3 switch F The audio signal from the front microphone is recorded R The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector is recorded W The audio signal of the wireless microphone is recorded CH 4 switch OF Same as with the CH3 switch QR The audio signal inputto the AUDIO IN CH2 connector is recorded Ow Same as with the CH3 switch When the LINE AES EBU MIC selector is set to LINE or MIC the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection function They are determined by the settings of the AUDIO IN CH 3 and CH 4 switches Adjusting the audio recording levels To adjust automatically Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to STREO or MONO To adjust manually 1 SetAU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to OFF 2 Set AUDIO CH3 LEVEL for audio channel 3 and AUDIO CH4 LEVEL for audio channel 4 on the AUDIO 3 Adjusting the Audio Level page of the MAINTENANCE menu to FRONT The levels of audio ch
222. e balance settings stored in memory A B orC WB ATW HOLD MEMORY ON i b ATW ON ATW OFF b White balance settings immediately before ATW was turned off White balance settings used when ATW is turned off WB White balance setting value t Shooting time If a memory error occurs If the error message STORED DATA NG flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on the white balance and black balance memory contents have been lost Adjust the white balance and black balance again Contact a Sony representative if this message continues to appear even after the white balance and black balance have been adjusted again For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjueunsn py e 4e1deuo 59 Bunooys 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Je deyo 60 Setting the Electronic Shutter Shutter modes The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed below Standard mode Select this mode for shooting fast moving subjects with little blurring SYSTEM System Shutter speed LINE setting frequency unit Hz 1080 59 941 60 00 to 4300 50i 50 00 to 4700 29 97p 9 30 00 to 2700 25p9 25 00 to 2300 23 98p 9 24 00 to 2200 720 59 94P 60 00 to 4300 50P 50 00 to 4700 a When the unit is in Slow amp Quick Moti
223. e device For details refer to the operating instructions provided with the smartphone or tablet device Ifusing the Wi Fi remote control via the CBK WA100 Wireless Adaptor turn the camcorder on first and then turn on the CBK WA100 Compatible devices The supported devices OS and browsers that can be used to operate the Wi Fi remote control are shown in the following table Device OS Browser PC Windows 7 Internet Explorer 8 or9 Mac OS 10 7 4 Safari 5 1 6 Smartphone Android 2 3 3 Standard browser iOS 5 1 1 Safari Tablet Android 4 0 3 Standard browser iOS 5 1 1 Safari To specify a connection destination manually Specify the following items on the Wi Fi SETTING page Item name Setting SSID network name Up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols NETWORK TYPE connection mode INFRA Infrastructure mode ADHOC Ad hoc mode CH wireless channel 1 to 11 can be specified only in ad hoc mode AUTH network OPEN Open system authentication authentication SHARED Shared key authentication WPA WPA Wi Fi Protected Access authentication WPA2 WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access 2 authentication ENCRYPTION data encryption DISABLE Disable WEP WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy method TKIP TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol method AES AES Advanced Encryption Standard method Some limitations apply to combinations of the NETWORK TYPE
224. e no clips recorded on the disc Exchange for a recorded disc There is no disc loaded Insert a disc and try the operation again The operation is not possible while the disc is being played or recorded Stop the disc An operation was attempted while a disc was loading or unloading Wait for the disc to finish loading or unloading and try again The operation is not possible because the disc is at the top or end In single clip playback mode the specified operation is not possible because playback has reached the top or end of the clip Operation Warnings eoueuejure N 6 Je deuD 251 eoueuejure N 6 Je deuD 252 Formatting Recording No EM Space EM Full Cache REC Disc Exchag Live Logg SB CLP mode No SEL List No List No SUB Clip SUB Clip NG MAX SB CLP Resolution CL OVER DUR The disc is being automatically formatted Wait until the format ends The unit is writing to the file system Wait until writing finishes Essence marks cannot be inserted For details see Recording essence marks page 82 An attempt was made to perform an operation that cannot be performed when the picture cache function is enabled The operation will be ignored An attempt was made to perform an operation that cannot be performed when the disc exchange cache function is enabled The operation will be ignored An attempt was made to perform
225. e put on the lens locking lever as illustrated above Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps Mounting the Lens suonejedeJjg z je1deuj 41 suonejedeJjg z 1ejdeuj 42 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle adjust the flange focal length the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane Make this adjustment after mounting or changing the lens The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens Check the identification of the various controls in the lens manual Set the iris to manual 2 Open the iris Place the flange focal length adjustment chart about 3 m 10 ft away from the camera lit well enough to provide a satisfactory video output level J Loosen the fixing screws on the F f or F B ring flange focal length adjustment ring 4 Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto D Pointthecamera at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on it 6 Set the zoom ring to wide angle Turn the F f or F B ring until the chart is in focus being careful not to disturb the focus ring Adjusting the Flange Focal Length Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the way from wide angle to telephoto Tighten the F f or F B ring fixing Screws Preparing the Audio
226. e the front microphone connected to the MIC IN connector if it is connected 7 Checking the user bit and timecode Perform the operations of steps 1 and 2 explained in 5 Testing external microphones Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to FRONT Perform the operations of steps 4 and 5 explained in 5 Testing external microphones If the audio level meters on the color and monochrome LCDs and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level the function of the XLR connection automatic detection is working correctly If it does not reflect the changing sound level the function of the XLR connection automatic detection function is off Set REAR XLR AUTO to ON on the VDR MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu If it does not reflect even after making this setting the XLR connection automatic detection function does not work correctly functions 1 Set the user bits as required For the operation see Setting the user bits page 69 Set the timecode For the operation see Setting the timecode page 69 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN Press the REC START button and check that recording starts and that the timecode indication in the counter display changes Press the REC START button again and check that recording stops and that the timecode indication stops changing Testing the Camcorder before Shooting eoueuejure N 6 1e deuo 243
227. e unit is powered from a battery connected to the DC IN connector or AC adaptor attached to the battery attachment shoe indicates the power source voltage E External battery Appears if the power is supplied from an external battery connected to the DC IN connector Clip Continuous Rec function Appears when the Clip Continuous Rec function see page 90 is enabled CONT lit Continuous recording to extend the previous clip is possible CONT flashing A new clip will be created and recorded Cooling fan control mode This appears when FAN CONTROL on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to R MIN or MIN FAN lit The cooling fan is operating at low speed Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 29 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 30 FAN flashing The cooling fan is operating at low speed but the temperature inside the unit has risen to a level just below the level at which an alarm occurs If you do nothing while the FAN display is flashing the unit will attempt to lower the internal temperature by operating the fan at high speed When the FAN display begins to flash you should stop shooting and other operations and wait until the internal temperature drops and then restart operations GPS reception status For details see Icons displayed on the screen page 103 Memory symbol and remaining capacity wireless LAN connection status or CBK WA100 Wireless Adaptor remaining media stat
228. ea of at least 10 of the screen Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle Adjust the lens iris Manually adjusted lens set the iris to an appropriate setting Lens with automatic iris set the automatic manual switch on the lens to automatic Flick the AUTO W B BAL switch to WHT and then release the switch AUTO W B BAL switch The switch returns to the center position and the adjustment is executed During adjustment the message AWB EXECUTING WHITE BALANCE Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjueunsn py e 1e1deuo 57 Bunooys 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo 58 is displayed on the viewfinder screen in display mode 2 or 3 The white balance adjustment ends in about one second with the message shown in the following figure and the adjustment setting is automatically stored in the memory A or B that was selected in step 1 Approximate color temperature of the subject If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris the iris may hunt D during the adjustment To prevent this adjust the iris gain knob indicated as IG IS or S on the lens For details refer to the lens operation manual 1 Hunting Repeated brightening and darkening of the image resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed no
229. eception status this item sBunes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nue 9 Jeydeuo a When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BP GL65 GL95 battery pack is installed the remaining battery power is shown as a percentage value 96 according to the setting of INT When one of the above batteries is installed the remaining power is shown as a percentage value 46 when there is a change in the value or when the power is low AUTO The remaining power is shown as a percentage value 96 when one of the above batteries is installed Otherwise the voltage VOLT is displayed continuously VOLT The voltage VOLT is displayed continuously EXT MEDIA CBK WA100 SD card REMAIN remaining media display SENDING Clip transfer to CBK WA100 CLIPINFO progress display Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting ON OFF or value and press the MENU knob Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items 202 Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor Change confirmation adjustment progress messages You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of setting changes and adjustment progress and results by setting a display mode The conditions under which messages are displayed and their correspondence with the display mode are as follows Y Message is displayed N Message is not displayed Message display Message Display condition mode sett
230. ecord analog composite video signals that are input to this connector TC IN timecode input connector BNC type To apply an external lock to the timecode of this unit input the reference timecode For details of timecode see Setting the timecode page 69 J TEST OUT connector BNC type This connector outputs the video signal for a video monitor The output signal can be selected from composite video HD Y and R G B To switch output signals use the TEST OUT SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu If the output signal is set to one of R G or B then this setting changes to HD Y when the camcorder is powered off and on again Depending on menu settings menus timecode and shot data can be superimposed on the image on the monitor This connector can also be used to Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls synchronize the timecode of an external VTR with the timecode of the camcorder TC OUT timecode output connector BNC type To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the timecode of this unit connect this connector to the external VTR s timecode input connector Rear TALLY back tally indicator red Lights up during recording It will not light if the TALLY switch is set to OFF This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings see page 18 in the same manner as the REC TALLY indicator in the viewfinder For details see Operation
231. ectively 3 Testing the manual audio level adjusting functions 1 Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to FRONT 2 Turn the MIC LEVEL control Check that the channel 1 and 2 audio level meters on the LCD monitor show more and more segments as you turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder 4 Testing the earphone and speaker 1 Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the speaker volume changes accordingly 2 Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE jack 3 Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that you can hear the sound from the microphone in the earphone 4 Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the earphone volume changes accordingly 5 Connect the earphone to the other EARPHONE jack Check the earphone as in step 3 5 Testing external microphones 1 Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors 2 Setthe 48V OFF switches as follows If the connected microphone is of the internal power supply type set the switch to OFF If the connected microphone is of the external power supply type set the switch to 48V 3 Set the AUDIO IN switches to REAR Aim the microphones at a sound source 5 Check that the audio level meters on the LCD monitor and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level 6 Checking the XLR connection automatic detection function Before starting to check remov
232. ectory is generated automatically when you format a disc Do not save more than 100 planning metadata files in the above save locations The unit may fail to load the files correctly if more than 100 are saved For greater convenience in planning metadata operations you can use the optional CBK WA01 Wi Fi Adaptor and the supplied Sony Planning Metadata Add in application software For details refer to the operation manual of the CBK WA01 Wi Fi Adaptor To set clip names by using planning metadata The following two types of clip name strings can be written in a planning metadata file The ASCII format name that appears in the viewfinder P The UTF 8 format name that is actually registered as the clip name 2 1 It is also possible to display the UTF 8 format name or no name see page 135 2 When no UTF 8 format name string is specified the ASCII format name string is registered as the actual clip name Clip name string format In a text editor modify the two fields in the Title tag that contain the clip name strings the shaded fields in the example in the next section Clip name string example Entera name in the first field in ASCII format up to 50 characters and enter another name in the second field in UTF 8 format up to 50 bytes Clip name string example xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt 4 Plannin gMetadata xmlns http xmins sony net pro metadata planningmetadata assignId P000
233. ed n tunnels indoors or beside buildings In narrow roadways between buildings and skyscrapers Underground in dense areas of vegetation under overhead structures or near power lines or other equipment that generate magnetic fields Near 1 5 GHz band mobile phones or other equipment that emit radio waves of the same frequency Errors in positioning Immediately after setting GPS SETTING to ON positioning may take longer if you are moving compared to the time taken if you are stationary About GPS Error due to GPS satellites The unit automatically calculates your location when it receives signals from three or more GPS satellites The positioning accuracy enabled by GPS satellites is about 10 m 33 ft but larger errors in positioning may occur due to the surroundings when positioning is used Accordingly your actual location and the location shown on a map may vary In addition the GPS satellites are managed by the U S Department of Defense and the accuracy of the system may be altered intentionally Error due to positioning time The unit obtains positioning information at regular intervals during positioning Restrictions Always use the GPS function in accordance with the rules and regulations of the country and or region of use Geodetic reference system The unit uses the WGS 84 geodetic reference system Index Symbols warning indicator 27 48V OFF switches 25 Numerics
234. edia capacity on the CBK WA100 is displayed if Wi F ETHER RM is set to RM or ALL on the CAM CONFIG 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Wireless adaptor reception status Displays the reception status of the optional CBK WA100 LTE connections Displays 3G 4G symbol Station mode Displays 4 bar signal strength Access point mode Displays AP symbol Bottom of viewfinder screen External device control and single clip playback REC2 Appears when HDSDI REMOTE I F is set to CHARA and SDI REC CONTROL is set to RM on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu and the camcorder is remotely controlling recording on external devices connected to the SDI OUT 1 2 connectors HDSDI output P REC2 P PARALLEL REC Appears when HDSDI REMOTE I F is set to CHARA and SDI REC CONTROL is set to PARA on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu and the camcorder and external devices connected to the SDI OUT 1 2 connectors HDSDI output are mutually controlling recording SNGL Appears when SINGLE CLIP MODE in the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to ON and the unit is searching or playing a clip see page 79 1 SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be set to HDSDI Setting change and adjustment progress message display area For details see Change confirmation adjustment progress messages page 203 Extern
235. eing played is copied to the USB flash drive To copy the proxy data of all clips on a disc to a USB flash drive Proceed as follows to copy the proxy data of all clips on a disc to a USB flash drive The following functions stop during execution of a copy Playback cue up Picture Cache recording 1 Select COPY ALL CLIPS in the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu and then press the MENU knob The message EXECUTE OK appears 2 Select YES and then press the MENU knob During the execution of the copy the message MEMORY ACCESS appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor where is replaced with a number 0 to 99 that indicates the percentage completed When processing finishes the message COMPLETE appears The proxy data of all clips on the disc is copied to the USB flash drive Advanced Operations for Shooting The message M Shortage appears when the mount of data to be copied exceed the free capacity of the USB flash drive The copy is not executed Exchange the USB flash drive for one with enough free capacity To cancel a copy to a USB flash drive 1 Select ABORT COPY in the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu and then press the MENU knob The message EXECUTE OK appears 2 Select YES and then press the MENU knob The message ABORTING appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor while the unit is aborting the copy operation The message
236. elete or rename a clip Establish a network connection Eject the disc Change the recording format Power the unit off To disable the function Set CLIP CONT REC in the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu to OFF Retaking the most recent clip A retake function is available making it easy to erase and retake the most recently recorded clip To use the retake function you need to assign it to one of the ASSIGN 1 3 4 5 switches in advance For details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches page 209 Example After recording clip 3 you want to delete it and record a new clip 3 after clip 2 Clip 1 Clip 2 Clips New clip To retake the most recent clip With recording paused or after the end of a recording review see page 78 proceed as follows 1 Hold down the button to which the retake function has been assigned While the button is held down the last frame of the recorded clip and the message PUSH RET FOR CLIP DELETE appears 2 Inthis state press the RET button The message DELETING LAST CLIP appears and the processing for deleting the last recorded clip begins When the deleting has finished the message LAST CLIP WAS DELETED appears The retake function cannot be used when the Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled If an operation other than recording review which is not a retake operation is carried out after the last clip has been
237. en clips and sub clips Clip 4 C0004 Clip list E0001 Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3 In the above example the whole of clip 2 has been added as sub clip 1 and the whole of clip 4 has been added as sub clip 2 Sub clip 3 is part of clip 3 Therefore when clip list E0001 is played back clip 4 is played after clip 2 and then the part of clip 3 shown in gray color is played Clips on disc Clip 1 Clip 2 C0001 Clip list editing current clip list To edit a clip list you need to load the clip list from the disc into the unit s internal memory The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory is called the current clip list The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation and editing Clip list playback also uses the current clip list After creating and editing a clip list you need to save it to disc Unit memory Current clip list can be edited gt Clip list adding deleting and Midas ang b cli reordering sub clips display SAVE amp LOAD Disc L5 C0001 Clip 1 C0002 Clip 2 C0003 Clip 3 E0001 Clip list 1 E0002 Clip list 2 E0003 Clip list 3 E0099 Clip list 99 Clip list playback Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc To play a clip list insert a disc into the unit load the clip list that you want to play and press the PLAY PAUSE button Clips are played according to the da
238. enu operations 193 setting menu organization 148 thumbnail menu 110 MENU button 22 MENU knob 14 MENU ON OFF switch 17 Message changeconfirmation adjustmentprogress 203 operation alarm 250 warning 247 MIC IN 48 V connector 13 MIC LEVEL control 14 Microphone holder 27 Microphone connecting 43 Mixed format recording mode 54 MONITOR knob 15 MONITOR switches 15 Monochrome LCD status display 19 xepu ND filter 14 Network connector 24 NEXT button 18 Noise suppression function 169 0 OPERATION menu 150 151 Operation alarm message display area 31 Optional components 263 Output signal selecting 208 OUTPUT DCC switch 16 Ownership information 218 Index 275 xepu 276 P PAINT menu 150 162 PEAKING control 26 Picture Cache function 83 Pixel noise reduction function 183 Planning metadata 96 134 PLAY PAUSE button 18 Playback clip list 127 freeze frame 79 normal 79 search result 118 Plug 26 Power saving function 212 Power source voltage battery remaining capacity 29 Power supply 33 POWER switch 11 PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch 22 PREV button 18 Protection cover of the audio control section 18 Protection cover of the GUI screen operations section 18 Proxy data recording 100 R REC indicator 27 REC START button 14 Recording using memory cache 83 Recording format 53 Recording review 78 Red tally indicator 27 Remaining battery capacity indicator 21 Remaining clips display 32 Remain
239. ep 4 MENG is not overwritten Returning the scene file settings to the standard settings How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 N Select STANDARD and press the MENU knob O displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to Bl When W changes to O once again the settings of the camcorder are reset to the standard settings If you press the MENU knob again while Bi is displayed the operation is cancelled and the camcorder returns to the settings before STANDARD was selected Jumping to a File Related Menu Page when Connecting a USB Flash Drive A USB flash drive enables you to save user files scene files lens files reference files and ALL files The camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting so that when a USB flash drive holding these files is connected while in menu operating mode a menu page relating to the desired file is automatically displayed on the screen Thus you can proceed to file operation quickly This is very convenient especially when you manage data files using USB flash drives How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the USB MEMORY page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic
240. equired for shooting and time required for recording on the disc Auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects that move very slowly To use this function you need to set the total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME and the length of time for recording on the disc REC TIME The time required for shooting is the time required to capture the very slowly moving subject and the camcorder must be arranged so that during this time the subject is always in the frame The disc recording time indicates the running time of the completed recording The camcorder calculates the time lapse interval from these two times Total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME oo lA Shooting interval p Time for recording on the disc REC TIME Manual Interval Rec mode settings and shooting Manual Interval Rec has the following two modes Single shot mode Each time the REC START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed the camcorder captures to memory a single shot consisting of the specified number of video frames Consecutive mode Once the REC START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed the camcorder captures consecutive shots to memory at the specified interval with each shot consisting of the specified number of video frames To make settings 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select CACHE INTVAL R
241. erial defined by the SMPTE 330M 2004 standard The UMID may be used either as the 32 byte Basic UMID or as the Extended UMID which includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes For details refer to SMPTE 330M Globally unique ID is automatically recorded in clip units The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional information such as location time date company and so on Using the Extended UMID You have to enter a country code organization code and user code Set the country code referring to the ISO 3166 table and set the organization code and user code independently For details see About UMID ownership information page 218 Functions of UMID data The UMID data enables the followings Add a globally unique ID to every clip of audio visual material The unique ID is used to detect the material source and to link it with the original source material Distinguishing between original material and copied material 00 is added to the Instance Number for original material Adjustments and Settings from Menus Recording based on the UTC The UTC is used when recording the UMID This enables uniform control of source material recorded all over the world based on the universal timecode Calculating the date difference among source materials The source material is recorded based on the MJD Modified Julian Date which enables easy calculation of date difference among sou
242. espondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows REARYI WRR LEVEL Audio recording level of channel 1 Setting Control SIDEI LEVEL CH 1 control on the left FRONT MIC LEVEL control F S1 LEVEL CH 1 control linked with MIC LEVEL control REAR2 WRR LEVEL Audio recording level of channel 2 Setting Control SIDE2 LEVEL CH 2 control on the right FRONT MIC LEVEL control F4S2 LEVEL CH 2 control linked with MIC LEVEL control When you have operation of the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together if the MIC LEVEL control is set to 0 the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded Check the position of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls Manually adjusting the audio level of the MIC IN connector If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors the camcorder detects the connection to the AUDIO IN CHI CH2 connectors Thus the AUDIO IN switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors are automatically selected Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CHI CH2 connectors Alternatively set the REAR XLR AUTO item to OFF on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu
243. etails see Setting power REC AUDIO OUT EE SAVE saving functions page 212 TEST OUT SAVE OFF ON Wi Fi DSABL ENABL 08 VF DISP 1 VF DISP OFF ON For details see Selecting the VF DISP MODE 1 2 3 display items page 201 DISP EXTENDER OFF ON DISP FILTER OFF ON DISP WHITE OFF ON DISP GAIN OFF ON DISP SHUTTER OFF ON DISP AUDIO OFF ON DISP DISC OFF ON DISP IRIS OFF ON 09 VF DISP 2 DISP ZOOM OFF ON DISP COLOR TEMP OFF ON DISP BATT REMAIN INT VOLT AUTO DISP DC IN OFF ON DISP 16 9 4 3 ID OFF ON DISP WRR RF LVL OFF ON DISP REC FORMAT OFF ON DISP CLIP NO PB OFF ON DISP TIMECODE OFF ON DISP ALAC OFF ON 10 VF DISP 3 DISP CLIP NAME PLAN AUTO DISP SCENE FILE OFF ON DISP CONT REC OFF ON LOW LIGHT OFF ON LOW LIGHT LEVEL 99 to 99 VF BATT WARNING 1046 2096 ABSOLUTE VALUE OFF ON s6unes pejreieq pue s ejds q nue 9 Jaldeyp 11 VF DISP 4 DISP GPS OFF ON WIRELESS STATUS OFF ON EXT MEDIA OFF ON REMAIN SENDING_CLIP_INFO OFF ON 154 Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 12 U LED GAIN OFF ON For details see Indicators SHUTTER lt gt OFF ON page 27 WHITE PRESET lt gt OFF ON CC 5600K lt gt OFF ON ATW RUN lt gt OFF ON EXTENDER lt gt OFF ON FILTER ND lt gt OFF ON FILTER CC lt gt OFF ON OVERRIDE l
244. etting in memory The user bit setting apart from the real time is automatically retained in memory even when the power is turned off Synchronizing the timecode You can synchronize the internal timecode generator of this camcorder with an external generator for the regeneration of an external timecode You can also synchronize the timecode Setting Time Data generators of other camcorders VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder Connections for timecode synchronization Connect both the reference video signal and the external timecode as illustrated below Example 1 Synchronizing with an external timecode C o e External timecode Reference video signal GENLOCK IN 9 O TC IN a Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu if GENLOCK is set to OFF Example 2 Interconnecting a number of camcorders or timecode synchronization O jO o o To another camcorder to be synchronized Q TEST OUT 1C OUT O TC IN GENLOCK IN 9 a Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu if GENLOCK is set to OFF To lock the timecode to an external source 1 Turnon the POWER switch 2 Setthe PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET J Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN 4 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC 5 Supply a timecode signal and a reference
245. ex Navigating sibling relati 018 036 TCR 01 09 16 13 You can play and search with this screen 4 Use the PLAY PAUSE button or F REV F FWD buttons to display the frame you want You can also perform a jog operation by turning the MENU knob D Press the up arrow button to select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To select index pictures by using the expand and chapter functions After using the expand function see page 116 or chapter function see page 117 to find a frame you can set that frame as the index picture of the clip The following example explains how to do so from the expand thumbnail screen See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the expand thumbnail screen select the thumbnail to set as the index picture 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Set Index Picture A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to set the current frame as the index picture map Set Index Picture O Cancel 4 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob After pressing the RESET RETURN button to return to the clip thumbnail screen check to make sure that the newly selected frame is displayed as the index picture Checking clip properties You can check clip properties such as the title timecode duration date and time of creation and date and time of the more recent modification See page
246. exchange the USB flash drive refer to To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive and copy the proxy data that could not be recorded It is not possible to record proxy data to a USB flash drive only To stop recording Recording to a USB flash drive stops whenever recording to the disc stops To stop recording to the USB flash drive only set MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu to DSABL To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive Proceed as follows to select an already recorded clip on a disc and copy its proxy data to a USB flash drive The following functions stop during execution of a copy Playback cue up Picture Cache recording Advanced Operations for Shooting Bunoous y je1deu 101 Bunooug y je1deuo 102 1 Search for the video of the clip being played or stopped that you want to copy 2 Select COPY CURRENT CLP in the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu and then press the MENU knob The message EXECUTE OK appears 3 Select YES and then press the MENU knob During the execution of the copy the message MEMORY ACCESS appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor where is replaced with a number 0 to 99 that indicates the percentage completed When processing finishes the message COMPLETE appears The proxy data of the current clip the currently stopped clip or the one that b
247. f environment including reporting by pool coverage teams HD SDI SD SDI or composite signals can be selected SD signals can be upconverted and recorded as HD signals Gen lock input connector Enables synchronized operation of multiple units with synchronization possible to either VBS or HD Y signals Audio input connectors Supports AES EBU signal input in addition to microphone input 48 V microphone input and line input Timecode input and output connectors Network connector Enable transfer of MXF format files USB connector Enables use of a Windows USB keyboard or mouse You can also connect a USB flash drive to record proxy data or load planning metadata or connect the optional CBK WAOI Wi Fi Adaptor or CBK WA100 Wireless Adaptor to connect to a wireless LAN network Features for improved performance under various shooting conditions Picture Cache function The unit can utilize its internal memory to continuously record the current video input allowing recording to commence a certain time 2 to 30 seconds in advance of the time when the recording button is pressed and allowing discs to be exchanged seamlessly without interrupting the recording Two optical filters The unit is equipped with separate CC filters and ND filters Noise suppression circuits New noise suppression circuits offer improved performance under difficult evening or nighttime shooting conditions Features Slow shutter function A m
248. f they exist should be displayed with higher priority than names select one of the following under Settings gt Display Title in the Disc Menu On Titlel title1 Display in the order titlel title2 clip or clip list name On Title2 title2 Display in the order title2 titlel clip or clip list name To change the display language according to the area of use see page 36 select the desired language under Settings gt Select Font in the Disc Menu Area of use Select Font Displayable setting setting languages NTSC AREA English Japanese Japan NTSC AREA European English European NTSC area Alphabet languages other than Korean English Korean Japan or PAL Simplified English Simplified AREA Chinese Chinese Traditional English Traditional Chinese Chinese Clip thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of clips on the disc in the order that they were recorded You can use this screen to work with clips deleting or locking them selecting their index pictures adding them to clip lists and so on DUR 00 27 19 04 DUR 00 27 51 09 H qmm Clip name Displays the name or a title of the selected clip see page 107 Selection frame Indicates that the thumbnail is selected To select another thumbnail move the frame see page 115 Multiple selection frames appear when multiple thumbnails are selected see page 114 Clip number total number of c
249. ff Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips Format Disc and so on in the Disc Menu Stopped Setting of CACHE INTVAL REC on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu OFF FTP connection for file operations Disconnected or logged out Recording of video from external devices Disabled Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function Disconnected Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu Values other than VIEW OFF or LIVE MENU ON OFF switch OFF Display the Planning Metadata page of the XDCAM web pages in the web browser of your computer To display the Planning Metadata page proceed in the same way as described in To display the unit s XDCAM web pages page 137 However in step 2 enter http IP address of this unit mobile htm in the address bar Planning Metadata File to send e Professional Disc 2008 Sony Corporation Click Browse to open the Choose File dialog Select the planning metadata file XML you saved on your computer and then click Open The path of the selected file appears in the File to send field Click Execute The planning metadata is loaded into the unit s memory and stored in the General Sony Planning directory on the disc OK appears in the Status field when the transfer is complete Disc Operations su 199 ND ul suoneiedo G 1e1deu 139
250. fied name or title specified by Display Title in the Disc Menu The following characters can be displayed in this area Digits 0 to 9 Alphabetic characters a to z A to Z The following symbols 96 amp comma period colon semicolon lt 2 2 Q L j Gl jh Space 3 System frequency and frame rate During Slow amp Quick Motion shooting and playback displays the system frequency and the frame rate The frame is rounded to a 2 digit integer and displayed in brackets see page 88 This display does not appear during normal shooting and playback MeIAJOAQ JE deUuD Wireless microphone reception level When a UHF portable tuner is installed in the camcorder W appears together with four segment reception level indicators for each of the channels 1 or 2 channels that can be used by the tuner The indications are as follows Normal use The number of white segments indicates the strength of the signal level Muted The number of gray segments indicates the strength of the signal level Reception level over peak P is displayed instead of the indicators P Tuner battery is low The channel number and indicator of the corresponding channel flash P 1 DWR S02D only Fl Power source voltage battery remaining capacity When the unit is powered from a battery pack indicates the remaining capacity of the power source voltage When th
251. file onto a USB flash drive You can load these files from the USB flash drive for immediate recall of a particular setting configuration In addition to user files you can save scene files reference files lens files and ALL files on a USB flash drive When a menu is displayed connecting a USB flash drive displays the appropriate file related menu page automatically Saving user menu data on a USB flash drive You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder as user files on a USB flash drive You can save up to 100 user files on a USB flash drive Connect the USB flash drive then proceed as follows How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 FO IeUSER FILE TOP USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SQUE EXEC F ID QOQOOO000000000000 USER PRESET EXEC Saving and Recalling User Files To set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 2 For details on setting the file ID see To set the file ID page 221 Select USER FILE SAVE and press the MENU knob The USER SAVE page appears Up to 20 pages from P00 to P19 can be used to save user files on the USB flash drive Each page can hold up to five files Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file
252. file with the same name in the C part is generated automatically c When a C MXF file is created a C SO1 MXF file with the same name in the C part is generated automatically UserData directory d When a C MXF file is deleted the C SO1 MXF file with the same name in the C part is also deleted automatically Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Any file Yes Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes a UTF 8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length Depending on the character type file names including extension may be limited to 21 characters General directory The following directory operations are possible in the UserData directory Directory creation up to 62 levels including the UserData directory Deletion and renaming of directories File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Any file Yes Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes a UTF 8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length Depending on the character type file names including extension may be limited to 21 characters The following directory operations are possible in the General directory Directory creation up to 63 levels including the General directory Deletion and renaming of directories Overview The maximum number of files that can be created on one disc includi
253. for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu 2 Select Add Sub Clips and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Clip List Add screen appears Clip List Add 002 lt 017 035 L TE TC00 30 4013 TC 01 01 28 25 TC00094314 FEL t E J TC00242429 TC00243427 TC00244622 TC00245624 Prom 00 19 48 24 m sl Lara Scene Selection gt 3 Select the sub clips that you want to add from the upper part of the screen the part where 8 thumbnails are displayed multiple selections possible To select from expanded thumbnails Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button to display the expand thumbnail screen To select from chapter thumbnails Press the HOLD CHAPTER button to display the chapter thumbnail screen 4 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The thumbnail selection is confirmed and an Icursor appears at the bottom of the Clip List Add screen in the Scene Selection window The I cursor indicates the location where the currently selected sub clips will be inserted To display the total duration after addition of the selected clips Press the SHIFT button D Im the Scene Selection window move the I cursor to the location where you want to insert the clip The existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and right of the I cursor 6 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The sub clips are added at the I cursor positi
254. for the Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark 9 essence marks that correspond to the 0 to 9 keys ona USB keyboard When planning metadata that contains user defined essence mark name strings is loaded into this unit s memory the unit displays those names for the essence marks that correspond to the keys and that are recorded when the keys are pressed See page 82 for more information about recording essence marks and see page 96 for more information about how to load files Bunooug y e1deuo Essence mark name string format Use a text editor to enter essence mark names in the sections indicated by shading in Essence mark name string example Names can be either in ASCII format up to 32 characters or UTF 8 format up to 16 characters If a name string contains even one non ASCII character the maximum length of that string is 16 characters Essence mark name string example lt xml pversion I 0 pencoding UTF 8 2 gt e4 PlanningMetadata xmlns http xmins sony net pro metadata planningmetadata spassignId H00123 creationDate 2009 04 15T08 00 00Z lastUpdate 2009 04 15T15 00 00Z oversion I 00 gt 4 lt Properties propriii assignment sp class original update 2009 04 15T15 00 00Z modifiedB y Chris gt 4 lt Title usAscii Football Game xml lang en gt Football Game 15 04 2009 lt Title gt 4 Meta name _ShotMark1 peontent Goal gt 4 98 Advanced Operations for Shooting lt Meta name
255. from 0 to 99 Clip information During shooting displays information about the clip being recorded or the clip to be recorded next During playback displays information about the playback clip The information that appears depends on the setting of DISP CLIP NAME on the VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu You can also set DISP CLIP NO PB on the VF DISP 2 page of the OPERATION menu to ON to display the clip number and total number of clips during playback When DISP CLIP NAME is set to PLAN During shooting when Planning Clip Name Display in the Disc Menu is set to Enable this area displays the title specified in the currently loaded planning metadata The display format follows the setting of Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area in the Disc Menu When DISP CLIP NAME is set to AUTO During shooting this area displays one of the following depending on the setting of AUTO NAMING on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu e CSI or TITLE The clip name standard name user specified name or title specified by Display Title in the Disc Menu PLAN During shooting when Planning Clip Name Display in the Disc Menu is set to Enable the title specified in the currently loaded planning metadata The display format follows the setting of Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area in the Disc Menu During playback this area displays the clip name standard name user speci
256. gging function is disabled automatically whenever you enable the proxy data recording function To record proxy data while synchronizing with disc recording 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector 2 Check the memory symbol and the memory remaining display see page 30 3 After confirming that the USB flash drive has enough free capacity press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording as normal P The clip s proxy data is written to the USB flash drive at the same time that the clip is recorded to the disc 1 After the unit is powered on some time is required for the memory symbol to appear However if the connected USB flash drive has enough free memory and recording is enabled then recording of proxy data to the USB flash drive begins as soon as recording starts even if the memory symbol has not yet appeared The proxy data is the same data as the proxy data for clips that are recorded to the disc If you start recording immediately after powering the unit on and then stop recording after only a short time the recording operation does not end until the unit has recognized the USB flash drive and recorded the proxy data to it Note that if you enable this function and start recording without connecting a USB flash drive recording will take longer because the unit will require more time to recognize that no flash drive is connected The message USB MEMORY INHIBIT or
257. h once per second and the disc is ejected If the message DISC FULL appears You can continue recording because video and audio continue to be saved to internal memory Press the EJECT button and continue to step 3 Do not stop recording before pressing the EJECT button If you stop recording the unit will stop storing video and audio in internal memory and this function will not work Quickly remove the disc insert a formatted blank disc and close the cover When the disc is loaded the REC recording red tally indicator in the viewfinder and the tally indicator change to lit and recording continues If the REC indicator and tally indicator begin flashing rapidly during the disc exchange If the indicators change to flashing twice per second that means that the unit s internal memory is almost full Complete the disc exchange quickly If you insert a disc that cannot be recorded such as a full disc or one with the Write Inhibit tab of the disc set to the recording disabled position the unit ejects that disc as soon as it is recognized Recording may not start immediately if you insert an unformatted disc or a disc that already contains a large number of clips As a result the video and audio may be interrupted Advanced Operations for Shooting Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function Normally a clip is created as an independent file each time that you start and stop recording But this f
258. h as the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected see page 48 Lens cable clamp Clamp a lens cable MIC IN microphone input 48 V connector XLR type 5 pin female Connect a stereo microphone to this connector The power 48 V is supplied via this connector LENS connector 12 pin Connect a lens cable to this connector When connecting the lens cable to this connector power off this unit first Tripod mount When using the unit on a tripod attach the tripod adaptor optional Lens mount special bayonet mount Attach the lens Consult a Sony representative for information about available lenses Lens locking lever After inserting the lens in the lens mount rotate the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position After locking the lens be sure to use the lens mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from becoming detached Lens mount cap Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever When no lens is mounted keep this cap fitted for protection from dust CA camera adaptor connector 50 pin Remove the connector cover and connect the 50 pin connector of the optional CA FB70 TX70 Camera Adaptor Due to be supported from package version 2 30 Refer to the Operation Manual of the CA FB70 TX70 for more information about how to mount it Operating and connectors section Front Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls M Q
259. hannels 3 and 4 independently for each channel or in stereo mode or not at all OFF AU AGC SPEC 6dB 9dB AGC saturation level setting 12dB 15dB 17dB AU LIMITER OFF 6dB For manual audio input level adjustment MODE 9dB 12dB selects the limiter saturation level for loud 15dB 17dB input signals AU OUT LIMITER OFF ON Turns the audio output limiter on or off Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 Jajdeyo 173 No Page Item Settings Description 08 AUDIO 3 AU SG 1KHz ON OFF AUTO Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone during the Color Bar mode or not ON A 1 KHz test tone is output during the Color Bar mode OFF A 1 KHz test tone is not output during the Color Bar mode AUTO A 1 KHz test tone is output only when the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 switch on the inside panel is in the AUTO position MIC CHI LEVEL SIDEI FRONT When recording the front microphone sound F S1 on CH 1 selects which control is to be used for the level adjustment SIDE 1 LEVEL control left side FRONT MIC LEVEL control F S1 LEVEL control left side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2 FRONT When recording the front microphone sound F S2 on CH 2 selects which control is to be used for the level adjustment SIDE 2 LEVEL control right side FRONT MIC LEVEL control F4S2 LEVEL control right side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linke
260. he CAC 12 1 Attach the electret condenser microphone D Loosen the ball joint lock lever Wind the microphone spacer sheet type supplied with this unit and the microphone around the microphone while peeling off the protective sheets on both sides of the microphone spacer 3 Place the microphone in the holder so that UP is at the top 4 Close the microphone holder 8 Tighten the screw 6 Position so that the microphone does not interfere with the viewfinder and tighten the ball joint lock lever When attaching the ECM 678 673 use the microphone adaptor supplied with the CAC 12 Microphone Holder Microphone Preparing the Audio Input System 2 Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector J Set the switches as follows Set the LINE AES EBU MIC selector to MIC Set the 48V OFF switch indicated below depending on the power supply type of the microphone Internal power supply Set the 48V OFF switch to OFF External power supply Set the 48V OFF switch to 48V Setthe AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switch for the channel to which the microphone is connected to REAR for CH 1 CH 2 or R for CH 3 CH 4 48V OFF switch Monaural microphone AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector 4 Switch the input level to match the sensitivity of the microphone used Switch the input level by changing the REA
261. he CACHE INTVAL REC setting to OFF on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu Shooting with Slow amp Quick Motion Due to be supported from package version 2 30 When the recording format is MPEG HD422 50 Mbps and the resolution system frequency is 1080 23 98P 1080 25P or 1080 29 97P you can specify a recording frame rate that is different from the playback frame rate By shooting with this function you can obtain smooth slow motion and fast motion effects No audio is recorded during Slow amp Quick Motion shooting Slow amp Quick Motion cannot be enabled when the unit is set up to record external input video Switch to shooting with the camera see page 98 The following functions are disabled automatically whenever you enable the Slow amp Quick Motion function Picture Cache function Interval Rec function Disc Exchange Cache function Clip Continuous Rec function Live Logging function When you enable Slow amp Quick Motion limitations apply to the values that can be selected for the following items Gain value 0 to 12 dB only Color bar signal 10096 only Timecode is recorded as R RUN during Slow amp Quick Motion shooting Lower resolution in the vertical direction may be evident in video recorded at frame rates of 25P or higher 1080 23 98P 26P or higher 1080 25P and 31P or higher 1080 29 97P Slow amp Quick Motion can be used only with certain settings including
262. he MENU knob To sort clip lists See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 2 In the clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu Select Settings and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Select Sort Clip List by and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Select one of the following sort methods and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Name A Z Sort in ascending order by clip list name Date Newest First Sort by date and time of clip list creation newest first Clip lists will be displayed in the specified order the next time that you carry out an operation such as loading a clip list Disc Operations Checking disc properties See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Disc Properties and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Disc Properties screen appears Disc Properties User Disc ID 12345 Title1 One of the memories of sum gt Title2 none Total DUR 01 23 45 00 Remain 031min Rewrite 1234times Horizontal Scroll User Disc ID User disc ID Title1 Title 1 Title2 Title 2 Total DUR Total recording time Remain Remaining recording time Rewrite Number of times rewritten 1 Titles can be displayed in European languages when the area of use see page 38 is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA To scroll hi
263. he MENU knob to change the setting Depending on the direction of turning the knob the setting value increases decreases switches between ON and OFF and so on To interrupt changing the settings Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF By setting the MENU ON OFF switch to ON again the values that were displayed when you interrupted the setting operations will reappear so you can continue making settings Press the MENU knob changes to and changes to The selection is confirmed To continue setting other items on the same page repeat steps from 4 to 6 8 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen To cancel a change or return to the standard settings Depending on the setting item in some cases only the function to return to the standard setting is valid 1 Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the above procedure flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position The message CANCEL DATA OK appears 2 Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position again The message CANCEL DATA appears to indicate that the change has been cancelled 3 To return to the standard settings after pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the above procedure flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST posi
264. he RET button a low speed reverse search begins at a position two seconds before the recording end position When you release the RET button the reverse search stops and playback in the forward direction begins After playback the camcorder is ready to start recording again By assigning the same function as that of the RET button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 5 switch you can use the switch in the same way as the lens RET button On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches see page 209 Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required for shooting Each time you repeat steps 5 and 6 successive clips are recorded on the disc Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 REC REC iss REC ie REC START STOP START STOP START STOP tis not possible to record a clip shorter than 2 seconds If you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting this results in a 2 second clip The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on a single disc is 300 If an attempt is made to record more than 300 clips the error message MAX Clips appears even if there is free capacity on the disc Playback control buttons During recording the playback control buttons EJECT F REV F FWD NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE STOP have no effect Playing back the recorded clip Normal playback By pressing the PLAY PAUSE button you can review any length of recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the LCD monitor Ther
265. he SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A software keyboard appears so that you can enter a setting 9 Select Connect and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The settings are saved and the Connecting Status screen appears Upload Clips via Direct FTP Connecting Status IQ Open Remote Host H9 FTP Login Change Directory The following table lists the various stages that appear in the connection status screen and describes the corresponding processing Item Description DNS Name When host was specified by a Resolving host name instead of an IP address the unit is querying a DNS server for the host s IP address ping echo The unit has issued a ping back communications established command and is waiting for a response Open Remote The unit is connecting to the Host remote host over the specified port FTP Login The unit is logging in to the remote host with specified user name and password Change Directory When a path was specified the unit is changing to the specified directory The status indicated beside each item lights in yellow during processing for that item and lights in green when the processing finishes If an error occurs The status indicator changes to red Correct the condition that caused the error and repeat the operation If you cannot connect Check the following points Make sure that this unit and the remote host are correctly
266. he SHIFT button held down Clip Navigating sibling relati 018 036 TC 00 24 34 27 v i49 pAre amp mME 30 NOV 2005 14 14 our 0 23 22 26 TC 0024 46 22 Searching with thumbnails Byusing the thumbnails that appear in the various thumbnail screens you can easily cue up and play clips and sub clips Using thumbnails to find clips The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails of all clips recorded on the disc You can use this screen to cue up the selected clip and to carry out playback see page 118 Thumbnail Operations See Selecting thumbnails page 115 for more information Using the expand function to find scenes The expand function allows you to divide a selected clip into equally sized blocks and to display thumbnails of the first frame in each block This is a quick and efficient way to review the selected clip and search for target scenes You can specify 12 144 or 1728 divisions The maximum number of blocks may be other than 1728 when the recorded duration of the clip is short In this case the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is fixed at 1 frame This allows you to view expanded thumbnails at equal intervals See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip that contains the scene you want to find 2 Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button The selected clip is divided into 12 blocks and a list appea
267. he SHIFT button held down press the left or right arrow button To return to the previous screen Press the RESET RETURN button To move from a menu level to the next lower or higher menu level For a menu item displayed together with a or 4 mark you can move to the next lower or higher menu level by pressing the right or left arrow button To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a P or 4 mark is displayed for an item you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view To increment and decrement numbers Do one of the following Press the up or down arrow button Turn the MENU knob To confirm selections Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Thumbnail Operations You can use thumbnail screens to display clip information and to find protect and delete clips The thumbnails provide visual confirmation of these and other operations Selecting thumbnails The thumbnail selection frame see page 107 indicates the currently selected thumbnail To move the thumbnail selection frame Turn the MENU knob or press the arrow buttons To skip quickly through thumbnails Skip Scroll function When you have a large number of thumbnails like in expand thumbnail screen you can use the Skip Scroll function to skip through them quickly See page 114 for
268. he gains corresponding to the L M and H settings can be selected in the menu The factory settings are L 0 dB M 6 dB and H 12 dB When this switch is adjusted the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about three seconds For details see Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions page 208 El OUTPUT DCC output signal dynamic contrast control switch Switches the video signal which is output to the video disc drive referred to as VDR viewfinder and video monitor from the camera section between the following two BARS Outputs the color bar signal CAM Outputs the video signal from the camera When this is selected you can switch DCC D on and off 1 DCC Dynamic Contrast Control Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject objects in the background will be lost in the glare The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is particularly effective in the following cases Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day Shooting a subject indoors against a background through a window Any high contrast scene Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls E WHITE BAL white balance memory switch Controls adjustment of the white balance PRST Adjusts the color temperature to the preset value the factory default setting 3200K Use t
269. he initial value to any number How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page on the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select NUMERIC and then press the MENU knob 3 Move E onto the digit you want to change and then press the MENU knob 4 Turn the MENU knob to move lil onto the desired digit in the list of selectable digits and then press the MENU knob 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the remaining digits 6 When you have finished entering the value turn the MENU knob to move B to END and then press the MENU knob The camcorder exits numeric input mode and the original CLIP TITLE page appears To check clip titles Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen and select the clip whose title you want to check The title of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen See Clip thumbnail screen page 107 for more information about the thumbnail screen tis not possible to specify 00000 as the initial value Even if you enter 00000 the value is reset to 00001 when the camcorder exits numeric input mode The value of the serial number is incremented by 1 every time a title is generated When the value reaches 99999 the next number restarts from 00001 Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the serial number after recording seve
270. he knee point level 109 0 KNEE SLOPE M 99 to 99 Set the knee slope level KNEE SATURATION OFF ON Turns the knee saturation function on or off KNEE SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the knee saturation level WHITE CLIP OFF ON Turns the white clipping function on or off WHITE CLIP LEVEL NTSC 90 0 to Adjusts the white clipping level 108 0 to 109 0 PAL 90 0 to 105 0 to 109 0 07 KNEE 2 KNEE SATURATION OFF ON Turns the Knee Saturation function on and off KNEE POINT R 45 096 to 0 0 to When KNEE SATURATION is 14 0 set to OFF set the RGB knee KNEE SLOPE R 99 to 99 point levels and knee slope levels KNEE POINT G 45 0 to 0 0 to individually 14 0 KNEE SLOPE G 99 to 99 KNEE POINT B 45 096 to 0 0 to 14 0 KNEE SLOPE B 99 to 99 08 DETAIL 1 DETAIL OFF ON Sets the detail correction function on or off APERTURE OFF ON Turns the aperture correction function on or off DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the general level of the detail signal APERTURE LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the aperture correction level DTL H V RATIO 99 to 99 Sets the level of the V detail signal CRISPENING 99 to 99 Sets the crispening level LEVEL DEPEND OFF ON Turns the level depend function on or off LEVEL DEPEND LVL 99 to 99 Sets the level of the level depend DETAIL FREQUENCY 99 to 99 Sets the frequency of the H detail signal Menu List No
271. he specified directory No specification To the root directory Input example CWD General CDUP Moves one level up in the directory structure makes the parent of the current directory be the current directory Syntax CDUP lt CRLF gt MKD Creates a new directory Directories can be created only in the General directory For details see File operation restrictions page 229 Syntax MKD SP path name lt CRLF gt RMD Deletes a directory Directories can be deleted only in the General directory For details see File operation restrictions page 229 Syntax RMD SP path name lt CRLF gt MDTM Acquires the date and time of the most recent modification of the file in the format FTP File Operations suonejedo e g 1e1deuj 237 suoneledo ei 9 sajdeup 238 YYYYMMDDhhmmss YYYY year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second The date and time cannot be acquired in the following cases When the path name includes a wildcard replaced by any string of characters or replaced by any single character When the size of the path name is greater than 1023 bytes Syntax MDTM SP path name lt CRLF gt Input example MDTM PROAV DISCMETA XML Extended commands In the command syntax column SP means a space entered by pressing the space bar and lt CRLF gt means a new line entered by pressing the Enter key SITE REPF Sends a
272. he unit and on its surfaces for greater reliability in high temperature environments Reliability is also enhanced by the drip proof design Recording can continue even when the unit is subjected to jarring shocks because data is stored in shockproof memory before being recorded to the media Reliable recording is ensured by a recording verification function similar to the confidence playback function of tape recorders qualifying the unit for use in demanding broadcast applications Multi format support The unit supports various system frequencies 1080 59 94i 1080 29 97P 1080 50i 1080 25P 1080 23 98P 720 59 94P and 720 50p offering the flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording It also supports recording and playback of SD signals both NTSC and PAL allowing a stepwise transition from SD to HD systems A multi format conversion function enables up and down conversion between SD and HD and cross conversion between 1080 and 720 Squeeze or edge cropping can be selected as the aspect pattern in up and down conversion between SD and HD It is not possible to combine material recorded in different frame frequency groups on single disc see page 54 Recording of more than 90 minutes of high quality video and audio data Signals captured by the full HD 1920 x 1080 image sensors are recorded in MPEG HD422 format P for consistently high image quality 2 The unit supports recording of four audio channels
273. his setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance A or B Recall the white balance adjustment settings already stored in A or B Flick the AUTO W B BAL switch see page 14 on the WHT side to automatically adjust the white balance and save the adjustment settings in memory A or memory B However the white balance does not function while ATW P is operating even if the AUTO W B BAL switch is set to the WHT position B ATW When this switch is set to B and WHITE SWITCH B is set to ATW on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu ATW is activated When this switch is adjusted the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about three seconds 1 ATW Auto Tracing White Balance The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions STATUS ON SEL OFF menu display on page selection display off switch To enable this switch set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF ON SEL Each time this switch is pushed upward a window to confirm the menu settings and status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen The window consists of four pages which are switched each time the switch is pushed upward Each page is displayed for about 10 seconds OFF To clear the page immediately after display push this switch down to the OF
274. hot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode or recording in that mode 2 flashes per second BATT battery indicator This indicator starts flashing when the battery connected to the camcorder is nearly exhausted and stays lit when the battery is completely exhausted To prevent interruption during operation replace the battery as soon as this indicator starts flashing The battery power level at which the indicator starts flashing can be set on the BATTERY 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu For details see page 171 REC recording red tally indicator Lights up while camcorder is recording This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings in the same manner as the tally indicator and the camera operator tally indicator Viewfinder screen VTR SAVE indicator This indicator lights when the VDR SAVE STBY switch is set to SAVE putting the VDR into power save mode warning indicator This indicator lights when any of the following conditions occurs with the corresponding item set to ON on the LED page of the OPERATION menu The gain is set to other than 0 dB The SHUTTER selector is not set to the standard setting 1 2 The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST ATW is enabled The lens extender is used The FILTER selector is set to other than ND 1 The reference value of auto iris adjustment is not the standard value Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls M Q 491deuo 27
275. hronized with the external timecode value Therefore each camcorder can have its own user bit settings You can lock the users bits of this camcorder to the user bits of external timecode by setting EXT LK UBIT in the TIMECODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu to EXT To release the timecode synchronization First disconnect the external timecode then set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN To change the power supply from the battery pack to an external power supply during timecode synchronization To maintain a continuous power supply connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack You may lose timecode synchronization if you remove the battery pack first Camera synchronization during timecode synchronization During timecode synchronization the camera is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector Setting Time Data Shooting Handling Discs Discs used for recording and playback The following Professional Discs D can be used for recording and playback on this unit PFD23A capacity 23 3 GB PFD50DLA capacity 50 0 GB 1 Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation tis not possible to use the following discs for recording or playback on this unit Blu ray Disc Professional Disc for Data PFDSODLA discs can be used only by XDCAM devices with the DL mark see the following illustration They cannot be used by XDCAM devi
276. humbnails and the number of the selected thumbnail n Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 107 Clip name Displays the name or a title of the expanded clip see page 107 3 Duration Displays the time from the selected thumbnail to the next one Chapter thumbnail screen Chapters are the sections between the shot marks Rec Start marks and other essence marks that have been recorded in clips This screen allows you to display thumbnails of the chapters in the selected clip Shot marks can be set by the user during recording and playback They can be deleted and moved Essence marks other than shot marks are set automatically They cannot be deleted or moved 2 Chapter of eif ea E S a TC00250025 Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 107 Clip number total clips Displays the total number of clips on the disc and the number of the clip that contains the displayed chapters If the essence mark name is a user defined name it is displayed between quotation marks for example as Chapter Touch Down see page 136 S1 S2 RS marks The S1 S2 and RS marks on the thumbnails indicate frames where Shot Markl Shot Mark2 and Rec Start essence marks are set Overview Su99JoS 15 ui suonejedo s Jejdeu 109 SueeJog MH ul suonejedo c Jajdeyo 110 El Chapter number total chapters Displays the total
277. humbnails of the clips that you want to lock 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Lock Unlock Clip 4 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A lock icon see page 108 appears on the thumbnail of the locked clips In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down To lock all clips 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Lock or Delete All Clips and then select Lock All Clips A message appears asking you to confirm locking all clips 3 Select OK to lock all clips or Cancel to cancel it and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To unlock a specific clip See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to unlock 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Lock Unlock Clip A message appears asking you to confirm the unlocking Unlock Clip C0004 Unlock this Clip e 4 4 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down To unlock all clips 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Lock or Delete All Clips and then select Unlock All Clips A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to unlock all clips 3 Select OK to execute the unlock or Cancel to cancel it and then press the SET S SEL bu
278. ibution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Trademarks and Licenses ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot
279. iewfinder is set to on the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen For details see Selecting the display items page 201 To display the TOP menu With no menu displayed on the screen hold down the MENU knob and set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON Depending on the internal switch settings display of the TOP menu may be disabled For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Basic menu operations By pressing and turning the MENU knob you can set various menu items In the remainder of this section the LCD monitor is generally shown as an example of the menu display but a similar display also appears on the viewfinder screen To select the setting items and values on the menu Turn the MENU knob to select in the cases explained below Menu Operations sBumes pojrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuay 9 1e1deu 193 To scroll pages 00S5 REC FUNCTION SLOW amp QUICK FRAME RATE CACHE INTVAL REC When blinks turn the MENU knob to switch pages To select a menu or setting item 00100UTPUT1 00100UTPUT1 SDI OUT1 SELECT e SDI OUT1 SELECT When appears turn the MENU knob to move up and down To change a setting value 00100UTPUT1 00100UTPUT1 SDI OUT SDI OUT When blinks turn the MENU knob to change the setting ON OFF value etc To confirm the selection of a menu a setting item or a setting value Each time you press th
280. imecode will no longer be consecutive when you use the original disc again for recording In this case to make the timecode consecutive set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to REGEN Saving the real Time in the Timecode Setting the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode When it is necessary to set the actual time use the TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu For details see Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock page 39 Setting the user bits By setting the user bits up to 8 hexadecimal digits you can record user information such as the date time or scene number on the timecode track Setting Time Data Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjuswysnipy e Je deyo 69 Bunooys 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo 70 RESET RETURN button EXPAND CHAPTER COUNTER RC U BIT Re CLOCK TH Set the DISPLAY switch to U BIT 2 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit flashes 3 Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit Repeat until all digits are set To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET RETURN button 4 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN or R RUN corresponding to the desired operating mode for the timecode generator The set user bit data will be recorded for both LTC and VITC To store the user bit s
281. in an edit box Moves the focus to OK When OK or Cancel has the focus Exits the software keyboard Enter Esc When the cursor is in an edit box moves the focus to Cancel Tab Moves the focus between OK and Cancel Thumbnail Operations SU99498 f15 ul suogeiado g 1e1deu 123 SueeJog MH ui suonejedo c Jajdeyo 124 USB mouse functions You can use the mouse to move the cursor on the software keyboard You can also left click on a key to enter the character for that key To change the speed of the mouse pointer In the Disc Menu select Settings gt Select Mouse Pointer Speed and then select the desired speed Adjust according to the selected mouse To exit the software keyboard from a USB keyboard 1 With the cursor in an edit box press the Enter key to move the focus to OK 2 Do one of the following To confirm the edit and then exit the software keyboard While OK is selected press the Enter key To discard the edit and then exit the software keyboard On the USB keyboard press the l key or the Tab key to move to Cancel and then press the Enter key To continue editing Press any key except the Enter key the Esc key and the Tab key Setting clip flags You can set three types of clip flags OK NG KP KEEP during recording or playback Setting these flags in each clip that you record makes it easy for editors and other colleagues to find an
282. in use This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings in the same manner as the tally indicator and the REC indicator in the viewfinder Eyecup Indicators and status display For details see Status display on the viewfinder screen page 27 Diopter adjustment ring Allows for optimal focus adjustment Tally indicator Lights up while camcorder is recording Set the TALLY switch to OFF when not in use The brightness can also be adjusted with the TALLY switch This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings in the same manner as the camera operator tally indicator and the REC indicator in the viewfinder El PEAKING control Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture sharpness and makes focusing easier This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder E CONTRAST control Adjusts the contrast of the screen This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder BRIGHT control Adjusts the brightness of the screen This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder TALLY switch Controls the tally indicator located on the front of the viewfinder HIGH The tally indicator brightness is set to high OFF The tally indicator is disabled LOW The tally indicator brightness is set to low ZEBRA zebra pattern switch Controls the zebra pattern display on the viewfinder screen as follows ON A zebra pattern appears and stays OFF The zebra p
283. ing 1 2 3 When the filter FILTER n where N N Y selection has been n 1 2 3 4 changed When the gain GAIN n wheren N N Y setting has been 6dB 3dB OdB changed 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB When the setting of WHITE n wheren N N Y the WHITE BAL A CH B CH switch has been PRESET or ATW changed RUN When the DCC ON or OFF N Y Y OUTPUT DCC switch has been set to DCC ON or OFF When the shutter SHUTTER NYY speed and mode 1 100 or 1 125 setting has been 1 250 1 500 changed a 1 1000 1 2000 ECS When the blackor E g AWB OK NYY white balance has been adjusted a This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER selector is set to ON Changing the display mode 1 Display the VF DISP 1 page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 Select VF DISP MODE and press the MENU knob 3 Select the desired display mode and press the MENU knob Setting the marker display Switch the display of the center and safety zone markers on or off and select whether the area indicated by the safety zone marker is 80 90 92 5 or 95 of the screen area How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the MARKER 1 or MARKER 2 page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu ope
284. ing notes Storage of images to memory begins after you select Picture Cache mode If you begin recording immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode images from before the selection will not be recorded During playback recording review or GUI screen operations no data is saved to the Picture Cache memory Thus it is not possible to use this function to rerecord the last few seconds of material from playback or recording review To set the Picture Cache mode Picture Cache time How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu 005OREC FUNCTION SLOU amp QUICK FRAME RATE CACHE INTVAL REC DISC EXCHG CACHE CLIP CONT REC LIVE LOGGING For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select CACHE REC and turn the MENU knob to display CACHE 3 Select CACHE REC TIME and turn the MENU knob to display the desired Picture Cache time As you turn the MENU knob the Picture Cache time changes as follows 0 2s 2 4s gt 4 6s lt gt 6 85 gt 8 10s gt 18 20s lt gt 28 30s Advanced Operations for Shooting Dunoous y je1deu 83 Bunooug y je1deuo 84 The Picture Cache mode settings once made continue to be effective until changed You can assign the Picture Cache on off function to one of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 5 switches or RET button on the lens For
285. ing Clips that have been Metadata recorded according to the instructions in the currently loaded planning metadata AV Format of Video format of the Selected Clip selected clips 6 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A filter thumbnail screen appears showing only clips that meet the specified condition The filtering condition appears at the lower left of the screen Filter C0010 005 005 NG TC 00 24 45 11 ING TC 00 25 06 14 Clip Flag NG 30 NOV 2005 13 40 pur 0 00 04 14 7 it you want to filter the clips again with a different filtering condition to narrow down the filtering results repeat steps 2 to 6 The command name selected in step 4 changes to Filter Clips Narrowing To play selected clips continuously Register all of the filtered clips in an automatically generated clip list and play the clip list 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the filter thumbnail screen 2 Select Copy to Clip List and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A clip list thumbnail screen appears showing filtered clips that have been registered in the clip list Thumbnail Operations SueeiJoS IND ui suonejedo g Jeydeuj 119 SU9BINS f15 ul SuoHesadO Gg Ja deyuD 120 Clip List no name 001 007 A o SS TC 00 00 04 14 TC 00 00 12 04 TC 00 00 20 13 PA JE TC 00 00 28 08 TC 00 00 35 15 TC 00 00 46 08 New File TOTAL DUR CKE 3 Press the PLAY PAUSE button The screen ch
286. ing clip information 120 selecting multiple thumbnails 116 Thumbnail image setting 83 THUMBNAIL indicator 22 Thumbnail Menu 110 THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK button 22 Time counter display 20 Time data 69 Time setting 39 Timecode 31 setting 69 synchronizing 70 Time lapse recording 84 TOP menu 149 Tripod mount 13 Tripod mounting 47 U UHF portable tuner attaching 45 UMID data setting 218 USB connector 25 USB flash drive jumping to file related menu page 226 loading saved data 222 saving user menu data 220 User bits setting 69 User gamma file 189 USER menu 149 editing 197 resetting 200 USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu 150 User menu data loading 222 saving 220 V VDR SAVE STBY switch 16 VF connector 13 Video format 20 28 setting 54 Video from external devices recording 98 Video light connecting 48 Viewfinder adjusting focus 37 adjusting position 35 adjusting screen 38 attaching 34 cleaning 244 detaching eyepiece 37 HDVF 20A optional 26 moving shoe up 35 rotation bracket 36 screen 27 selecting display items 201 setting 204 status display 27 Viewfinder cable 27 Viewfinder fitting shoe 12 Viewfinder front to back positioning knob 13 Viewfinder front to back positioning lever 12 Viewfinder left to right positioning ring 12 VTR SAVE indicator 27 xepu W WARNING indicator 18 Warning indicator area 20 Warnings 246 Web Thumbnail function 137 WHITE BAL switch 16 White balance adjusting 57 Index 277
287. ing disc capacity 32 Remaining disc capacity indicator 21 REMOTE connector 25 Remote control unit connecting 50 RESET RETURN button 19 Resolution 19 Retake function 91 Index S Scene editing 126 finding 116 117 playback 118 Scene file loading 225 saving 223 Scene selection 126 Scrollbar 107 SDIIN OPTION connector 23 SDI OUT 1 connector 25 SDI OUT 2 connector 25 SET S SEL button 22 Setting change and adjustment progress message display area 31 SHIFT button 22 Shooting advanced operations 82 basic procedure 77 Shortcut list 147 Shot data recording 205 Shot ID setting 205 Shot mark recording 82 Shoulder pad 13 adjusting position 50 Shoulder strap fitting 12 Shoulder strap using 49 Shutter mode 60 SHUTTER selector 14 Shutter speed 31 61 Skip scroll 115 Slow amp Quick Motion shooting 88 Slow shutter function 61 SLS Slow Speed Shutter mode 61 Specifications 257 Status confirmation screen 206 Status display 20 STATUS ON SEL OFF switch 16 STOP button 18 Stopper 26 Sub clip 127 adding 128 changing start timecode 131 deleting 130 reordering 129 trimming 130 SUB CLIP indicator 22 SUB CLIP DISC MENU button 22 System frequency 20 setting 53 System frequency and frame rate 29 T TALLY indicator 24 27 Tally indicator 26 TALLY switch 24 26 TC IN connector 24 TC OUT connector 24 TEST OUT connector 24 Testing 240 Thumbnail display items 108 operations 115 searching 116 selecting 115 select
288. ing ring Stopper 2 Couple the viewfinder connector to the VF connector VF connector Detaching the viewfinder You can carry out this by following the attaching procedure in reverse order but there is an additional action to take when detaching the viewfinder from the fitting shoe pull up the stopper Adjusting the viewfinder position To adjust the viewfinder left right position loosen the left right positioning ring and to adjust the front back position loosen the front to back positioning knob Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Viewfinder front to back positioning knob suoneiedeJjg z 1e1deuj Moving the viewfinder shoe up 1 Loosen the front to back viewfinder positioning levers and the front to back viewfinder positioning knobs and then pull the viewfinder slide assembly forward Using a 2 5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench detach the viewfinder slide assembly and handle front cover Attaching the Viewfinder 35 Handle front cover Using the BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket By fitting a BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket not supplied you can rotate the reer al hola viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder Viewfinder slide assembly suongeredejd z ejdeuj 3 Attach the handle front cover with the bottom edge up 1 Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the previous section Moving the vie
289. ing shoe Attach an optional accessory such as a video light see page 48 Viewfinder front to back positioning lever To adjust the viewfinder position in the front to back direction loosen this lever and the LOCK knob After adjustment retighten this lever and the LOCK knob Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Loosen this ring to adjust the left to right position of the viewfinder see page 35 Viewfinder fitting shoe Attach an optional viewfinder 3 VE viewfinder connector 20 pin Connect an optional viewfinder Consult a Sony representative for information about available viewfinders Lens mount securing rubber After locking the lens in position using the lens locking lever fit this rubber over the lower of the two projections This fixes the lens mount preventing it from coming loose Fl Viewfinder front to back positioning knob LOCK knob Loosen this knob to adjust the front to back position of the viewfinder see page 35 E Fitting for microphone holder Fit an optional CAC 12 Microphone Holder see page 43 Shoulder pad Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the position in the front to rear direction Adjust the position for maximum convenience when operating the unit on your shoulder For details of the adjustment see Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position page 50 LIGHT video light connector 2 pin female A video light with a maximum power consumption of 50 W suc
290. input signal for audio recording is selected automatically and therefore this setting is not required Q AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches To DC OUT connector To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector LINE AES EBU MIC selectors Connecting line input audio equipment Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO IN CHI or CH2 connector Switch settings Set the LINE AES EBU MIC selector for the channel to which the audio signal source is connected to LINE Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded With the XLR connection automatic detection function being off the factory default setting A signal must be selected for audio recording by setting the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch to REAR depending on which of the AUDIO IN CHI and CH2 connectors is used for connecting the external audio equipment With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on When a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CHI or CH2 connector the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu with the REAR XLR AUTO item AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector Audio equipment LINE AES EBU MIC selectors
291. ion about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip list thumbnail screen select a thumbnail 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Trim Sub Clip and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Clip List Trim screen appears 001 034 Clip List Trim Total 00 13 48 24 pur 00 00 21 27 Ww 01 17 33 08 our 01 17 55 05 TCR 01 17 33 08 cup 019 035 OK Cancel Like the clip playback screen this screen allows you to play and search all clips on the disc To display a list of In and Out point operations that you can perform Press the MENU button 4 When you find the point that you want to make the start point select IN and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The timecode of the new In point appears in the timecode display and the Total total duration and DUR clip duration displays are updated 5 When you find the point that you want to make the end point select OUT and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The timecode of the new Out point appears in the timecode display and the Total total duration and DUR clip duration displays are updated Scene Selection Clip List Editing To cue up the In point or Out point Display the Thumbnail Menu select Cue up Inpoint or Cue up Outpoint and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To cancel the In point or Out point setting Display the Thumbnail Menu select Reset Inpoint or Reset Ou
292. ions see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select REC FORMAT and turn the MENU knob to select the desired recording format As you turn the MENU knob the recording format changes as follows HD422 50 gt HD420 HQ gt HD420 SP gt IMX 50 gt IMX 40 gt IMX 30 gt DVCAM To set the aspect ratio when IMX 50 IMX 40 IMX 30 or DVCAM is selected Select ASPECT RATIO SD on the FORMAT page and turn the MENU knob to select the desired aspect ratio As you turn the MENU knob the aspect ratio changes as follows 16 9 gt 4 3 027OFORMAT TOP SYSTEM LINE i 1080 SYSTEM FREQUENCY 59 91 REC FORMAT H IMX 50 ASPECT RATIO SD 16 9 AU DATA LENCIMX 16bit COUNTRY NTSC J AREA The unit ignores this setting when it records video from external devices see page 98 To set the audio recording format when IMX 50 IMX 40 or IMX 30 is selected Select AU DATA LEN IMX on the FORMAT page or AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE Setting the Recording Format menu and turn the MENU knob to select the desired audio recording format As you turn the MENU knob the audio recording format changes as follows 16bit lt gt 24bit Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc As long as the frame frequency group is the same clips in different recording formats can be recorded or written to the same disc In this manual this is referred to as mixed format recording mode 1
293. ip list and the number of the selected sub clip Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 107 Clip list date and time Displays the date and time when the clip list was created or the date and time of its most recent modification An asterisk appears after the date and time of creation when the current clip list has not been saved to the disc New File appears when no clip list has been loaded into the unit s memory and when a clip list has been cleared from the unit s memory A gt mark appears before the date of creation or modification when a disc is write inhibited You can create clip lists when the disc is write inhibited but you cannot save them 3 Total duration Displays the total duration of all sub clips in the clip list Expand thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of equally sized divisions of the selected clip Expand Clip 008 024 x 1 Zar TC 00 01 38 00 TC 00 01 38 22 may TC 00 01 37 11 TC 00 01 37 24 map may TC00013906 TC00 01 3819 Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 107 Clip number total clips x number of divisions Displays the number of the selected clip the total number of clips on the disc and the number of times that the selected clip has been divided to display the expansion thumbnails Thumbnail number total thumbnails Displays the total number of expanded t
294. iption 06 AUDIO 1 FRONT MIC MONO STREO Input mode selection for front microphone SELECT AUDIO CH3 4 CH1 2 SW Selects the sources to be recorded to channels MODE CH 3 4 CH1 2 Same sources as CH 1 2 SW Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches REAR XLR AUTO OFF ON Turns the XLR connection automatic detection on or off FRONT MIC REF 60dB 50dB Sets the reference level of the front 40dB microphone REAR MIC REF 60dB 50dB Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN 40dB CHI connector is set to MIC MIN ALARM VOL OFF SET Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone when it is turned all the way down OFF Almost inaudible SET Faintly audible SP ATT LEVEL OFF 3dB 6dB Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker 9dB Has no effect on earphone volume HEADPHONE OUT MONO STREO Selects whether to make the rear earphone monaural or stereo 07 AUDIO 2 AU DATA LEN 16bit 24bit For details see Setting the Recording IMX Format page 53 AU REF LEVEL 20dB 18dB Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal 16dB 12dB EBUL AU REF OUT 0dB 4dB Sets the output reference level 3dB EBUL AU CH12 AGC MONO STREO Selects whether to perform automatic input MODE level adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 independently for each channel or in stereo mode AU CH34 AGC MONO STREO Selects whether to perform automatic input MODE OFF level adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded on c
295. irmation screens esee 206 Adjustments and Settings from Menus creer eee tntnnne 208 Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions 208 Selecting the output signals esses 208 Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches 209 Setting power saving functions sseseeeeeeeeeeee 212 Table of Contents 5 6 Setting up a wireless LAN sees 213 Setting the color temperature manually sess 216 Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting 217 Selecting the lens file oer ee erede ret rh Res 217 Setting the UMID data vto saanane aa 218 Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data Saving and Recalling User Files Saving user menu data on a USB flash drive 220 Loading saved data from a USB flash drive 222 Returning the user file settings to the standard settings 222 Saving and Loading Scene Files sssscssssssssssescescescecssecscssessessesees 223 Saving scere file Re baee ene Loading scene files Returning the scene file settings to the standard settings 226 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page when Connecting a USB Flash DIVE 226 Chapter 8 File Operations
296. is executed in the SCENE FILE page of the PAINT menu You can save one reference file in the internal memory of the unit and one on a USB flash drive Lens files Lens files save the setting data used to compensate for the characteristics of lenses such as flare white shading and auto iris gain You can save up to 32 lens files in the internal memory of the unit and up to 100 lens files on a USB flash drive DIAGNOSIS menu This menu shows the digital hours meter the ROM version and information about the internal device status of the camcorder Menu List Tips The bold faced numbers designate the pages that have been registered in the USER menu at the factory The bold faced settings are the factory default settings The initial value of items with a setting range of 99 to 99 is 0 When the setup value in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses the value is a relative value The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual OPERATION menu No Page Item Settings Description 01 OUTPUT 1 SDI OUT 1 SELECT OFF HDSDI SDSDI Selects the output signal from the SDI OUT 1 connector SDI OUT 2 SELECT OFF HDSDI SDSDI VF Selects the output signal from the SDI OUT 2 connector SDI OUT 2 SUPER OFF ON Sets the superimposed information output from the SDI OUT 2 connector Text information is always displayed regard
297. is screen allows you to confirm the following items related to audio Audio bit rate Setting condition of DF NDF Type of front microphone Type of input signal to audio channels 1 to 4 nput level of audio channels 1 to 4 GPS INFORMATION screen This screen displays the following items related to GPS Latitude Longitude Altitude Position date and time CALC Real time Time zone You can use the SET STATUS page of the OPERATION menu to set whether or not the status confirmation screens are displayed To display the status confirmation Screens You can use the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch as the STATUS ON SEL OFF switch when the MENU ON OFF switch is set to OFF when the cover of the menu operating section is closed OFF is automatically selected To disable display of the status confirmation screens How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SET STATUS page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the SET STATUS page Item Description STATUS Selects whether or not the ABNORMAL ABNORMAL window is displayed ON or OFF STATUS Displays ON or hides SYSTEM OFF the SYSTEM menu STATUS Selects whether or not the FUNCTION FUNCTION window is
298. is selected Indication Field or frame Scan mode rate 50i 50 fields per Interlace second 50P 50 frames per Progressive second 25P 25 frames per Progressive second 1 Selected by COUNTRY setting on the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu see page 159 There may be no indication displayed when this unit cannot identify the system frequency for example when playing back a disc recorded with other equipment Ej Audio format Indicates the format of audio being currently played back or recorded Indication Quantization bit rate sampling frequency 24bit 24 bits 48 kHz Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Indication Quantization bit rate sampling frequency 16bit 16 bits 48 kHz Audio level indicators Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of channels 1 to 4 Status display PB Appears during playback NDF Appears when non drop frame timecode is selected EXT LK Appears when the internal timecode generator is locked to an external signal input to the TC IN timecode input connector HOLD Appears when the internal timecode generator is stopped Time counter display Switches displays of time counter timecode and user bits depending on the position of the DISPLAY switch When the HOLD CHAPTER button is pressed to hold the timecode value the timecode is displayed in the format shown below When the HOLD CHAPTER button is pressed again to release the h
299. iscovered via UPnP and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The detected connection destination device the PDW HD1500 appears in the Select Host Discovered via UPnP screen 10 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Detailed information about the connection destination device the PDW HD1500 appears 11 With Connect selected press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Transfer of the clip begins as soon as the connection is established During transfer of the clip NETWORK appears in the display of the connection destination device the PDW HD1500 When transfer of the clip completes an Uploading Result Report appears on the screen Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob to return to the clip thumbnail screen 12 Check the copied clip in the clip thumbnail screen of the connection destination device the PD W HD1500 Shortcut List You can access many functions from the keyboard without displaying a menu shortcut operations Shortcuts are available for the following functions The plus sign indicates that one button is held down while another is pressed for example SHIFT RESET RETURN The same shortcut may access different functions depending on the screen that is active when it is executed Function Operation Clip List Thumbnail display clip list thumbnail screen SUB CLIP DISC MENU Expand Thumbnail display expand thumbnail screen
300. ized Tuner Unit WRR 860A 861 862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner For details of these units refer to the operation manuals for them To fit the DWR S02D or WRR 855S 1 Remove the four fixing screws holding the cover of the portable tuner receiver housing slot located in the rear of this unit to remove the cover 2 Insert the DWR S02D or WRR 855S into the housing slot and fasten the four fixing screws DWR S02D or WRR 855S J Set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel to which you want to input audio signal to WIRELESS see page 23 When the XLR connection automatic detection function is on even if the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch is set to WIRELESS the signal input to the AUDIO IN CHI or CH2 connector is automatically selected when an audio cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CHI or CH2 connector In such a case set REAR XLR AUTO to OFF on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu The factory default setting is OFF When the LINE AES EBU MIC selector is set to LINE or MIC the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection function They are determined by the settings of the AUDIO IN CH 3 and CH 4 switches suonejedeJjg z 1e1deuj To fit the WRR 862 when using a BP L80S FL75 Battery Pack 1 Attach the WRR tuner fitting not supplied service part number A 8278 057 B to the back of the camcorder 1 Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten the
301. justing the Black Balance and the White Balance To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adjusted Black balance adjustment The black balance will require adjustment in the following cases When the camcorder is used for the first time When the camcorder has not been used for a long time When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has changed greatly When the GAIN selector L M H values have been changed by using the USER menu It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off White balance adjustment Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change Viewfinder screen displays If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started messages that report on the progress and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen when the VF DISP MODE item is set to 2 or 3 on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off Adjusting the black balance In automatic black balance mode adjustments are performed in the following order black set and black balance Manual black balance adjustment can be selected f
302. l unit such as the RM B170 is connected Setup menu of the Recording start Settings of RM REC stop button START RM CAM PARA Camcorder s REC Disabled Enabled Enabled START button Lens VTR button Disabled Enabled Enabled Button to which the Disabled Enabled Enabled recording start stop function has been assigned camcorder ASSIGN 1 3 4 5 switch or RET button on the lens Remote control Enabled Disabled Enabled unit s VTR button When the monitor is connected to the MONITOR OUT connector of the remote control unit The MONITOR connector BNC type of the RM B170 B750 outputs the same signal as that from the TEST OUT connector on the camcorder Use the black cable supplied with the RM B170 B750 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the RM B170 B750 camcorder RM B170 Independent Remote control ata region data region MASTER BLACK MASTER GAMMA MASTER BE MASTER GAMMA KNEE POINT 9 KNEE POINT DETAIL LEVEL DETAIL LEVEL R B GAIN R B BLACK P B GAIN R B BLACK Non volatile memory Hardware of the camera section o o RM B170 connected o o RM B170 not connected Thus when a remote control unit is connected to the camcorder the effective data region is switched to the remote control data region and the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled The set
303. le of the next clip to be recorded will be a combination of the prefix in the PREFIX Advanced Operations for Shooting field and the serial number in the NUMERIC field To create a list of title prefix strings Prepare the data beforehand according to the following rules File name Assign the name TITLES TXT to the file Input format Enter title prefixes one at time separated by newline CRLF characters Prefixes can be up to 10 characters long A prefix file can contain up to 20 prefixes Allowable characters e Digits 0 to 9 Alphabetic characters a to z A to Z The following symbols 96 amp 5 2 Q semicolon comma period _ underscore Space Title prefix list example Tennis lt CRLF gt Basketball lt CRLF gt Skiing_1 lt CRLF gt Skiing 2 CRLF To transfer a title prefix list to the internal memory of the camcorder How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 create the following directory on the USB flash drive and copy the title prefix file TITLES txt into it WMSSONY PRO XDCAM GENERAL VA L_LIST 2 Connect a USB flash drive with the title prefix file TITLES TXT to the USB connector of the camcorder 3 On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu see page 161 select LOAD PREFIX DATA and then press the MENU knob USB MEMORY ACCESS appears and the file on th
304. leaving pointing to NO When the save is completed the message COMPLETE appears If files have been saved in the page selected in step 3 those files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder memory For example files from 001 to 005 are replaced by the above procedure To set the file ID You can set an file ID before you save your data as a scene file This will help you identify the scene file quickly The file ID that has been set is saved together with the data You can carry out a scene file ID setting operation on the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu For details about this operation see the description of step 2 and following of To set the file ID page 221 To select the file information items to be displayed You can select the items of file information to be displayed on the SCENE STORE pages P01 to P20 or the SCENE RECALL pages P01 to P20 used for saving data to or loading data from a USB flash drive You can select the scene file information items to be displayed on the SCENE STORE page and SCENE RECALL page of the SCENE FILE menu For details about item selection see the description of step 2 and following of To select the file information items to be displayed page 222 Loading scene files How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For det
305. lector and the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu Set the SHUTTER selector to ON Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST Use the lens extender Set the reference value of the auto iris to other than the standard value Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT repeatedly and check that the shutter setting changes on the viewfinder screen Pointing the camera at a suitable subject focus the camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT and check that when sound is input to a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the camcorder the audio level indicators appear on the viewfinder screen 9 Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the viewfinder screen The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as expected depending on the settings relating to the viewfinder display function In this case set the desired items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu For details see Selecting the display items page 201 Testing the iris and zoom functions 1 Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that the power zoom operates correctly 2 Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom functions manually J Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the camera at objects of different brightness Check that the automatic iris adjustment operates c
306. less of this setting when SDI OUT 2 SELECT is set to VF TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector When R G or B is selected turning the power of the unit off and on changes the setting to Y TEST OUT SUPER OFF ON Sets the superimposed information output from the TEST OUT connector Regardless of this setting text data is output from this connector when the setting of TEST OUT SELECT is Y R G or B During the display of text data you can hide the text data by switching this item from ON to OFF It is also hidden in the viewfinder Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 151 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nua 9 saldeyp 152 No Page Item Settings Description 02 OUTPUT 2 DOWN CON MODE CROP SQEZB Does not appear when the FORMAT page item SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and the SYSTEM FREQUENCY item is set to 23 9P Sets the conversion mode for down converted output WIDE ID THROU AUTO Specifies whether to add wide picture information to the SD output signal THROU Output the video signals without adding wide picture information AUTO When the DOWN CON MODE item is set to SQEZE add wide picture information to the output video signals 03 SUPER IMPOSE SUPER VFDISP OFF ON SUPER MENU OFF ON SUPER TC OFF ON When the SDI OUT 2 SUPER item or the TEST OUT SUPER item on the O
307. lip List does not Exist The clip cannot be expanded into more blocks This alarm appears when the DISP SEL EXPAND button is pressed when the number of blocks is maximum or when the duration of an expanded thumbnail is one frame The selected essence mark does not exist This alarm appears in the essence mark selection screen when the specified essence mark does not exist on the disc The temporal relationship between the specified In and Out points in a TRIM operation see page 130 is not correct Reset so that the value of the Out point timecode is larger than the value of the In point timecode The total duration of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 24 hours as the result of an Add Sub Clips see page 128 or Trim Sub Clip see page 130 operation The total number of the sub clips of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 300 as the result of an Add Sub Clips see page 128 or Trim Sub Clip see page 130 operation An attempt is made to execute a Move Sub Clips see page 129 Trim Sub Clip see page 130 Delete Sub Clips see page 130 or Set Start Time Code see page 131 operation with no sub clips in the current clip list An attempt is made to execute a Delete Clip List operation see page 132 when there are no clip lists on the disc Move is Invalid Shot Mark does not Exist Chapter does not Exist Some Essence Mark cannot be Deleted
308. lips Displays the total number of clips on the disc and the number of the selected clip Scrollbar When not all of the thumbnails can be displayed in the thumbnail display area the position of the slider shows the relative position of the currently displayed clips and the length of the slider shows the relative length of currently displayed clips within all of the clips When you have a large number of thumbnails you can save time by using the Skip Scroll function to jump directly to the thumbnail you want see page 115 Recording format The recording format of the selected clip is displayed as a combination of the following information Video format logo Number of system lines Recording quality Number of audio channels 3 Clip date and time Displays the date and time when the selected clip was shot and recorded Overview su 199 ND ul suoneiedo G 1e1deu 107 SueeJog MH Ul suonejedo c Jajdeyo 108 Duration Displays the duration recording time of the selected clip When multiple clips are selected displays the total recording time of the selected clips 1 Thumbnail display items TC 00 26 22 10 Index picture Displays an image to stand for the content of the clip The index picture is normally the first frame of the clip Index picture changed mark This mark like the folded over corner of a page that you want to remember appears when the index pict
309. ll be able to select settings more quickly if you delete settings that you use only rarely You must leave at least one setting but you can delete settings numbered 2 through 6 Setting the Electronic Shutter Bunooyus 104 suas pue sjueunsn py e 4e1deuo 63 Bunooys 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy Ja deyo 64 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back lit subjects or to prevent blown out highlights The reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range with respect to the standard value 0 25 to 1 increasing by increments of 0 25 About 0 25 to 1 stop further open e 0 25 to 1 decreasing by increments of 0 25 About 0 25 to 1 stop further close Also you can set the area where light detection Occurs To change the reference value How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the AUTO IRIS page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 0190AUTO IRIS OUERRIDE 0 SPEED HIGH LIGHT WINDOW WINDOW IND YAR WIDTH YAR HEIGHT VAR H POS VAR V POS gt S S P S S S S S S 2 Check that the mark is at the IRIS OVERRIDE position and then press the MENU knob on the left of the selected item cha
310. m step 2 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Select Transfer Type screen of the Upload Clips via Direct FTP command appears Upload Clips via Direct FTP Select Transfer Type Selected Clips 2 Clips All Clips amp ClipList 42 Clips 19 ClipLists m UMID Unchange Cancel Es Select the type of clip transfer Selected Clips Clips selected in step 1 All Clips amp ClipList All clips and clip lists on the disc To transfer while preserving the UMID of the transfer source clips Check the UMID Unchange option If the remote host is a computer clips are transferred with the UMID unchanged regardless of this setting To reconnect to a remote host The Reconnect button is enabled if the most recent operation successfully established a connection to a remote host You can select Reconnect and press the SET S SEL button or MENU knob to reconnect to that host The host is selected automatically and the screen changes directly to the Connecting Status screen see step 9 in the procedure The Reconnect button is not enabled if the most recent operation failed to connect to a remote host Select gt and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Select Remote Host screen appears Transferring clips Direct FTP function SU9949S MD ul suoneiedo g 1e1deu 141 SueeJog MH Ul suonejedo
311. may occur around the switch if you switch the input during recording Camera video is recorded if you switch to external input without inputting an external video signal to the SDI IN OPTION connector or the GENLOCK IN connector It is not possible to record external input video with a changed aspect ratio To record SDI signals You can record HD SDI or SD SDI signals input to the SDI IN connector When an HD recording format MPEG HD422 50 or MPEG HD420 HQ SP is selected SD SDI signals are upconverted to HD signals before recording tis not possible to record HD SDI signals when an SD recording format MPEG IMX 50 40 30 or DVCAM is selected The system frequency and resolution HD SDI input only of input signals must match the current settings of this unit Otherwise the input signals cannot be recorded Only audio signals embedded in SDI signals are recorded regardless of the settings of the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switches 1 Display the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION menu 0280S0URCE SEL TOP FRONT MIC SELECT STREO REC UIDEO SOURCE CAM EXT VIDEO SOURCE HODSDI WIDE MODE EXT AUTO SETUP REMOVE 7 52 For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select REC VIDEO SOURCE and turn the MENU knob to display EXT 3 Select EXT VIDEO SOURCE and turn the MENU knob to select the desired signal to be recorded As you turn the MENU knob the setting
312. mbnail screen operations 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail screen 2 Select Clip Information A window appears in which you can select the information to display Thumbnail Menu l Clip Information gt Return to Upper Menu Date Duration Sequence Number 3 Select the items that you want to display Return to Upper Menu Returns to the Thumbnail Menu Date Date and time of creation or date and time of the more recent modification Time Code Timecode of first frame Duration Playback time Sequence Number Thumbnail sequence number The selected information will appear at the bottom of the thumbnails when you display a thumbnail screen Changing clip index pictures The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails as index pictures for clips Normally the index picture is the first frame in a clip but you can set any frame in the clip as the index picture You can only change index pictures from the clip thumbnail screen The thumbnails shown in the clip list thumbnail screen the expand thumbnail screen and the chapter thumbnail screen cannot be changed To select a clip index picture while viewing the video See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip whose index picture you want to change 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Select Index Picture Select Index screen appears Select Ind
313. memory DATE Displays the date and time of creation of a user gamma file on a USB flash drive Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuey 9 JajdeyD 189 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nua 9 saldeyp 190 No Page Item Settings Description 07 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL EXEC Load lens file LENS FILE STORE EXEC Save lens file FID No Offset up to 16 Sets the name of the last selected characters lens file SOURCE MEMORY 1 Displays the number of last loaded lens file LENS NO OFFSET EXEC Clear lens file LENS AUTO RECALL OFF ON S No Specifies whether to automatically load the lens file of a lens that supports serial communications OFF Do not use the lens file function ON Load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name and reflect the contents of the file S No If the lens can communicate its serial number load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name and serial number and reflect the contents of the file If the lens serial number cannot be communicated load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name same as the ON setting L ID Display the name of the connected lens that supports serial communications L MF Display the manufacturer of the connected lens that supports serial 08 LENS FILE 2 communications LENS M VMOD 9 99 to 99 Adjusts the lens file V SAW shading compensation LENS CENTER H
314. ment was impossible ABB NG Adjustment could not be TIME LIMIT completed within the standard number of attempts ABB NG The difference between the R or G or B reference value and the OVERFLOW current value is so great that it exceeds the range Adjustment was impossible If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the black balance adjustment Keep pushing the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK until BLACK SET appears after BLACK BALANCE appears If the error message occurs again an internal check is necessary For information about this internal check refer to the Maintenance Manual If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS connector it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris If this happens the black balance will be incorrect Black balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the black balance is next adjusted If a memory error occurs If the error message STORED DATA NG flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on the black balance and white balance memory contents have been lost Adjust the black balance and white balance again Contact a Sony representative if this message continues to appear even after the black balance and white balance have been adjusted again For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Adjusting the white balance 1 Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure below
315. mera Set the switches and selectors as follows IN UPI KAT SSi iris switch Automatic Zoom selector SERVO MAN VDR SAVE STBY switch SAVE GAIN selector Set as low as possible Q OUTPUT DCC switch BARS Q WHITE BAL switch A or B Testing the viewfinder 1 Adjust the position of the viewfinder 2 Check that the color bars are displayed on the viewfinder screen and adjust the BRIGHT CONTRAST and PEAKING controls to give the best color bar display Check each of the following operations The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page changes to the next page Press the MENU knob and check that settings of each item of the selected page are displayed Turn the MENU knob and check that moves within the page Press the MENU knob and check that placed before the item changes to and placed before the setting of the item changes to Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of the selected item changes Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM and change the FILTER selector position in the sequence of 1 2 3 and 4 Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder screen displays the correct numbers Carry out of the following operations and check that the indicator lights if the corresponding item has been turned on on the LED page of the USER menu Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN se
316. mrmmmrmm CCOOOCCOGU 44444441441 CECCCCCECO monoa s MAMMAT AAAAAAAAAM WONDUIAWN 3 m the CONTENTS page is displayed press the MENU knob Then select one of EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 and press the MENU knob If a different page other than the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears then press the MENU knob Example when the EDIT USER 9 page is selected Menu Operations sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 197 sBumes pejreijeq pue sfejdsiq nua 9 Jaldeyp 198 4 9 6 ETOOEDIT USER 9 gt Press the MENU knob Then select the line where you want to add an item and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears EDIT FUNCTION T E ESC Select INSERT and press the MENU knob The following menu appears OO CONTENTS OOOOOOOOO cU 1 0U 2 0U 3 SU 4 LC 5 RE 6 as c PQ 8 UF Sg UF Q UF Add the items as follows Press the MENU knob scroll the page until the desired item appears and then press the MENU knob again 2 Press the MENU knob again select the desired item and then press the MENU knob The EDIT USER 9 page appears again displaying the newly added item Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add the remaining items You can add up to ten items on one page Menu Operations To delete items from a page by using the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a new page page 197
317. mu x D e 9 e e 5 x9 Problem VDR operation Action to take Input sync error Recording continues but may be Turn off the power and substandard contact a Sony service representative This indication may be given momentarily when a GENLOCK signal is connected or disconnected but this does not indicate a problem Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator sex e e 5 xo u Problem VDR operation Action to take An error was detected in the Recording continues but may be Exchange the disc signals recorded on the disc substandard Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator a nd Jere nd o Eu Problem VDR operation Action to take Cache memory became full Video and audio recording may be Exchange the disc quickly during a Disc Exchange Change interrupted mode operation Operation Warnings 247 Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator x D 9 5 e e ey d Problem VDR operation Action to take A disc defect was detected Recording continues avoiding the defect but may be substandard If defects are detected repeatedly exchange the disc aoueuajuley 6 Ja deuD Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT A indication indicator 2 DISC flash w D se o Problem VDR o
318. n Auto Interval Rec mode pictures are automatically shot a frame two frames when the recording format is set to 720p at a time at the specified interval and stored in memory To use this function you must set the total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME and the length of time for recording on the disc REC TIME Manual Interval Rec mode A specified number of frames NUMBER OF FRAME is recorded when you press the REC START button or the lens VTR button There are two Manual Interval Rec modes a single shot mode in which recording is done once with each press of the button and a consecutive mode in which recording is done repeatedly at a specified interval after the button is pressed A pre lighting function is available in Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode This function automatically turns on the light before recording starts which allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions Interval Rec settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode During Slow amp Quick Motion shooting Operation limitations during recording Item Description Time code The internal time code generator runs in R RUN mode regardless of how the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set Au
319. n MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer This command allows you to specify a segment in the body of the MXF file composed of video and audio data for transfer of the required segment only A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified This command cannot be used when the path name contains a space Use the SITE REPFL command instead Syntax SITE REPF SP path name SP start frame SP lt transfer size gt lt CRLF gt lt start frame gt specifies an offset from the start of the file Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset the first frame is 0 lt transfer size gt specifies the number of video frames to transfer specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file Input example SITE REPF Clip C0001 MXF 5 150 Transfer C0001 MXF Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 150 SITE REPFL Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer This command allows you to FTP File Operations specify a segment in the body of the MXF file composed of video and audio data for transfer of the required segment only A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified Syntax SITE REPFL SP lt path name gt SP start frame SP lt transfer size gt lt CRLF gt lt path name gt specifies the path name of the file to transfer Enclose the path name in double quotation marks lt sta
320. n the clip list thumbnail screen See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu see page 113 2 Select Save Clip List and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The clip list is saved However Save Clip List as is executed when the name displayed in the clip list thumbnail screen is no name If you press the EJECT button before saving a new or edited clip list a message appears asking if you want to discard your changes and continue Follow the instructions in the message to continue or cancel the operation Managing clip lists To load clip lists The following procedure loads a clip list stored on the disc into the unit s internal memory as the current clip list See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu Scene Selection Clip List Editing 2 Select Load Clip List and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A list of clip lists stored on the disc appears Disc Menu fim Load Clip List Name amp Date Sorted by Name lt DVD og BI 08 AUG2007 11 50 E0003 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0004 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0005 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0006 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0007 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0095 18 MAY2006 10 25 E0098 13 JUN2006 13 43 Display Select gt J Select the desired clip list and then press the SET S SEL button or the
321. nail screen is displayed each press of the THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK button switches between that screen and the clip playback screen Resume function This setting allows you to use the THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK button as a shortcut to Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen which is convenient for checking start points in clip recorded with the Clip Continuous Rec function To return to the clip thumbnail screen from the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen press the RESET RETURN button Thumbnail Operations In the clip playback screen the PREV and NEXT buttons jump to the previous or next recording start points Playing the scene you have found After finding a clip with one of the methods explained in the previous section Searching with thumbnails page 116 you can cue up and play the clip that you have found To search for a thumbnail position and cue it up See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Select the thumbnail that you want to cue up Clip C0010 010 041 OK TC 00 23 00 25 4S eee TC 00 28 06 09 TC 00 28 22 02 rc 0 DareaTime 30 NOV 2005 13 40 pum 0 00 04 14 2 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To play clips with the SET S SEL button In the Disc Menu set Settings gt SET Key on Thumbnail to Cue up amp Play Play begins from the selected frame when you press the SET S SEL button in the same way as when you press the PLAY PAUSE button
322. nel is pressed Press the side of the lid to close SDI IN connector BNC type The unit can record HD SDI or SD SDI signals that are input to this connector Input the return video signal Setting RETURN VIDEO to ON on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu allows you to display the HD SDI signal input on the SDI IN connector in the viewfinder while the RET button is pressed Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 23 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 24 E GENLOCK IN genlock signal input connector BNC type This connector inputs a reference signal when the camera is to be genlocked or when timecode is to be synchronized with external equipment Use the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H phase phase of horizontal sync signal Available reference signals vary depending on the current system frequency as shown in the following table System frequency Available reference signals 1080 59 94i 1080 59 94i 525 59 941i 1080 50i 1080 50i 625 50i 1080 29 97P 1080 59 94i 525 59 941i 1080 25P 1080 50i 625 50i 1080 23 98P 1080 23 98PsF 720 59 94P 1080 59 94i 525 59 941i 720 S0P 1080 50i 625 50i This connector also inputs a return video signal You can display the HD Y 10801 signal in the viewfinder screen while holding the RET button down with RETURN VIDEO set to ON on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu nput an external video signal The unit can r
323. ng Device Type The type of the remote host If the remote host is an XDCAM device select the model name or Other XDCAM model if the model name is not in the list from the list of model names If the remote host is a computer select Others PC Server from the list of model names Description Comment about the remote host UTF 8 encoding up to 127 bytes This setting has no effect on the connection The setting that you make here appears as the remote host name in the Select Remote Host screen see step 5 of the procedure Path If the remote host is a computer path to the transfer destination directory This is not needed if the remote host is an XDCAM device User Name User name for FTP login If the remote host is an XDCAM device the default is admin Password Password for FTP login If the remote host is an XDCAM device the default is the model name such as pdw 850 a If an XDCAM device is selected as the Device Type then the User Name and Password are set automatically to the default and you do not need to make the Port and Path settings Simply selecting the Host Name or as appropriate the Description is enough to fulfill the requirements for connection If the User Name or Password of the device that you want to connect to changes set them here Set the various items To select an item Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor and then push t
324. ng clips on such discs Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the POWER switch is set to OFF and when battery exhaustion is detected because the unit does not become powered off until after the end of recording processing Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until recording processing has finished and the ACCESS indicator has gone out Bunoous y 1e1deu This function salvages as much recorded material as possible after an unforeseen accident but 10096 restoration cannot be guaranteed Even when this function is used it is not possible to recover data from immediately before the interruption of recording The amount of data lost is as follows Quick salvage From 2 to 5 seconds of data before the interruption of recording Full salvage From 3 to 6 seconds of data before the interruption of recording More data may be lost when the unit is subject to vibrations when you switch frequently between recording and paused and when you use functions such as Picture Cash Quick salvage When the unit is powered on again after a recording interruption due to a power interruption with the disc still loaded in the unit clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data stored in nonvolatile memory and markers recorded on the disc Processing time is about 5 seconds Full salvage When recording on an XDCAM device is interrupted because of a power interruption and a disc is manually ejected
325. ng directories is 5 000 for a single layer disc and 6 000 for a dual layer disc File names and directory names can use letters numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2 0 UTF 8 character set However the following control characters and symbols cannot be used Control characters U 0000 to U 001F U 007F Symbols 4 2 2 V To create a new directory in the General directory first create a directory on the desktop and rename it using only characters that can be used on this unit Then drag it from the desktop and drop it in the General directory PROAV directory This directory displays individual files on the disc To enable display of the PROAV directory set PROAV DISPLAY on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to ENABL FTP File Operations File operations between this unit and a remote computer can be carried out by the File Transfer Protocol called FTP below Preparations 1 Connect the network connectors of this unit and a remote computer with a network cable Or connect this unit to the network to which the remote computer is connected 2 On the NETWORK SETTING page of the MAINTENANCE menu set the IP address and other network setting items for this unit P For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 If network settings have already been made Check the IP address of this unit 1 This unit is able to acquire an IP address automatically fr
326. ng the adjusted data in the camcorder memory or on a USB flash drive The following files can be saved User files User files save the setting items and setting data of customized USER menus You can save up to 100 user files on a USB flash drive Once you save a user file on a USB flash drive you can easily set the USER menu to your preference by loading the file For details on user files see Saving and Recalling User Files page 220 ALL files ALL files saves the setting data of all of the menus You can save up to 100 ALL files on a USB flash drive Menu Organization Once a camcorder is set up according to your preferences and you save an ALL file on a USB flash drive you can easily set other camcorders to those settings by loading the data from the USB flash drive Device specific data output levels and shading that requires adjustment for the specific device is not saved Scene files In the scene file the setting values of PAINT menu items set to shoot a particular scene are saved You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files on a USB flash drive For example first adjust the settings to shoot a rehearsal of a particular scene and then save them as a scene file Then load that file before the actual shooting so that you can quickly recreate setup conditions of the rehearsal Reference files Reference files save the reference values that are set when STANDARD
327. nges to and on the left of the setting changes to 2 3 Turn the MENU knob until ON appears then press the MENU knob on the left of the selected item changes to and on the left of the setting changes to e The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to ON Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the screen Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not ECS The changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off Even if the reference value is changed it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on To make the iris more open Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera The iris stop indicators as shown in the following table appear in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication Iris stop Indicator 0 25 0 5 0 75 1 To stop down the iris Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera The iris stop indicators as shown in the following table appear in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication Tris stop Indicator 0 25 E 0 5 0 75 l Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment Z Fg 6 Opening the lens iris Iris opene
328. nings Appendix Important Notes on Operation Use and storage Do not subject the unit to severe shocks The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped Do not cover the unit while operating Putting a cloth for example over the unit can cause excessive internal heat build up After use Always turn off the POWER switch Before storing the camcorder for a long period Remove the battery pack Shipping Remove the disc before transporting the unit f sending the unit by truck ship air or other transportation service pack it in the shipping carton of the unit Care of the unit Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lenses or optical filters using a blower If the body of the unit is dirty clean it with a soft dry cloth In extreme cases use a cloth steeped in a little neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners as these may cause discoloration or other damage to the finish of the unit In the event of operating problems If you should experience problems with the unit contact a Sony representative Use and storage locations Store in a level ventilated place Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places nexcessive heat or cold operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C 23 F to 104 F Remember that in summer in warm climates the temperature inside a car with the windows closed can easily exceed 50 C 122 F
329. nit If the connection times out This unit terminates FTP connections if no command is received within 90 seconds of the last command If this occurs log out see the next section and repeat steps 2 to 4 If you power this unit off during an FTP connection the data transferred thus far is discarded To log out To log out after finishing file operations enter QUIT at the command prompt and press the Enter key Command list This unit supports standard protocol see the next section and extended protocol see page 238 To execute FTP commands you must install application software with FTP function on your computer The commands supported by application software vary An FTP client that supports UTF 8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF 8 Standard commands In the command syntax column SP means a space entered by pressing the space bar and lt CRLF gt means a new line entered by pressing the Enter key USER Send this command to begin the login process Syntax USER SP username lt CRLF gt Input example USER admin PASS After sending the USER command send this command to complete the login process Syntax PASS SP password lt CRLF gt Input example PASS pdw 850 QUIT Terminates the FTP connection If a file is being transferred terminates after completion of the transfer Syntax QU
330. nob to change the setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars You can select which shot data is recorded superimposed on the color bars You can also select which of the shot IDs 1 to 4 set in the SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on the picture How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SHOT DISP page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the SHOT DISP page Item Description SHOT DATE Selects whether or not the shot data is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT TIME Selects whether or not shot time is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT MODEL Selects whether or not the NAME model name is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT SERIAL Selects whether or not the NO serial number is superimposed ON or OFF SHOTIDSEL Selects whether or not the shot ID set on the SHOT ID page is superimposed 2 SHOT 16 9 Turns the following function CHARA on and off When displaying aspect ratio 4 3 video record superimposed 16 9 in the locations where 16 9 video is cut Item Description SHOT BLINK Selects whether or not the CHARA blinking is superim
331. ns the linear matrix correction and multi matrix correction functions on or off ADAPTIVE MATRIX OFF ON Turns the adaptive matrix correction function brightness tracking on or off ADAPTIVE MAX LVL 0to3to 7 Sets the correction level of the adaptive matrix correction function MATRIX MULTI OFF ON Turns the multi matrix correction function on or off MATRIX AREA IND OFF ON Turns the zebra indication on or off in the area corresponding to the currently selected setting MATRIX COLOR DET Moves to color detection Detects color page MTX MULTI PRESET EXEC Return MTX MULTI HUE and MTX MULTI SAT values to preset values for each of the 16 axes MTX MULTI AXIS B BB MG MG MG Sets 16 hue axes as the targets of R R YL YL YL G the multi matrix correction G G CY CY B function MTX MULTI HUE 99 to 99 Sets hue correction values for each of the 16 axis modes MTX MULTI SAT 99 to 99 Sets saturation correction values for each of the 16 axis modes 14 V MODULATION V MOD OFF ON Turns the V modulation function on or off MASTER VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts the master V modulation level R VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts the R V modulation level G VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts the G V modulation level B VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts the B V modulation level TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B Selects the output signal of the TEST OUT connector 15 SATURATION LOW KEY SAT OFF ON Turns the low key saturation function on or off L
332. nsors and is not a malfunction The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases when operating at a high environmental temperature when you have raised the gain sensitivity when using the slow shutter Vertical smear When an extremely bright object such as a strong spotlight or flashlight is being shot vertical tails Important Notes on Operation may be produced on the screen or the image may be distorted Monitor screen Vertical tails shown on the image Bright object e g strong spotlight strong reflected light flashlight the sun Aliasing When fine patterns stripes or lines are shot they may appear jagged or flicker Specifications General Mass Approx 4 2 kg 9 Ib 4 1 oz body only Approx 6 2 kg 13 Ib 11 oz with viewfinder microphone disc and BP L80S battery Dimensions Unit mm inches excluding protrusions body only 1 222 8 3 4 1 The values for dimensions are approximate Power requirements 12 V DC 5 0 V 1 0 V DC Power consumption Approx 37 W When recording body only LCD monitor on VDR SAVE STBY switch set to SAVE Approx 41 W When recording viewfinder manual lens and microphone attached LCD monitor on VDR SAVE STBY switch set to SAVE Do not connect video lights with power consumption of 50 W or higher When using battery with peripheral equipment attached
333. number of chapters and the number of the selected chapter The total number of chapters is the total number of chapters in the specified clip only Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 107 Clip name Displays the name or a title of the clip whose chapter is displayed see page 107 Duration Displays the time from the first frame of the selected chapter to the first frame of the next chapter Essence mark thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of the specified essence mark found by searching all clips on the disc 3 L TC 00 24 45 25 TC 00 25 07 01 TC00254024 TC00 27 19 25 TC 00 27 51 25 TC 00 28 06 17 Essence mark name Displays the name of the essence mark Shot Mark1 here If the shot mark name has been defined by the user it is enclosed in quotation marks in the display see page 136 Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 107 Essence mark number total essence marks Displays the total number of essence marks and the number of the selected essence mark Overview The total number of essence marks is the total number of essence marks that have been set in all clips on the disc Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 107 Clip date and time Displays the date and time when the clip that contains the selected thumbnail was recorded or last modified 3 Clip name Dis
334. o 99 Sets the level of the INTERCOM sidetone TONE a The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of Other BEFORE END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER b The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of Other END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER c When TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to AUTO any batteries other than Sony BP series batteries and Anton Bauer intelligent battery systems are classified as Others d Flashes once per second when the battery status is BEFORE END and flashes 4 times per second when the battery status is END e A setting for this item is required when AU CH34 AGC MODE in the AUDIO 2 page is set to OFF f A setting for this item is required when the DWR S02D Digital Wireless Receiver is installed g SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT in the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be set to HDSDI h Pixel noise is reduced to some extent by automatic black balance adjustment see page 55 but the detection capabilities of that function are limited For the most effective correction execute the APR function If No More White Pixel appears after the APR function is executed then there are no more detectable white flecks FILE menu No Page Item Settings Description 01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD EXEC For details see Saving and USER FILE SAVE EXEC Recalling Use
335. o bring them up to replace the deleted setting The following example shows the display after deletion of the setting 90 0 which had been registered as setting number 3 M27OSHUTTER SELECT TOP SHUTTER SELECT eDEGREE ADD SECOND 1 99 85 1 119 7 1 475 0 1 940 0 1 1880 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the ADD position and press the MENU knob The mark changes into a mark and the mark changes into a mark M27OSHUTTER SELECT TOP SHUTTER SELECT eDEGREE enDD 180 0 DEL DEGREE SECOND 1 99 85 1 119 7 1 475 0 1 940 0 1 1880 1 216 0 Turn the MENU knob to change the value to the right of the mark into the shutter angle that you want to register and then press the MENU knob The setting value can be selected over the range 360 0 to 4 5 The newly specified shutter angle is assigned to a free slot in the list and the list is sorted in order of the setting values In the figure below the shutter angle 144 0 was added and then the list was sorted so that the angle 144 0 is registered as item number 3 M27OSHUTTER SELECT TOP SHUTTER SELECT BDDD e eDEGREE To add more user defined settings If there is no empty number in the list Repeat steps 1 to 4 If there is an empty number in the list Repeat steps 3 and 4 Deleting unneeded settings When you are selecting shutter speeds the unit skips numbers that do not have assigned settings You wi
336. o has dropped beneath a set level LOW LIGHT Sets the LOW LIGHT LEVEL threshold value VF BATT WARNING Specifies the remaining battery capacity level that starts the flashing warning in the viewfinder ABSOLUTE Turns on and off the mode that VALUE displays numeric menu settings as absolute values b a Displayed clip names are also linked to the settings of Display Title and Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area in the Disc Menu b This makes it possible to display settings that include reference settings stored with STORE ALL PRESET or other functions as absolute values VF DISP 4 page Item Description DISP GPS GPS reception status display VF DISP 2 page Item Description DISP ZOOM Zoom position indicator DISP COLOR Displays the color TEMP temperature DISP BATT Displays the battery REMAIN 9 voltage remaining capacity of an internal battery pack or an external battery connected to the DC IN connector DISP DC IN Displayed when the power is supplied from an external battery connected to the DC IN connector DISP WRR RF Displays the reception level LVL of the wireless microphone DISP REC Displays the recording FORMAT format DISP CLIP During playback displays NO PB the clip number and total number of clips DISP Displays the timecode TIMECODE DISP ALAC Aberration correction function display WIRELESS CBK WA100 wireless STATUS r
337. o rename a clip with Set Clip Name when NAMING FORM is not set to FREE see page 94 Operation Warnings 253 No Flash In the media selection screen of Drive the Load Planning Metadata Select Drive command USB Flash Drive was selected with no USB flash drive connected Not Loaded A command related to planning metadata was executed with no planning metadata loaded Try again after loading planning metadata eoueuejure N 6 Je deu9 Syntax Error Loading of planning metadata failed because of a syntax error Correct the error and try loading it again Irregular Disc The inserted disc cannot be is Used recorded or played This unit can Use record and play Professional Professional Discs Insert a Professional Disc Disc The Disc An attempt was made to format a Write Protect write protected disc Try TAB is setto formatting the disc after moving Save the write protect tab away from the Save position Auto Automatic disc formatting failed Formatting was not Completed Video An attempt was made to add a clip Resolution to a clip list when the video Differ from it resolution number of system on Clip List lines did not match the video resolution of clips in the clip list Clips cannot be added to a clip list unless the video resolution matches No Clip No clip meeting the clip filtering Meets the conditions was found Condition 254 Operation War
338. o view To return to the previous screen Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To change the serial numbers of clip names using planning metadata You can change the serial numbers that are added to clip names that use planning metadata See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Planning Clip Name Suffix change the serial number added to clip names created by using planning metadata and then press the SET S SEL button or MENU knob The Planning Clip Name Suffix screen appears Planning Clip Name Suffix File Name PM_000_sample Title1 The typhoon No 10 hit Okinawa Title2 Les technologies BRAVIA123456 Sutfix do 001 OK Cancel 3 Press the left or right arrow button to select a digit to change 4 Press the up or down arrow button or turn the MENU knob to change the digit 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required 6 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob OK is selected 1 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To clear planning metadata See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Clear Planning Metadata and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to clear the planning metadata 3 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The planning metadata is cleared from this
339. odn e ior Ctrl At sexe ee n7 Alt Ctrl 0 EA I gt Ins Del List of Supported USB Keyboards Recommended USB Flash Drives As of April 2014 The following Sony USB flash drives are recommended for use with this unit Pocket Bit QX series USMI28GQX USM64GQX USM32GQX USMI6GQX USM8GQX Pocket Bit T series USMI28GT USM64GT USM32GT USM16GT USM8GT Pocket Bit U series USMI28GU USM64GU USM32GU USMI6GU USM8GU USB flash drives other than the recommended flash drives listed above may not be recognized when connected to the USB connector Trademarks and Licenses MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG 4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR i ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG 4 VISUAL STANDARD MPEG 4 VIDEO AND OR ii DECODING MPEG 4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG 4 VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA LLC SEE HTTP WWW MPEGLA COM MPEG LA is offering licenses
340. of discs recorded by this camcorder can be performed with the PDW F1600 PDW HD1500 PDW F800 PDW 700 PDW 740 or PDW HRI Full salvage cannot be performed with any other XDCAM device The following message may appear when you insert a disc that was not recorded normally The XXXX in the message is a code for XDCAM Handling Discs devices that can salvage the disc Refer to the table below and use one of the indicated devices to salvage the disc SALVAGE DISC _ CANNOT BE RECORDED FORMAT DISC OR CONTACT SERUICE TO RUN CLIP SALVAGE PROGRAM C XXXX PUSH ESCAPE SWITCH OR ROTARY ENCODER Code XXXX Model name 0002 PDW 1500 530 510 R1 PDW F70 F350 F330 0200 PDW F70 F350 F330 Version 1 9 or higher PDW F75 F355 F335 0300 9 PDW HD1500 HR1 700 740 PDW HD1500 700 740 Version 1 5 or higher PDW F1600 F800 0301 9 a Does not appear on this unit To cancel the message and return to normal operation exchange the disc for a usable disc and flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the ESCAPE side or press the MENU knob Basic Procedure for Shooting This section describes the basic procedures for shooting and recording Before a shooting session ensure that the camcorder is functioning properly For details see Testing the Camcorder before Shooting page 240 Basic procedure for shooting from power supply to disc loading 2 3 1 Attacha fully charged battery pack
341. old the timecode is displayed in the normal format ieee ee eel Li ILI Lights when the HOLD CHAPTER button is pressed El Warning indicator area Displays warnings when trouble with recording or moisture condensation occurs For details see Operation Warnings page 246 Also when it is possible to set clip names by using planning metadata see page 96 displays as clip information the title contained in the planning metadata that has been loaded into this unit The display format follows the setting of Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area in the Disc Menu The following characters can be displayed Digits 0 to 9 Alphabetic characters a to z A to Z The following symbols 96 amp comma period colon semicolon lt gt LL 1 h Space E Remaining disc capacity indicator Indication Remaining recording time DISC E N E E E E EEB More than 30 minutes DISC E W E E EEE B 25 to 30 minutes DISC E H E E E E B 20 to 25 minutes DISC E W E E E B 15 to 20 minutes DISC E W E E B 10 to 15 minutes DISC E W B B 5 to 10 minutes DISC E W B 2 to 5 minutes DISC E W B flashing 0 to 2 minutes DISC E B flashing 0 minutes Remaining battery capacity indicator Indication Battery voltage BP L90A L60S L80S Other batteries BATTE W E E E E E E F
342. oll the display by one character for each press The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view To display the properties of the previous or the next clip Press the PREV button or the NEXT button To return to the clip thumbnail screen Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To edit clip information You can edit the name D title 1 and title 2 of a clip by using a software keyboard 1 The NAMING FORM item on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu must be set to FREE see page 161 The only characters that can be entered are the alphanumeric characters and symbols that appear on the software keyboard and characters in the fonts supported by this version of the unit s firmware Japanese kanji cannot be entered Names and titles must be within the specified character length limits Some symbols cannot be used in clip names The keys for those symbols are disabled when you are editing a clip name See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Inthe Clip Properties screen turn the MENU knob to select the item you want to edit Name Title1 or Title2 1 Only ASCII characters can be used for Titlel Thumbnail Operations 2 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob An input screen appears for the selected item A keyboard appears that corresponds to the font selected with Disc Menu item Settings gt Select Font if the area of use setting is
343. oltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 7 should turn off SEGMENT NO 6 11 0V to 16 0V When the battery type to 17 0V in 0 1 judgment is OTHER V steps sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 6 should turn off SEGMENT NO 5 11 0V to 15 0V When the battery type to 17 0V inO 1 judgment is OTHER V steps sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 5 should turn off SEGMENT NO 4 11 0V to 14 0V When the battery type to 17 0V inO 1 judgment is OTHER V steps sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 4 should turn off SEGMENT NO 3 11 0V to 13 0V When the battery type to 17 0V in 0 1 judgment is OTHER V steps sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 3 should turn off SEGMENT NO 2 11 0V to 12 0V When the battery type to 17 0V in 0 1 V steps judgment is OTHER sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 2 should turn off SEGMENT NO 1 11 0V to 17 0V in 0 1 V steps When the battery type judgment is OTHER sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 1 should turn off Battery status indicator segments EBBEHBNEERBF 1234567 CE D and F are always on Menu List No Page Item Settings Descr
344. om a DHCP server It also supports an Auto IP function to assign an IP address automatically when access from this unit to the DHCP server times out You can check DHCP settings and the assigned IP address on the NETWORK 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu If this unit is directly connected to a computer running Windows Vista or Windows 7 with a network cable change the setting as follows 1 Open Network and Sharing Center Manage network connections gt Local Area Connection in the control panel 2 In the Local Area Connection Properties uncheck the Internet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 and then click the OK button 3 Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu then press the MENU knob FTP File Operations suonejedo e g 1e1deuj 233 suoneiedo aji4 g seydeyp 234 UO7OPOWER SAVE TOP ETHERNET USB DSABL REC AUDIO OUT EE TEST OUT SAVE ON Wi Fi Move to ETHERNET USB then press the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to select ENABL then press the MENU knob Making FTP connections FTP connections between this unit and a remote computer can be made with either of the following The command prompt FTP client software This section explains how to use the command prompt For more information about using FTP client software refer to the documentation of the FTP client software on your system To log in 1 Load a disc into this unit
345. omatically generated clip names Clip names displayed in the viewfinder Typhoon 00001 Typhoon 00002 P The actually recorded clip names Typhoon Strikes Tokyo 00001 Typhoon Strikes Tokyo 00002 1 When display of the ASCII format clip name has been selected see page 135 The serial numbers return to 00001 on the next recording operation if you reach number 99999 Serial numbers are not reset when you power the unit off or exchange discs newly generated numbers are continuous on the old ones If the ASCII format clip name string is longer than 14 characters it is displayed in the viewfinder as the first 7 characters lli abbreviated the last 5 characters for a total of 13 characters You can change the serial numbers by using Planning Clip Name Suffix in the Disc Menu see page 112 To specify user disc IDs by using planning metadata Youcan use planning metadata to define user disc IDs which are saved in metadata files on XDCAM discs To define a user disc ID specify itas an ASCII or UTF 8 format disc name string in the planning metadata A user disc ID is set only after the recording is finished Disc name string format Use a text editor to enter an ASCII string up to 127 characters or a UTF 8 string up to about 42 operation described below Software keyboard screen see page 133 One of the software applications User disc IDs cannot be set to the disc where another user disc
346. on switches By means of combinations of the two switches you can select audio that you want to hear through the built in speaker or optional earphones Position of down side switch CH 1 2 Position of up side Audio output switch CH 1 CH 3 Channel 1 audio MIX Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio stereo CH 2 CH 4 Channel 2 audio Position of down side switch CH 3 4 Position of up side Audio output switch CH 1 CH 3 Channel 3 audio MIX Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio stereo CH 2 CH 4 Channel 4 audio a By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE jack on the rear of the unit you can hear the audio in stereo On the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu HEADPHONE OUT must be set to STEREO Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 15 M Q Je deUD 16 al VDR SAVE STBY VDR save standby switch Switches the status of the power supply to the VDR while recording is stopped STOP or paused REC PAUSE SAVE The disc stops rotating and some functions are disabled Power consumption is lower than when the camcorder is in STBY mode Battery life is extended STBY Recording to the disc starts immediately when the REC START button is pressed An internal operating sound may be recorded at the start of recording when the VDR SAVE STBY switch is set to SAVE GAIN selector Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting T
347. on and you return to the clip list thumbnail screen You can check the results of the addition in that screen 7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips 8 Save the clip list see page 131 In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the SET S SEL button with the SHIFT button held down To reorder sub clips See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip list thumbnail screen select the thumbnails of the sub clips that you want to move multiple selections possible 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Move Sub Clips and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Clip List Move screen appears 006 m 001 034 TC 00 04 35 12 TCO0045710 TC Y TC 00 06 03 03 TC 00 06 25 00 TC00 0646 27 TC 00 07 08 25 paTeaTiME 08 AUG 2007 kb M TOTA DUR 00 13 48 24 4 Move the I cursor to the point where you want to move the selected thumbnails 9 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The sub clips are moved to the I cursor position 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 as required Scene Selection Clip List Editing su 199 ND ul suoneiedo g Je deup 129 SueaJog MH ui suonejedo c Ja deyo 130 T Save the clip list see page 131 To adjust the In and Out points of sub clips trim Proceed as follows to define the range of a scene by changing the positions of the In and Out points See page 114 for more informat
348. on about GUI screen operations Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Settings and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 3 Select Setting Format Disc and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 4 Select Disable and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Displaying disc and clip properties in a web browser By connecting this unit and a computer over a network you can display disc properties and clip properties in a web browser installed on the computer Web Thumbnail function The Clip Properties page also allows you to download high resolution clip data proxy AV data and metadata from this unit and to save that data on your computer The Planning Metadata page allows you to load planning metadata directly into the memory of this unit Recommended browsers The following browsers are recommended nternet Explorer 8 D nternet Explorer 9 1 1 This function may not work properly in 32 bit versions of Internet Explorer if you are using a 64 bit version of Microsoft Windows You should use a 64 bit version of Internet Explorer with 64 bit versions of Windows To display the unit s XDCAM web pages 1 Connect this unit and a computer to a network see page 233 2 Start the browser on the computer and enter http IP address of this unit in the address bar of the browser and then press the Enter key For example if the IP address of this unit is 192 168 001 01
349. on mode and FRAME RATE on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu is set to a value that is greater than the system frequency the lower limits for shutter speed settings are as shown below 29 97P 60 00Hz 25P 50 00Hz SYSTEM System Shutter speed unit 23 98P 48 00Hz LINE setting frequency seconds 1080 59 941 To V125 230 SLS slow speed shutter mode i i Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level 500 1000 gt 2000 lighting conditions Wi Heo Mis 250 i SYSTEM LINE Shutter speed unit soo 1000 gt 2000 setting frames 29 97P N49 a leo lio 1080 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 1 720 2 4 6 8 16 125 gt 250 1500 1 1 1000 gt 2000 Notes 25P las a 50 Tio Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter 1 1 the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing N25 aso soo shutter speed 1000 1 090 When the automatic iris is used the iris opens wider as 1 1 1 the shutter speed increases thus reducing the depth of ae 132 lags Iso Heg field loe lios l so Under artificial light particularly fluorescent or 1 1 1 mercury lamps the light intensity may appear to be 15995 1000 i 300 i n 2000 constant but the red green and blue intensities are 720 59 94P ioo 7 125 250 gt actually changing in synchronization with the Liss ae ooo frequency of the power supply causing flicker Using 50P an electronic shutter under such lighting could
350. ons of Parts and Controls MENU knob Changes the page selection or a setting within the menu For details about how to use the MENU knob see Menu Operations page 193 EARPHONE jack monaural minijack You can monitor the E E sound during recording and playback sound during playback When an alarm is indicated you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone You can use this with the EARPHONE jack on the rear of the unit at the same time Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built in speaker 1 E E Abbreviation of Electric to Electric In E E mode video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal electric circuits only This can be used to check input signals J AUTO W B BAL automatic white black balance adjustment switch Activates the automatic white black balance adjustment functions WHT Adjusts the white balance automatically If the WHITE BAL switch see page 16 is set to A or B the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory If the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST the automatic white balance adjustment function does not operate BLK Adjusts the black set and black balance automatically MIC microphone LEVEL control Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1 2 3 and 4 For details see Adjusting the Audio Level page 66 Right side near the front 3 D ow ESCAPE
351. ooting with the camcorder on your shoulder Shoulder pad 1 Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad 2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position 3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position Connecting the Remote Control Unit Before connecting disconnecting a remote control unit to from the camcorder be sure to turn the power of the camcorder off Connecting the RM B170 B750 Remote Control Unit enables remote control of the principal camera functions Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE connector 8 pin automatically puts the camcorder into remote control mode If you disconnect the remote control unit the remote control mode is cancelled RM B170 B750 Remote control cable REMOTE connector Camcorder switch functions when the remote control unit is connected The following switches on the camcorder do not function GAIN selector OUTPUT DCC switch WHITE BAL switch AUTO W B BAL switch SHUTTER selector Button to which the TURBO SWITCH function has been assigned ASSIGN 1 3 4 5 switch or RET button on the lens REC START button and the VTR button on the lens and the button to which the recording start stop function has been assigned ASSIGN 1 3 4 5 switch or RET button on the lens when the RM RE
352. or add parts of a clip You can add scenes using chapters change the playback sequence and amend or delete In and Out points All of these operations can be carried out easily on this unit Clip lists editing data created with the scene selection function can be used on XPRI and other full feature nonlinear editing systems Clips Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called clips A clip contains the material from a recording start point to a recording end point Clips have numbers beginning with C for example C0001 Recording Recording start point end point of clip 2 of clip 2 Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Clip 4 C0001 C0002 C0003 C0004 You can also assign titles to your clips and use the titles to manage them instead of the clip numbers For more information see Assigning user defined clip titles automatically page 91 Clip lists You can use the scene selection function to select clips from the clips saved on a disc and create a cut edit list called a clip list Clip lists have numbers beginning with E for example E0001 Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc Sub clips clips in clip lists Clips or parts of clips that have been added to a clip list are called sub clips Sub clips are virtual editing data that specify ranges in the original clips You can use them without modifying the original data The following figure illustrates the relation C0002 betwe
353. or user bits R RUN Timecode advances only during recording Use this setting to have a consecutive timecode on the disc For details see Setting the timecode page 69 and Setting the user bits page 69 3 LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1 2 recording level knobs Adjusts the audio levels to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 when the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches are set to MANUAL SUB CLIP indicator This lights when using a clip list for playback El SUB CLIP DISC MENU button Press this to play back according to a clip list You can play back a particular clip or sequential clips or carry out a search of the selected clip list To display the Disc Menu which allows you to carry out operations such as saving recalling or deleting a clip list hold down the SHIFT button and press this button E SHIFT button Use this in combination with other buttons PRESET REGEN regeneration CLOCK switch Selects whether to set a new timecode or to utilize the existing timecode PRESET Records a new timecode REGEN Records timecode continuous with the existing timecode recorded on the disc Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in R RUN mode CLOCK Records timecode synchronized to the internal clock Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in F RUN mode AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1 2 adjustment method selection swit
354. orrectly 4 Set the iris switch on the lens to MANUAL and check that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris correctly D Set the iris switch on the lens back to AUTO and check the following points when the GAIN selector is moved from L to M to H Even when the brightness of the object does not change the iris is automatically adjusted in accordance with the change in the gain setting The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes to correspond to the change in setting Testing the Camcorder before Shooting eoueuejure N 6 Je deuD 241 eoueuejure N 6 Ja deuD 242 6 If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens put the extender lever of the lens into the 2x position and check the following points The indication EX appears at the top left on the viewfinder screen The auto iris functions correctly Testing the VDR Perform tests 1 to 7 consecutively 1 Testing the recording and playback functions 1 Set the VDR SAVE STBY switch to SAVE and check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes on 2 Set the VDR SAVE STBY switch to STBY and check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes off 3 Set the switches located below the color LCD as follows BRIGHT button H M or L DISP SEL EXPAND button STATUS DISPLAY switch COUNTER 4 Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET and set the F RUN SET R RUN to R RUN D Press the REC START button and check
355. ot Markl Shot Mark2 and Rec Start essence marks are set To delete the shot mark at a chapter position You can delete the shot mark Shot MarkO to Shot Mark9 at the chapter position in the chapter thumbnail screen Rec Start essence marks cannot be deleted 1 m the chapter thumbnail screen select the thumbnail for the frame whose shot mark you want to delete 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Delete Essence Mark A message appears asking if you are sure that you want to delete the shot mark Delete Essence Mark Delete 0027 OK 4 Select OK to delete the mark or Cancel to cancel the deletion and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To adjust the position of shot marks at chapter positions You can use the chapter thumbnail screen to adjust the position of shot marks Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark9 at chapter positions The positions of Rec Start essence marks cannot be adjusted 1 m the chapter thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the shot mark whose position you want to adjust 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Move Essence Mark The Move Essence Mark screen is displayed 0002 0002 Move Essence Mark ShotMark2 TCR 00 28 23 14 You can perform playback and searches in this screen 4 Use the PLAY PAUSE button or F REV F FWD buttons to display the frame you want You can also perform jog playback by turning the MENU knob 5 Select OK and then press the SET S SE
356. ou can load up to five scene files stored on a USB flash drive into the camcorder memory in a single operation How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select SCENE RECALL and press the MENU knob The SCENE RECALL page appears 3 Turnthe MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL page which contains the desired scene files appears and press the MENU knob 4 Select SFILE LOAD MEM1 5 and press the MENU knob The message RECALL OK YES NO appears Saving and Loading Scene Files geq umes sn Bulpeo7 pue Bues 7 sajdeuD iw N o geq Buses 1es Bulpeo7 pue uneg 7 Jaydeyo 226 5 To carry out the load recall select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO When loading is complete the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off The scene files loaded from a USB flash drive overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory when the USB flash drive is connected return to the POO SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in the camcorder memory When there is no file to be loaded shown as NO FILE an existing file of the same number is unaffected In the example shown in st
357. page 3 Specify the connection destination see the next section for how to specify it To specify a connection destination by automatic detection 1 On the Wi Fi SETTING page select SCAN NETWORKS and then press the MENU knob The screen changes to the NETWORKS page and automatic detection of the connection destination starts Several minutes may be required for network detection POOONETWORKS SCAN ESC 201 SSID TYPE Adjustments and Settings from Menus sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuayy 9 JajdeyD 213 sBumes pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 214 This page displays the following network items Item Description SSID Network name TYPE Network connection mode INFRA Infrastructure mode ADHOC Ad hoc mode LVL Signal strength 0 minimum to 4 maximum MODE IEEE 802 11 standard 2 Select the desired access point or computer from the detected items and then press the MENU knob You return to the Wi Fi SETTING page Check the various setting items To return to the Wi Fi SETTING page If you do not want to specify a connection destination on this page or if no connection destination was detected select ESC and then press the MENU knob to return to the Wi Fi SETTING page To use the Wi Fi remote control When using a Wi Fi connection you can access the Wi Fi remote control built into the camcorder from a Wi Fi connected device such as a smartphone or tablet You
358. peration Action to take H Disc almost full Operation continues Be prepared to exchange the disc Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator PEN b EE only when recording the 5 300th clip ai Problem VDR operation Action to take Nine or fewer clips remain Operation continues Be prepared to exchange the disc 2 Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT 12522 indication indicator yg DISC and flash xc 5 D Se A Problem VDR operation Action to take E Disc full Recording stops Exchange the disc 2222 Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT Gy indication indicator a M se DY A gt 9 a SH Problem VDR operation Action to take We Disc cannot be used in unit Automatically ejects Exchange the disc Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT ry indication indicator 7 cE P 205005 c m am l yy g Problem VDR operation Action to take N Disc cannot be used Automatically ejects Exchange the disc 248 Operation Warnings 5 iL a e Q ES i a N 2 5 MAX Clips BATT EMPTY LOW BATT High TEMP Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator Problem VDR operation Action to take Disc cannot be salvaged Cannot record Salvage on device used to record Warning State WARNING Warning sound
359. plays the name or a title of the clip that contains the selected frame see page 107 Displaying menus Thumbnail Menu The Thumbnail Menu displays menu items that are valid for the currently displayed thumbnail screen To display the Thumbnail Menu To display the Thumbnail Menu press the MENU button with a thumbnail screen displayed To return to the original screen press the MENU button again or press the RESET RETURN button OQ RESET RETURN button MENU button O THUMBNAIL tsp MARK o sucus E CED DO WV qu e REGEN can H 4 Q e emo ie Thumbnail screen 9 TC 00 DATE amp TIME 30 NOV 2005 14 14 bur 0 23 22 26 Thumbnail Menu Select Index Picture Clip Properties Add Sub Clips SHIFT SET Delete Clip SHIFT RESET Lock Unlock Clip SHIFT STOP Set Clip Flag gt Skip Scroll Thumbnail Search gt Thumbnail Menu P a Clip thumbnail screen b Thumbnail Menu of the clip thumbnail screen Shortcut operations Shortcut button names are displayed next to the menu items of commands that have shortcuts see page 147 Shortcuts displayed within parentheses should be used with all menus closed Thumbnail Menu submenus The Thumbnail Search Menu contains the basic commands for thumbnail searches The Thumbnail View Menu contains the basic commands for moving to other menus Overview SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedo s Jejdeu 111 SU9BINS ND
360. posed ON or OFF a To carry out superimposed recording select the SHOT ID number 1 to 4 Not to carry out superimposed recording select OFF 3 Turn the MENU knob to select ON OFF or the SHOT ID number and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items To carry out superimposed recording To actually record the items selected for superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page set the OUTPUT DCC switch to BARS DCC OFF The items selected for superimposed recording appear on the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color bars Example display when SHOT DATA is set to ON 08 03 15 Setting the shot ID You can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters spaces and symbols When the OUTPUT DCC switch is set to BARS DCC OFF this shot ID is output with the color bar signal You can set four shot IDs ID 1 to ID 4 When the menu is displayed the shot ID is not displayed even if the color bar signal is output How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor sBumes pojrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 205 sBumes pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 206 1 Display the SHOT ID page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 O200SH
361. put BNC type 1 0 5 Vp p to 18 Vp p 10 kQ SDI input BNC type 1 HD SD switchable HD SDI SMPTE 292M with embedded audio SD SDI SMPTE 259M with embedded audio Audio input CH 1 CH 2 XLR type 3 pin female 2 Line Mic Mic 48V AES EBU selectable Microphone input XLR type 5 pin female stereo 1 Outputs Test output BNC 1 switchable HD Y SD composite character on off SDI outputs BNC type 2 1 HD SD switchable HD SDI SMPTE 292M with embedded audio SD SDI SMPTE 259M with embedded audio 2 HD SD switchable character on off HD SDI SMPTE 292M with embedded audio SD SDI SMPTE 259M with embedded audio Audio output CH 1 CH 2 XLR type 5 pin male stereo 1 Timecode output BNC type 1 1 0 Vp p 75 Q Earphone output Mini jack 2 Front monaural Rear stereo monaural Speaker output Monaural Others DC input XLR type 4 pin male 1 11Vto17V DC output 4 pin 1 for wireless adaptor or UHF synthesized diversity tuner 11 V to 17 V DC max 1 A Lens 12 pin Remote 8 pin Light 2 pin DC 12 V max 50W Camera adaptor 50 pin 1 Ethernet RJ 45 1 100BASE TX IEEE 802 3u 1OBASE T IEEE 802 3 USB For proxy recording on USB flash drive and firmware version update 1 Audio performance Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 5 dB 1 0 dB Dynamic range 93 dB or higher Distortion 8 0 08 or lower at 1 kHz reference e level x
362. r Files page 220 FID Blank up to 16 characters USER PRESET EXEC For details see Resetting USER menu Settings to the standard settings page 200 Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 187 No Page Item Settings Description 02 USER FILE2 STORE USR PRESET EXEC Save settings for items on pages registered in the USER menu as the standard settings CLEAR USR PRESET EXEC Clear the standard setting of pages registered in the USER menu CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC Return the pages registered in the USER menu to the factory default state LOAD CUSTOM OFF ON DATA Selects whether to load page and item customization data when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed LOAD OUT OF USER OFF ON Selects whether to load USER FILE data for items other than the current USER menu items when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF ON Selects whether to load data for items on the pages beyond USER FILE in the USER menu when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed USER LOAD WHITE OFF ON Selects whether to load white balance data when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed 03 ALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD EXEC Load ALL file ALL FILE SAVE EXEC Save ALL file FID Blank up to 16 Name ALL file characters ALL PRESET EXEC Return all items to preset values STORE ALL PRESET EXEC Save the current
363. ral clips or the same is true depending on the value setting Care should be taken when setting the serial number Advanced Operations for Shooting Assigning user defined names to clips and clip lists The following standard format names are assigned automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or recorded by XDCAM devices Clips C0001 MXF to C9999 MXF Clip lists E0001E01 SMI to E0099E01 SMI When you record or create clips and clip lists you can assign user defined names instead of the standard format names Assigning meaningful names to clips and clip lists can facilitate file management Limitations Letters numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2 0 character set can be used However the following control characters and symbols cannot be used Control characters U 0000 to U 001F U 007F Symbols lt gt Depending on the character type the length of name C part may be limited to 14 characters The limit for ASCII characters is 56 characters All file name extensions are converted automatically to uppercase Titles are used as user defined clip names on this unit Therefore the available characters are limited to those supported by the title function Files generated along with clips and clip lists are assigned the same names the C or E part of the following file names Clips Metadata files C M0O1 XML user metadata files C M02 KLV proxy
364. rations page 193 You can assign functions by using the following items Item Description ASSIGN SW Assigns the function to 1l ASSIGN 1 push type switch ASSIGN SW Assigns the function to lt 2 gt ASSIGN 2 slide type switch ASSIGN SW Assigns the function to lt 3 gt ASSIGN 3 push type switch ASSIGN SW Assigns the function to lt 4 gt ASSIGN 4 push type switch ASSIGN SW Assigns the function to 5 ASSIGN 5 push type switch ASSIGN SW Assigns the function to RET lt RET gt button on the lens Select the desired switch or button and press the MENU knob A selection screen for the selected switch or button appears You can use these screens to assign one of the following functions Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 5 push type switch or RET button on the lens Function Description OFF Assigns no function FRONT MIC Assigns the function that switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected PICTURE CACHE Assigns execution of recording in picture cache mode SUPER VFDISP amp MENU Assigns a mixing switch function that selects mixing or no mixing of superimposed viewfinder and menu text data into the video signals output from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector when SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu are set to ON MARKER Assigns the function that
365. rations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 pages MARKER 1 page Item Description MARKER To hide all markers set to OFF CENTER To display the center marker set to ON CENTER Selects the display mode of the MARK center marker SAFETY To display the safety zone set ZONE to ON SAFETY Selects the safety zone range AREA 80 90 92 5 or 95 ASPECT To display the aspect marker set to ON ASPECT Selects the aspect mode 15 9 SELECT 14 9 13 9 4 3 1 85 2 35 ASPECT To make the areas out of the MASK selected aspect marker dimmer set to ON ASPECT To set the mask level when the MASKLVL ASPECT MASK is set to ON 100 To display the effective pixel MARKER area set to ON a 100 MARKER is disabled when the focus assist indicator is displayed Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD 203 The four items ASPECT ASPECT SELECT ASPECT MASK and ASPECT MASK LVL are ignored when the recording format is IMX50 40 30 or DVCAM and the aspect ratio is 4 3 MARKER 2 page Item Description USER BOX Turns the display of the box cursor on and off USER BOX Sets the width of the box WIDTH cursor distance from center to left or right edg
366. rce materials To set UMID ownership information How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Setthe following item Item Contents COUNTRY CODE Country code ORGANIZATION Organization code USER CODE User code TIME ZONE Time difference from UTC For details on how to enter characters see Setting the shot ID page 205 3 Press the MENU knob About UMID ownership information COUNTRY CODE Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string 4 byte alphanumeric strings according to the values defined in ISO 3166 1 There are about 240 country codes Find your own country code on the following home page Refer to ISO 3166 1 http www iso org iso country codes iso_3166_code_lists htm When the country code is less than 4 bytes the active part of the code will occupy the first part of the 4 bytes and the remainder must be filled with the space character 20h Example In the case of Japan For Japan if the country code is JP it is 2 bytes if JPN it is 3 bytes Thus enter the following JP or JPN _ where _ represents a space ORGANIZATION organization code Enter an abbreviated 4 byte alphanumeric string for the organization code Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the
367. rder POWER switch Turns the main power supply on and off Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls M Q 491deuo 11 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 12 DC IN DC power input connector XLR type 4 pin male To operate the camcorder from an AC power supply connect an optional DC power cord to this terminal and then connect the cord to the DC output terminal of the BC L70 BC L160 or another battery charger El DC OUT 12V DC power output connector 4 pin female Supplies power for a CBK WA100 Wireless Adaptor or WRR 860A 861 862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner not supplied maximum 1 0 A Do not connect any equipment other than the wireless adaptor or UHF synthesized diversity tuner Battery attachment shoe Attach a BP L80S FL75 Battery Pack Alternatively you can attach an AC DN2B DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the camcorder on AC power supply For details about how to attach the battery or AC adaptor see Preparing a Power Supply page 33 For information about attaching a synthesized tuner see Attaching a UHF portable tuner for a UHF wireless microphone system page 45 For your safety and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs BP L80S and BP FL75 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Accessory attachments Shoulder strap fitting Attach the supplied shoulder strap see page 49 Accessory fitt
368. reflectance 1080 59 94i F11 typical 1080 50i F12 typical Minimum illumination Approx 0 3 Ix F1 4 lens 42 dB with slow shutter Off White balance Preset 3200K Memory A Memory B ATW Gain selection 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 dB S N ratio 62 dB 58 dB without noise suppressor Horizontal resolution 1000 TV lines or more 1920 x 1080i mode Registration 0 02 or less for entire screen area excluding distortion due to lens Specifications Modulation depth screen center 45 or higher at 27 5 MHz typical Digital extender x2 x3 x4 Viewfinder and related equipment Viewfinder HDVF 20A 200 C35W C30WR Viewfinder Rotation Bracket BKW 401 Contact a Sony service representative for information about the viewfinders able to use the BKW 401 Other equipment Built in LCD monitor 3 5 inch type color LCD monitor 960 x 540 D 1 Viewable area measured diagonally Built in speaker 1 Optical disc drive section General Supported discs PFDSODLA Professional Disc capacity 50 0 GB PFD23A Professional Disc capacity 23 3 GB Data transfer rate Max 72 Mbps Digital video performance Sampling frequency Y 74 176 MHz 59 941 74 25 MHz 50i 25P Pb Pr 37 088 MHz 59 94i 37 125 MHz 50i 25P Quantization 8 bits sample Compression MPEG 2 4 2 2P HL 50 Mbps Supplied accessories Shoulder strap 1 Microphone cable 1 Microphone spacer 1 Len
369. remote devices and remote computers Overview Item Operation Setting Settings Sub Item SET Key on Thumbnail Selects the behavior of the unit when the SET S SEL button or MENU knob is pressed with one thumbnail selected Cue up amp Still Cue up the selected thumbnail Cue up amp Play Cue up and play the selected thumbnail Sort Clip List by Selects a method to sort the clip list Name A Z Sort in ascending alphabetic order Date Newest First Sort by date and time of creation newest clip list first Sort Planning Metadata by Selects a method to sort the planning metadata Name A Z Sort in ascending alphabetic order Date Newest First Sort by date and time of creation newest planning metadata first Display Title Selects whether to display clip and clip list titles On Title1 title1 Display the title in the following order of priority Titlel Title2 Clip name or Clip list name On Title2 title2 Display the title in the following order of priority Title2 Titlel Clip name or Clip list name Off Do not display the title Always display the clip name or clip list name Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area Selects how to display in the video monitor screen the title contained in a planning metatdata file that is loaded into this unit ASCII Clip Name Display title in ASCII format Clip Name Display title in UTF 8 format Planning Clip Name Display
370. ring appears 030 CLIP TITLE TOP TITLE ENABL SELECT PREFIX EXEC CLEAR NUMERIC EXEC LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC PREFIX TITLE 1 4 amp 0 0123456789 ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPGRSTUU UXYZI1 abcdefshiJklmnoP arstuvwxyz INS DEL RET ESC END 3 Move M onto the character you want to change and then press the MENU knob 4 Turn the MENU knob to move Ml onto the desired character in the list of selectable characters and then press the MENU knob 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the remaining characters 6 When you have finished entering the prefix turn the MENU knob to move W to END and then press the MENU knob The camcorder exits prefix input mode and the original CLIP TITLE page appears To set the initial value of the clip title serial number You can set the initial value of the clip title serial number to 00001 default or to any 5 digit value To return the initial value to 00001 How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page on the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select CLEAR NUMERIC and then press the MENU knob The message CLEAR OK 9 YES NO appears J Select YES and then press the MENU knob The value in the NUMERIC field returns to 00001 Advanced Operations for Shooting Dunoous y je1deu 93 Bunooug y je1deuo 94 To set t
371. rmally an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen in display mode 2 or 3 Possible messages are listed below Error message Meaning WHITE NG The white video level is LOW LEVEL too low Either open the lens iris or increase the gain WHITE NG The color temperature is COLOR TEMP too high HIGH WHITE NG The color temperature is COLOR TEMP LOW too low WHITE NG Adjustment could not be TIME LIMIT completed within the standard number of attempts Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance Error message Meaning WHITE NG The white area could not POOR WHITE be checked AREA WHITE NG The white video level is OVER LEVEL too high Either stop down the lens iris or change the ND filter If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the white balance adjustment If the error message occurs again an internal check is necessary For information about this internal check refer to the Maintenance Manual If you have no time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST For details of automatic white balance adjustment see page 57 White balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is next adjusted There are two sets of white balance memories A and B and adjustments for each of the CC filters can be automatically stored in the memory corresponding to the setting A or B of
372. rmation about the various properties Disc Operations su 199 N9 ul suoneiedo g 1e1deu 137 SueaJog MH ui suonejedo s Ja deyo 138 Disc Properties Device Information zT EEETUENE scugessse E SERRE m Ez oo AS pecus e con Thumbnails E 217 tines Software Update License Registration To display clip thumbnails Click Thumbnails in the Disc menu A page of thumbnails of clips on the disc appears Each thumbnail page displays up to 12 thumbnails Like the thumbnails in the unit s GUI screens see page 108 the thumbnails display several information items including index picture changed marks S marks clip flag icons and lock icons Thumbnails Device Information Disc Properties ut Software Update License Registration I 10012121 gt gt When multiple pages exist you can switch pages by clicking lt lt back five pages lt back one page gt forward one page or gt gt forward five pages To display clip properties In the Thumbnails page select a clip by clicking its thumbnail The properties of that clip appear in the Clip Properties page See Checking clip properties page 121 for more information about the various properties Disc Operations XDCAM HD SONY Status Clip Properties Device Information Hours Meter Que Software Version Disc Disc Properties 26
373. rom the setup menu For details of manual black balance adjustment refer to the Maintenance Manual Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance Bunooug 104 sBunes pue sjueunsn py e 4e1deuo 55 Bunooys 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e sa deyo 56 OUTPUT DCC switch AUTO W B BAL switch Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM 2 F lick the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK and release the switch The switch returns to the center position and the adjustment is executed During adjustment the following message is displayed on the viewfinder screen ABB EXECUT ING BLACK_SET The messages change in the following sequence BLACK SET BLACK BALANCE The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds with the message ABB OK and the adjustment value is automatically stored in memory During the black balance adjustment the iris is automatically closed During the black balance adjustment the gain selection circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen but this is not a fault If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance Possible messages are listed below Error message ABB NG IRIS NOT CLOSE Meaning The lens iris did not close adjust
374. rs in the expand thumbnail screen see page 109 with the first frame of each block displayed as a thumbnail 3 Select the thumbnail that you want to expand further 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 up to twice as required Thumbnails cannot be further expanded when they already have the minimum duration 1 frame To return to the previous expansion level Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button with the SHIFT button held down To display the expand thumbnail screen of the previous or next clip With the expand thumbnail screen still active press the PREV button or the NEXT button Using the chapter function to find scenes Chapters are the sections between the shot marks Rec Start marks and other essence marks Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at the start of recording but shot marks can be set at any scene during recording or playback The chapter function allows you to display thumbnails of the chapters in a clip See Recording essence marks page 82 for more information See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of a clip with chapters set The S mark appears on the thumbnails of clips with chapters set 2 Pressthe HOLD CHAPTER button The chapter thumbnail screen see page 109 appears with thumbnails of the frames where chapters are set The S1 S2 and RS marks on the thumbnails indicate frames where Sh
375. rt frame gt specifies an offset from the start of the file Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset the first frame is 0 lt transfer size gt specifies the number of video frames to transfer specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file Input example SITE REPFL Clip sakura 0001 MXF 5 150 Transfer sakura 0001 MXF Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 150 SITE FSTS Acquires the system status of this unit One of the following status codes is sent 0 Initial state or no disc is loaded 1 File system mount is OK 3 File system mount is not OK Syntax SITE FSTS lt CRLF gt SITE MEID Acquires the media ID of the disc loaded in this unit Syntax SITE MEID lt CRLF gt SITE FUNC Acquires the function and version of the expanded commands Information is sent in the following format main function SP branch function SP branch function version For XDCAM sent in a format like 200 MXF DISK 1 200 is a response code Syntax SITE FUNC lt CRLF gt SITE UMMD When C MXF file is sent with the STOR the copy source UMID is saved if this command is invoked immediately before the STOR command Syntax SITE UMMD lt CRLF gt SITE DF Acquires the amount of free disc space Syntax SITE lt SP gt DF lt CRLF gt SITE CHMOD Locks and unlocks clips Also sets permissions for directories and files in the General directory Syntax SITE CHMOD SP flag SP
376. s Protect the unit from shocks and vibrations turn off the power and contact a Sony service representative a Asterisks are replaced by digits in the display b During recording c During playback fast forward fast reverse or stop d During recording pause e During recording or pause f 1 flash s g 4 flashes s h During recording displayed in the LCD monitor only When the DISP SEL EXPAND button is set to STATUS i During recording and recording pause displayed in the LCD monitor only When the DISP SEL EXPAND button is set to STATUS j When TL RE 3 layer disc is inserted k When QL R 4 layer disc is inserted For details about the warning displays and alarm messages on the viewfinder see the next item Operation alarm messages Operation and alarm messages are displayed in the operation alarm message display area see page 31 of the viewfinder screen AUTO The unit is operating in Auto INTERVAL Interval Rec mode M S M S Indicates the shooting interval in minutes and seconds MANU The unit is operating in the single INTERVAL shot mode of Manual Interval Rec FRAME mode FRAME Indicates the number of frames recorded in one shot INTERVAL The unit is operating in the S M H consecutive mode of Manual FRAME Interval Rec mode S M H Indicates the trigger interval in seconds minutes or hours FRAME Indicates the number of frames recorded in one
377. s The new metadata types enable more efficient workflows when clips recorded on this unit are edited on nonlinear editing systems Software downloads When the unit is used with a PC connection download device drivers plug ins and application software where applicable from the Sony Professional products web site Sony Professional products and solutions site homepage U S A http pro sony com Canada http www sonybiz ca Latin America http sonypro latin com Europe Middle East and Africa http www pro sony eu Japan http www sonybsc com Asia Pacific http pro sony asia com Korea http bp sony co kr China http pro sony com cn Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Power supply LIGHT switch Determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT connector see page 13 is turned on and off AUTO When the POWER switch of the video light is in the on position the video light is turned on automatically while the camcorder is recording MANUAL You can turn the video light on or off manually using its own switch When this switch is set to AUTO at the beginning of the recording the picture is recorded even though the lighting may fluctuate until the video light comes on If the beginning of the recording is important you should set this switch to MANUAL To ensure proper operation of the video light Sony recommends the use of the BP L80S Battery Pack with the camco
378. s Jf AS SHIFT button SUB CLIP DISC MENU button Clip list thumbnail screen Clip List E0001 002 013 TC 00 00 12 04 TC 00 4 TC 00 00 28 08 TC 00 00 35 15 TCO FX P i M TC 00 00 59 16 TC 00 01 06 18 TC00 01 13 11 DATETIME 28 JUL 2006 19 55 TC 00 01 17 27 TOTAL DUR ei S 5 Disc Menu Save Clip List Save Clip List as Delete Clip List Clear Clip List Load Planning Metadata Select Drive Planning Metadata Properties Clear Planning Metadata a or Delete All Clips Overview GUI screen operations MENU knob Up down arrow buttons SET S SEL button To select items Do one of the following to select thumbnails menu items timecode digits and other items Turn the MENU knob Press the up down left or right arrow button Press the PREV or NEXT button With the SHIFT button held down press the PREV or NEXT button to move to the first or last item Press the PREV button with the F REV button held down or press the NEXT button with the F FWD button held down to move to the first or last item With the SHIFT button held down press the up or down arrow button to move to the previous or next page Press the F REV or F FWD button to move to the previous or next page To select multiple thumbnails Do one of the following With the SHIFT button held down turn the MENU knob With t
379. s P Yes 9 Yes Yes 9 E MO01 XML 9 0001 to 0099 Metadata file generated automatically Yes when E E01 SMI file is created Yes No9 No No9 Other files Files other than the above a The E part can be changed to a user defined name b Only files which can be written by XDCAM Partial writing is not possible c Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE d Only files which can be written by XDCAM e When the E part of a E E01 SMI is changed an E MOI XMI file with the same name in the E part is also changed automatically f When an E E01 SMI file is created an E MO1 XML file with the same name in the E part is also generated automatically g When an E E01 SMI file is deleted an E M01 XML file with the same name in the E part is also deleted automatically Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory Overview suonejedo e 9 1e1deuj 231 suoljesado aji4 g seydeyp 232 Sub directory File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write C S01 MXE Proxy AV data MXF file generated Yes No No No No9 automatically when a C MXF file is created 0001 to 9999 Other files Files other than the above No No a The C part can be changed to a user defined name b When the C part of a C MXF file name is changed a C S01 MXF
380. s mount cap 1 Operation Guide 1 Operation Manual CD ROM 1 Additional equipment Power supply and related equipment BP L80S FL75 Battery Pack BC L160 L500 L70 Battery Charger AC DN10 DN2B AC Adaptor Equipment for remote control RM B170 B750 Remote Control Unit Audio equipment ECM 680S Stereo Monaural Microphone ECM 678 673 Monaural Microphone CAC 12 Microphone Holder DWR S02D Digital Wireless Receiver WRR 855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit WRR 860A 861 862 UHF Synthesized Diver sity Tuner WRT 850 860 UHF Synthesized Transmitter DWT B01 Digital Wireless Transmitter DMX P02 Portable Digital Mixer Other peripheral devices CBK WAO01 Wi Fi Adaptor CBK WA100 Wireless Adaptor PDW HR1 XDCAM HD422 Field Station CA FB70 Camera Adaptor CA TX70 Camera Adaptor Equipment for maintenance and easier handling LC H300 Hard Carrying Case LC DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case VCT 14 Tripod Adaptor Maintenance Manual Design and specifications are subject to change without notice Only when using the CBK WA01 Wi Fi Adaptor SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM A FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT PROPER SECURITY MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS RESULTING FROM TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS OR SECURITY PROBLEMS OF ANY KIND Specifications xipueddy 261 xipueddy 262 Always make a test recording and verify that it was recorded successfully SONY
381. s the SHIFT PREV buttons to move to the start of the clip list 3 Pressthe PLAY PAUSE button To change the starting timecode of clip lists The timecode of clip lists is continuous timecode unrelated to the timecode of the original clips By default the timecode LTC of the start of the clip list is 00 00 00 00 but it can be set to any value See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Thumbnail Menu 2 Select Set Start Time Code and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Set Start Time Code screen appears Set Start Time Code Preset TC 00 00 00 00 Cancel 3 Press the left or right arrow button to select the digit that you want to change 4 Turn the MENU knob to change the value of the digit Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required To reset the timecode to 00 00 00 00 Select Reset to Zero in the Thumbnail Menu and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To preset the frequently used timecode Select Save Preset TC in the Thumbnail Menu and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The timecode set in steps 3 and 4 is saved as a preset value To recall the preset timecode Select Recall Preset TC in the Thumbnail Menu and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 6 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob OK is selected T Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob again 8
382. s the same video as in the viewfinder SDI OUT2 Selects whether to superimpose SUPER ON or not superimpose OFF text information on the signal output from the SDI OUT2 connector Disabled when SDI OUT 2 SELECT is set to VF Item Setting TEST OUT Selects the output signal from SELECT the TEST OUT connector VBS Output composite video signal When you select VBS connect to the VIDEO IN connector of your monitor Y Output HD Y signal R G B Output HD RGB signal TEST OUT Selects whether to superimpose SUPER ON or not superimpose OFF text information on the signal output from the TEST OUT connector 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Settings on decks in order to receive SDI ANC ancillary data PDW HD1500 To record camera metadata including GPS data superimposed on the HD SDI signal together with the audio video signal set the VANC RX PARAMETER values in the Maintenance menu to the following values Line 11 DID 0x43 SDID 0x05 Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches You can assign the desired function to any of the ASSIGN switches How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu ope
383. s which can be written by XDCAM Clip directory Directories cannot be created in the root directory The directories in the root directory Clip Edit Sub UserData General and PROAV cannot be deleted or renamed File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write C MXF Clip file created by recording MXF file Yes NoD 9 yes Yes Yes 0001 to 9999 C MOI XML 9 Metadata file generated automatically Yes YesD Nog NoP Nov when C MXF file is created 0001 to 9999 C MO2 KLV 9 User metadata file This type of file is Yes Yes No9 Yes Yes generated automatically during recording via an FTP connection when the unit recognizes that an MXF file contains metadata that was generated by a non XDCAM device 0001 to 9999 Other files Files other than the above No No a The C part can be changed to a user defined name b Overwriting is not possible c Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length in a format matching the format system frequency 59 941 50i or 25P and recording format MPEG HD422 and number of audio channels of the recorded sections of the disc and which can be overwritten by XDCAM Partial writing is not possible d Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE Any clip may be selected and deleted f Only files which can be written by XDCAM g When the C p
384. sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuey 9 JajdeyD 165 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nue 9 saldeyp 166 No Page Item Settings Description 11 SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL OFF ON Turns on or off all of channels 1 2 and 3 for the color detail function SKIN DETECT Moves to color detection page Executes the color detail function SKIN AREA IND OFF ON Turns on and off the function that displays a zebra pattern where color was detected When this is ON a zebra pattern is output from the following connectors SDI OUT 2 connector when all of the following are true SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to HDSDI SDI OUT 2 SUPER is set to ON and either SUPER MENU or SUPER ZEBRA on the SUPER IMPOSE page is set to ON TEST OUT connector when both of the following are true TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON and SUPER MENU or SUPER ZEBRA on the SUPER IMPOSE page is set to ON SKIN DTL SELECT 1 2 3 Selects the skin detail channel SKIN DETAIL OFF ON Sets CH 1 2 3 selected avobe on off SKIN DETAIL LVL 99 to 99 Sets the level of the color detail signal SKIN DTL SAT 99 to 99 Adjusts the saturation level of the hue possessed by the color detail function SKIN DTL HUE 0 to 359 Adjusts the center phase of the hue possessed by the color detail function SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 39 to 359 Adjusts the wid
385. sages see Change confirmation adjustment progress messages page 203 For details about marker display see Setting the marker display page 203 All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen are shown below Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Top of viewfinder screen Color temperature Displays a color temperature calculated from the gain of R and B in the range 0 0 K to 99 9 K in steps of 0 1 K The signs may be displayed depending on the OFFSET WHT setting see page 217 No display OFFSET WHT is OFF The value of OFFSET WHT is greater than 3200K The value of OFFSET WHT is less than 3200K Video format Indicates the format of video being currently played back or recorded see page 53 The video aspect ratio 16 9 or 4 3 can also be displayed when the recording format is set to IMX 50 IMX 40 IMX 30 or DVCAM Extender Displays the extender settings of this unit and the lens EX The lens extender is on 08 The lens shrinker is on x2D The unit s digital extender is x2 Ex2D The lens extender is on and the unit s digital extender is x2 x3D The unit s digital extender is x3 Ex3D The lens extender is on and the unit s digital extender is x3 x4D The unit s digital extender is x4 Ex4D The lens extender is on and the unit s digital extender is x4 Zoom position Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in the range
386. sc Write Inhibit tab Slide in the direction of the arrow Write Inhibit tab settings SAVE gt SAVE gt Recording enabled Recording disabled Handling Discs 73 Bunooug y e1deuo 74 You can also write protect individual clips For details see Locking write protecting clips page 124 Loading and unloading a disc To load a disc 1 Turn on the POWER switch POWER switch 2 Press the EJECT button This opens the lid of the disc compartment EJECT button 3 D Insert the disc in the V direction and close the disc compartment lid manually Y indication on the outside The disc is loaded Handling Discs To insert the disc correctly make sure that the camcorder is in the upright position the grip upside the bottom downside To unload a disc With the power supply on press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid and eject the disc then remove the disc If you are not going to insert another disc close the disc compartment lid To unload a disc when the power supply is off If the battery is exhausted it is not possible to remove the disc by pressing the EJECT button In such cases use the following emergency procedure to remove the disc manually 1 Turn off the POWER switch 2 Carry out the operation shown in the following figure Open this rubber cover 2 Using a screwdriver or similar implement slide the black metal plate visible inside in
387. screen and LCD monitor aspect ratio automatically or to set it to 16 9 when the IMX50 40 30 or DVCAM recording format is selected When 16 9 is selected then the screen is always displayed as a 16 9 screen before being cut out to 4 3 even when ASPECT RATIO SD is set to 4 3 CRISP Adjusts the crispness level FREQUENCY Selects the center frequency of the detail signal FAT MODE Sets FAT thickens detail edges mode FLICKER Sets the flicker function COLOR Sets the color detail function Setting the viewfinder DETAIL COLOR Selects the color of the color You can make settings for viewfinder screen SEL detail display functions PEAK Sets the color of the peak color How to select an item in the menu screen Turn COLOR detail CHROMA Selects the chroma level of the LEVEL image the MENU knob to move to the desired item sBunes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nue 9 Jeydeu 1 Display the VF SETTING page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 a If you are using a viewfinder which is not equipped with a ZEBRA switch use this item to turn the display on and off If you are using a viewfinder with a ZEBRA switch you can turn the display on and off either with the ZEBRA switch or with this menu operation 204 Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor 3 Turn the MENU k
388. set these flags But before you can do so you need to assign the corresponding flag functions to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 5 switches or the RET button on the lens see page 209 To set a clip flag During recording immediately after recording or during playback including search and still picture playback press the button to which the flag function has been assigned Press the button once at the position where you want to set the flag The specified flag is set and ClpFlg OK NG or KEEP appears near the timecode display in the viewfinder for about three seconds To clear a clip flag During recording or playback press the button to which the flag function has been assigned Press the button twice in rapid succession The flag is cleared and ClpFlg DEL appears for about three seconds You can also set and clear clip flags from a GUI screen For details see Setting clip flags page 124 Setting the thumbnail image at recording time When you record a clip you can specify which frame to use as the clip thumbnail image see page 105 The factory default setting is to use the first frame in the clip as the thumbnail For example if all clips have the same image in their first frames you can specify a frame a few seconds after the start of the clip so that all thumbnails will not show the same image How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item
389. settings of all items as preset values CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC Clear the preset values of all items 3SEC CLR PRESET OFF ON Turns the following function on and off When the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch is held on the CANCEL PRST side for three seconds clear the preset values of each item NETWORK DATA OFF ON Selects whether or not to read in the network related data sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nua 9 saldeyp 188 Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 04 SCENE FILE 1 STANDARD For details see Saving and 2 STANDARD Loading Scene Files page 223 3 STANDARD 4 STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD SCENE RECALL EXEC SCENE STORE EXEC FID STANDARD 05 REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE EXEC Save reference file saved on the USB flash drive in internal memory REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC Clear reference file REFERENCE LOAD EXEC Load reference file REFERENCE SAVE EXEC Save reference file on the USB flash drive FID Blank up to 16 Enter reference file name characters SCENE WHITE DATA OFF ON Selects whether to load white balance data when SCENE RECALL or STANDARD on the SCENE FILE page is executed 06 USER USER GAMMA EXEC Loads user created gamma table GAMMA LOAD data a user gamma file from a USB flash drive into internal memory USER GAMMA EXEC Clears a user gamma file from RESET internal memory FID Displays the name of the user gamma file in internal
390. so use a LAN connection between a computer and the camcorder using an optional CBK WA100 Wireless Adaptor For details about attachment and operation refer to the CBK WA100 operation manual For information about connecting to a wireless LAN refer to the operation manual supplied with the optional CBK WA01 Wi Fi Adaptor Even when the optional CBK WAO1 Wi Fi Adaptor is installed in this unit the message NO Wi Fi ADAPTER may appear if you attempt to set up a wireless LAN immediately after powering the unit on If this occurs wait for a while and try again If the message IEEE802 1X IS ENABLED appears when you change the settings execute NET CFG RESET on the NETWORK 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu and then try again The proxy data recording function is disabled automatically whenever you enable the wireless LAN connection function If using the CBK WA100 the following menu settings are not required Before starting set ETHERNET USB and Wi Fi on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to ENABL How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the Wi Fi page of the MAINTENANCE menu and then press the MENU knob See Basic menu operations page 193 for more information about menu operations M250Ui Fi SETUP D STATUS ESS ODE Cunknown 2 Select Wi Fi SETUP and then press the MENU knob The screen changes to the Wi Fi SETTING
391. splayed in the top right of the viewfinder to indicate that the unit is attempting to obtain location information When the position is established location information is recorded when shooting video Icons displayed on the screen The icon displayed on the screen changes as follows depending on the state of the signals received from GPS satellites Positioning Display GPS receive state status Off No display GPS SETTING is set to OFF or an error has occurred Positioning A GPS signal cannot sia not available be received preventing location information from being obtained Move to a location with a clear view of the sky Searching for AS satellites Searching for GPS satellites Several minutes may be required in order to fix the position A weak GPS signal is being received Positioning f Positioning Display GPS receive state status Positioning fi A GPS signal is being received and location information is available Positioning sil A strong GPS signal is being received and location information is available If a positioning icon is not displayed after several minutes there may be a problem with signal reception You can continue shooting or move to an area with a clear view of the sky Shooting when a positioning icon is not displayed means that location information will not be recorded The GPS signal may not be received when indoors
392. ss from a DHCP Note server This menu is Notes not used when IP address subnet mask default gateway and using the CBK DNS server 1 and 2 cannot be set when DHCP WAI100 is set to ENABLE Wireless To check automatically acquired settings close Adaptor the menu and open it again IP ADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXxX Set the IP address of this unit 192 168 1 10 SUBNET MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX Sets the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 DEF GATEWAY XXX XXX XXX XXX Set the address of the default gateway 0 0 0 0 LINK SPEED AUTO 10Mbps Sets the communications speed 100Mbps DUPLEX AUTO FULL Sets the duplex mode HALF DNS1 XXX XXX XXX XXX Set the address of DNS server 1 0 0 0 0 DNS2 XXX XXX XXX XXX Set the address of DNS server 2 0 0 0 0 UPnP DISABLE Select whether to enable the UPnP universal ENABLE plug and play function DISABLE Disable the UPnP function ENABLE Enable the UPnP function 23 NETWORK 2 NET CFG RESET EXEC Reset network settings to the factory defaults MAC Display only MAC address of this unit 24 WPS Wi Fi DSABL ENABL For details see To specify a connection WPS MODE ONE PUSH destination by WPS operations page 216 PIN CODE PIN UPDATE WPS START EXEC WPS STATUS Display only Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 25 Wi Fi This menu is not used when using the CBK WA100 Wireless Adaptor Wi Fi SETUP EXEC Displays the Wi Fi SETTING page so that you can make wireless L
393. t R Record structure P Page structure Input example STRU F MODE Specifies the transfer mode Syntax MODE SP mode code lt CRLF gt lt mode code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM the mode is always S regardless of the mode code specification S Stream mode default B Block mode C Compressed mode Input example MODE S FTP File Operations suonejedo e g 1e1deuj 235 suoneJedo e l4 9 saideyo 236 LIST Sends a list of files from this unit to the remote computer Syntax LIST SP options SP path name lt CRLF gt lt options gt can be any of the following e a Also display file names that begin with e F Append to directory names The following data is transferred depending on whether path name specifies a directory or file Directory specified A list of the files in the specified directory File specified Information about the specified file No specification A list of the files in the current directory The wildcard characters any string and any character may be used in lt path name gt Input example 1 LIST a Clip Input example 2 LIST Clip MXF NLST Sends a list of file names from this unit to the remote computer with no other information Syntax NLST SP options or path name gt lt CRLF gt The following options may be specified when no path name is specified
394. t gt OFF ON 13 P LED STD GAIN lt gt 0dB LOW MID HIGH For details see Indicators SHUTTER lt gt OFF ECS 1 1007 1 125 page 27 1 250 1 500 1 1000 The setting of SHUTTER lt gt 1 2000 SLS varies depending on the WHITE BAL lt gt P A B PA PB AB resolution and system frequency CC 5600K lt gt OFF ON See page 28 for information about AWEN OON e EXTENDER lt gt OFF ON settings FILTER ND lt gt 1 2 3 4 FILTER CC lt gt A B C D OVERRIDE lt gt OFF ON 14 MARKER 1 MARKER OFF ON For details see Setting the CENTER OFF ON marker display page 203 CENTER MARK 1 2 3 4 SAFTY ZONE OFF ON SAFTY AREA 80 90 92 5 95 ASPECT OFF ON ASPECT SELECT 15 9 14 9 13 9 4 3 1 85 2 35 ASPECT MASK OFF ON ASPECT MASK LVL 0to12to15 100 MARKER OFF ON 15 MARKER 2 USER BOX OFF ON USER BOX WIDTH 3 to 240 to 479 USER BOX HEIGHT 3 to 135 to 269 USER BOX H POS 477 to 0 to 476 USER BOX V POS 267 to 0 to 266 CENTER H POS 480 to 0 to 479 CENTER V POS 270 to 0 to 269 ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF ON ASPECT SAFE AREA 80 90 92 5 95 16 FOCUS FOCUS ASSIST IND OFF ON For details see Using the Focus ASSIST FOCUS IND POS BOTTM LEFT TOP Assist function page 81 RIGHT FOCUS AREA MARK OFF ON Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuey 9 JajdeyD 155 Item Settings Description GAIN LOW 6dB 3dB 0dB 3dB For details see Setting gain 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB X values for th
395. t on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Character display software 1 iType 5 This product includes technology from Monotype Imaging Inc including iType and certain fonts Trademarks and Licenses About libupnp Copyright c 2000 2003 Intel Corporation All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS IN
396. t the desired connection destination from the detected access points and then press the MENU knob Setting the color temperature manually You can manually adjust the value of the white balance by setting the color temperature How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the WHITE page of the PAINT menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the WHITE page Item Description COLOR Sets the color temperature for TEMP A the desired value Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature C TEMP Adjusts the value more BAL A precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN A Changes only the value of R GAIN Item Description B GAIN lt A gt Changes only the value of B GAIN The above table shows the adjustment of the white balance of channel A Items followed by lt B gt are used to adjust the white balance of channel B 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting By setting an offset for the value
397. t to the standard settings 2 Select the desired setting item and press the MENU knob On the VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 and VF DISP 3 pages you can select any of the following items to turn its display on or off VF DISP 1 page Item Description VF DISP Turning on or off the viewfinder display VF DISPLAY Selecting the display MODE mode P DISP EXTENDER Extender indicator DISP FILTER Types of the ND filter DISP WHITE White balance memory indicator DISP GAIN Gain indicator DISP SHUTTER Shutter speed and ECS mode indicator DISP AUDIO Audio level indicator sBunes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuaw 9 JajdeyD Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor 201 Item Description DISP DISC Remaining disc capacity indicator VF DISP 3 page DISP IRIS Iris opening indicator a The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY ASPECT switch on the viewfinder b For detailed information on the display mode see Change confirmation adjustment progress messages page 203 Item Description DISP CLIP Selects the type of clip name to NAME display a DISPSCENE Turns on or off the display of FILE the number of the currently loaded scene file DISP CONT Turns on or off the Clip REC Continuous Rec display LOW LIGHT Turns on and off the on screen warning that the average level of the vide
398. ta in the clip list Creating and editing clip lists The following table lists the steps in the creation and editing of clip lists with the scene selection function To create a clip list you always need to carry out the steps inside the heavy lines Other steps can be carried out as required Add sub clips Use the Add Sub Clips command to add the clips you want to use to a clip list You can add up to 300 sub clips to one clip list This operation can be carried out in the following thumbnail screens Clip thumbnail screen Expand thumbnail screen Chapter thumbnail screen Clip list thumbnail screen Scene Selection Clip List Editing su 199 N9 ul suoneiedo S 1e1deu 127 SueeJog MH ui suonejedo s sa deyo 128 2 Change the sub clip order Use the Move Sub Clips command to change the order of sub clips in a clip list Delete sub clips Use the Delete Sub Clips command to delete specified sub clips from a clip list Trim sub clips Use the Trim Sub Clip command to adjust the In and Out points of a sub clip This function can also be used to adjust the overall duration of the clip list Set the start timecode Use the Set Start Time Code command to set the timecode at the start of a clip list 3 Play the clip list Use the PLAY PAUSE button and other playback controls to play the current clip list and check its contents Save the clip list Use the Save Clip List or Save Clip
399. tem in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item Bunoous y je1deu 1 Before starting set TITLE on the CLIP Fuji MXF TITLE page of the OPERATION menu to ENABL and set a title see page 92 For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 User defined clip names can be used via FTP 2 Display the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu 3 Select NAMING FORM and then press Sakura SMI the MENU knob 4 Turn the MENU knob to display FREE and then press the MENU knob You can now enter a user defined name To check clip names User defined clip list names can be used via FTP O31OFILE NAMING TOP Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the NOMING FORM FREE thumbnail screen and select the clip whose name AUTO NAMING Cxxxx you want to check The name of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen See Clip thumbnail screen page 107 for more information Advanced Operations for Shooting 95 Bunooug y je1deuo 96 The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed according to the following order of priority Title gt user defined clip name gt standard format clip name Therefore the display of this item changes as follows depending on whether or not there is a title Whena title has been set as a clip name on this unit the title is displayed for clips recorded on this unit The user defined name or standard format name is
400. tems cannot be saved LOAD CUSTOM DATA LOAD OUT OF USER BEFORE FILE PAGE and USER LOAD WHITE on the USER FILE 2 page SCENE WHITE DATA on the REFERENCE page 2 SLOW amp QUICK FRAME RATE on the REC FUNCTION page LENS FILE SELECT on the LENS FILE page SYSTEM LINE SYSTEM FREQUENCY and COUNTRY on the FORMAT page NUMERIC on the CLIP TITLE page SKIN AREA IND and SKIN DTL SELECT on the SKIN DETAIL page MATRIX AREA IND and MTX MULTI AXIS on the MTX MULTI page If data cannot be saved If one of the following error messages appears 3 during or after the save operation then the data was not saved Error message Cause Action 4 NO USB No USB flash Connect or MEMORY drive is reconnect the flashing connected USB flash drive USB The LOCK Set the LOCK MEMORY switch on the switch to the INHIBIT USB flash drive write enable flashing is set to the position write protect position USB A USB flash Reconnect to MEMORY drive error confirm the ERROR occurred error and flashing consult a Sony service representative To set the file ID You can set an file ID before you save your data as a user file This will help you identify the user file quickly The file ID that has been set is saved together with the data Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 Select F ID and press the MENU knob A character table appears FO
401. th regardless of content Use this method if you do not need to specify the transfer range precisely Chapter thumbnail screen Use this method if you want to transfer a specific range By setting essence marks at the start point and end point of the transfer range you can specify the range with a precision of one frame 1 In the clip thumbnail screen select a clip and press the EXPAND or CHAPTER button The expand thumbnail screen or the chapter thumbnail screen appears 2 Select the transfer range To select multiple thumbnails While holding the SHIFT key down turn the MENU knob or press the IN or OUT button The duration of the transfer range appears in the lower right of the screen When the selected range duration in the expand thumbnail screen is less than two seconds it is expanded automatically to two seconds 3 Execute step 2 to 9 of the previous section To upload entire clips Downloading clips Proceed as follows to download clips from a remote host such as other XDCAM device devices or a material server See page 114 for information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Download Clip via Direct FTP and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Select Remote Host screen of the Download Clip via Direct FTP command appears Download Clip via Direct FTP Select Remote Host 5 ote Host 4 UPnP Hosts Discovered via UPnP Network Contig
402. th of the hue possessed by the color detail function Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 12 MTX LINEAR MATRIX OFF ON Turns the linear matrix correction and user set matrix correction functions on or off MATRIX USER OFF ON Turns the user set matrix correction function on or off MATRIX PRESET OFF ON Turns the preset matrix correction function on or off MATRIX PRST SEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 Selects the preset matrix correction function 1 SMPTE 240M equivalent 2 ITU 709 equivalent 3 SMPTE WIDE equivalent 4 NTSC equivalent 5 EBU equivalent 6 ITU 601 equivalent MATRIX USER R G 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary R G user se matrix coefficients MATRIX USER R B 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary R B user se matrix coefficients MATRIX USER G R 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary G R user se matrix coefficients MATRIX USER G B 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary G B user se matrix coefficients MATRIX USER B R 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary B R user se matrix coefficients MATRIX USER B G 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary B G user se matrix coefficients Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsig nuey 9 JajdeyD 167 sBumes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nua 9 saldeyp 168 No Page Item Settings Description 13 MTX MULTI MATRIX OFF ON Tur
403. the WHITE BAL switch The camcorder has four built in CC filters so a total of eight 4 x 2 adjustments can be stored However the memory contents are not linked to the CC filter settings in the following cases When the number of memories allocated to each of A and B is limited to one by setting the FILTER WHT MEM item on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu to OFF If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B and on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu the WHITE SWITCH B item is set to ATW Auto Tracing White Balance the ATW function is activated to automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions To save white balance settings obtained by ATW Set ATW HOLD MEMORY in the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu to ON When this is done auto white balance settings obtained by ATW are written to the memory corresponding to the setting A or B that is currently selected with the WHITE BAL switch P You can then turn ATW off and continue shooting with the current white balance values The unit continues to use the values that were in effect immediately before ATW was turned off 1 This function is not available when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST If you have connected a remote control unit the unit uses the memory corresponding to the remote control unit setting A B or C WB ATW HOLD MEMORY OFF ATW ON ATW OFF a Whit
404. the button selects the next setting in the order shown in the following table Setting LCD monitor backlight H High select this to view the LCD monitor outdoors in the daytime M Brightness between H and L L Low select this to view the LCD monitor indoors or outdoors at night OFF Off the display is also off Status display on the LCD monitor The following display appears on the LCD monitor display which is set to STATUS with the DISP SEL EXPAND button 01 23 45 MIN SEC LCD monitor Resolution Indicates the resolution of HD output video Indication Resolution horizontal x vertical 1080 1080 lines 1920 x 1080 720 720 lines 1280 x 720 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 19 MAIAJOAC J8 deUuD 20 Video format Indicates the format of video being currently played back or recorded Indication Format Bit rate HD422 50 MPEG HD422 50 Mbps HD420 HQ SP MPEG HD420 35 25 18 Mbps Lp IMX 50 40 50 MPEG IMX 50 40 30 Mbps DVCAM DVCAM 25 Mbps a LP is playback only System frequency Indicates the system frequency of video being currently played back or recorded If NTSC AREA is selected Indication Field or frame Scan mode rate 59 0i 59 94 fields per Interlace second 59 9P 59 94 frames per Progressive second 29 9P 29 97 frames per Progressive second 23 9P 23 98 frames per Progressive second If PAL AREA
405. the recording format MPEG HD422 50 Mbps and the resolution and system frequency settings 1080 23 98P 1080 25P or 1080 29 97P Slow amp Quick Motion is disabled automatically if you change any of these to other settings To enable the function 1 Check that you are not recording and that the recording format of this unit is set to MPEG HD422 50 Mbps and the resolution system frequency is set to 1080 23 98P 1080 25P or 1080 29 97P 2 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu See Basic menu operations page 193 for more information about menu operations J Select SLOW amp QUICK and turn the MENU knob until ON appears OOSOREC FUNCTION SLOW amp QUICK FRAME RATE CACHE INTVAL REC DISC EXCHG CACHE CLIP CONT REC LIVE LOGGING 4 Select FRAME RATE and turn the MENU knob until the desired frame rate appears The frame rate setting ranges are as follows Recording format Frame rate 1080 23 98P 1 to 48 1080 25P 1 to 50 1080 29 97P 1 to 60 When you have finished making settings the system frequency and the frame rate appear at the top of the viewfinder screen You can change the frame rate with the MENU knob while viewing this display Exchanging discs while recording Disc Exchange Cache function Even if you run out of free disc capacity while recording you can continue recording by using the Disc Exchange Cache function This function enables seamless recording over
406. thout The video only appears superimposed information MONI Status display Counter indications STATUS warnings audio levels and similar information appear No video image appears If you press this button when the thumbnail screen is displayed the duration of the selected clip is divided into 12 and the first frame of each of the divisions is shown in a further thumbnail display expand function Each time you press this button the division is repeated to a maximum of three times with 1 728 divisions Hold down the SHIFT button and press this button to step back through the division process For details of the expand function see page 116 HOLD display hold CHAPTER chapter function button Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the counter display section The timecode generator continues running Pressing this button again releases the hold You can use this button for example to determine the exact time of a particular shot For details of the counter display see page 20 If you press this button when the clip thumbnail screen is displayed those frames on which shot marks are recorded appear in a list chapter function Press the button once more to return to the normal thumbnail display By displaying thumbnails with shot marks attached in place of index frames you can check the contents of clips more easily and more quickly This is also useful for cueing up long
407. ting mode to squeeze mode Record wide picture information when recording SD When wide picture information is not detected set the up converter operating mode to edge crop mode and do not record wide picture information 16 9 Always treat the signal as a wide signal and set the up converter operating mode to squeeze mode Record wide picture information when recording SD SETUP REMOVE 0 096 7 5 96 Selects whether to modify the When the COUNTRY setup level of input video signals item is set to 7 5 Remove the setup Select NTSC J AREA or when signals with 7 5 NTSC AREA setup are input 0 0 Do not remove the setup Select when signals without setup are input 30 UMID SET COUNTRY CODE Blank up to 4 characters For details see Setting the ORGANIZATION Blank up to 4 characters UMID data page 218 USER CODE Blank up to 4 characters TIME ZONE 00 to 3F s6unes pejreijeq pue s ejds q nua 9 Jeydeu 160 MenuList No Page Item Settings Description 31 CLIP TITLE TITLE DSABL ENABL For details see Assigning user SELECT PREFIX EXEC defined clip titles automatically When the TITLE item page 91 is set to ENABL CLEAR NUMERIC EXEC When the TITLE item is set to ENABL LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC When the TITLE item is set to ENABL PREFIX TITLE up to 10 When the TITLE item characters is set to ENABL NUM
408. tings of the absolute value rotational controls P and absolute value switches are overwritten by those on the remote control unit after the remote control unit is connected When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder the independent data Connecting the Remote Control Unit 51 suonejedeJjg z ejdeuj 52 region becomes effective Thus the camcorder will return to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit was connected 1 Absolute value rotational controls The data corresponding to the angular position of controls is output Rotational controls for which the data corresponding to the amount of their rotation is output are called relative value controls 2 Absolute value switches Like toggle switches or slide switches except momentary switches the switches or knobs whose positions must coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches When RM COMMON MEMORY on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to ON you can use settings of the paint adjustment data stored in the independent data region even if you connect the remote control unit In this case the settings stored in the independent data region will be renewed when you change the settings on the remote control unit Thus the settings of the paint data made with the remote control unit can be retained even if the remote control unit is removed However if the switch position on the remote
409. tinue to deteriorate When a read error occurs the message DISC ERROR appears the video freezes and the audio output is suppressed If this happens check the following points Basic Procedure for Shooting Whether the disc displays the same playback condition on other XDCAM devices If so the surface of the disc may be dirty or scratched or the performance of the recording layers on the disc may have worsened due to age Do not use discs with these symptoms Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device displays the same playback conditions If so the performance of the laser diodes may have deteriorated Check the total optical output time Deleting the recorded clip For details see Deleting clips page 125 Using the Freeze Mix function The Freeze Mix function allows you to display a freeze image over the current shooting video For example you can use this function to frame summer and winter shots of a landscape scene in exactly the same way or to resume an interrupted shooting session with exactly the same framing To use the Freeze Mix function you need to assign it to an ASSIGN 1 3 4 5 switch For details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches page 209 1 Play the disc that contains the scene you want to use as the framing standard 2 When the scene that you want appears press the PLAY PAUSE button to pause playback 3 Press the button to which you have assigned the Freeze
410. tion The message PRESET DATA OK appears on the screen 4 Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position again This returns to the standard settings To move to another page UOSeREC FUNCTION SLOU amp QUICK FRAME RATE CACHE INTVAL REC DISC EXCHG CACHE CLIP CONT REC LIUE LOGGING When appears in front of the page number Turn the MENU knob to switch pages When nothing appears in front of the page number Turn the MENU knob to move to the page number and press the MENU knob Then turn the MENU knob to switch pages Editing the USER menu The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and items that you need by adding deleting or replacing the pages To add a new page The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add a new page to the USER menu While the EDIT page contains factory preset items the EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 pages are all blank in their initial state You can register up to 10 items including blank lines on each of these pages How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the TOP menu see page 193 2 Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the menu appears TEUDSCENTENTS Y Q Q Q Q Q Q 0 1 OXDODNIOUUSQN rrmmrmr
411. to P20 to save scene files on the USB flash drive Each page can hold up to five files Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears then press the MENU knob 2 Select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message STORE OK YES NO appears To carry out the save select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO You can select the file information items to be displayed on each page of SCENE STORE and SCENE RECALL For details see To select the file information items to be displayed page 222 To save scene files stored in the camcorder memory on a USB flash drive All five scene files stored in the camcorder memory can be saved on a USB flash drive in a single operation Saving and Loading Scene Files How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select SCENE STORE and press the MENU knob One of the SCENE STORE pages appears J Turn the MENU knob to select the desired SCENE STORE page and press the MENU knob 4 Select SFILE SAVE MEM1 5 and press the MENU knob The message STORE OK YES NO appears 5 To carry out the save select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob
412. to the camcorder ensure that the total power consumption does not exceed 40 W When using the AC DN10 with peripheral devices attached to the camcorder ensure that the total power consumption does not exceed 50 W When using the AC DN2B with peripheral devices attached to the camcorder ensure that the total power consumption does not exceed 60 W Connect only devices with current consumption of 1 0 A or lower to the DC OUT connector xipueddy 1 The power consumption of the optional CA FB70 CA TX70 is not included in the total Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C 23 F to 104 F Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Humidity 10 to 90 relative humidity Continuous operating time Approx 115 min with BP L80S battery Approx 100 min with BP FL75 battery Recording format video MPEG HD422 CBR 50 Mbps MPEG HD HQ mode VBR 35 Mbps max SP mode CBR 25 Mbps LP mode VBR 18 Mbps max playback only MPEG IMX CBR 50 40 30 Mbps DVCAM CBR 25 Mbps Recording format audio MPEG HD422 4 ch 24 bits 48 kHz MPEG HD 4 ch 16 bits 48 kHz MPEG IMX 4 ch 24 bits 48 kHz or 4 ch 16 bits 48 kHz DVCAM 4 ch 16 bits 48 kHz Recording format proxy video MPEG 4 Recording format proxy audio A law 4 ch 8 bits 8 kHz Recording playback time MPEG HD422 50 Mbps Approx 95 min PFD50DLA Approx 43 min PFD23A Specifications 257 Recording playback tim
413. tors to save power consumption How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the POWER SAVE page Item Description ETHERNET Enables or disables the USB network connector and USB connector REC AUDIO Puts the AUDIO OUT OUT connectors in EE or SAVE mode TEST OUT Switches the TEST OUT SAVE connector power saving function on and off ON No signals are output if a cable is not connected OFF Signals are always output regardless of whether a cable is connected Wi Fi Enables or disables the wireless LAN function a The unit must be powered off and on again to enable changes to this setting J Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Setting up a wireless LAN You can install the optional CBK WAO01 Wi Fi Adaptor in this unit and set up a wireless LAN as explained in this section When you connect this unit to a computer over a network you can make the settings explained here from a Web menu For details refer to the operation manual supplied with the optional CBK WA01 Wi Fi Adaptor You can al
414. tpoint and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The In point or Out point setting returns to the previous value 6 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required 8 Save the clip list see page 131 To delete sub clips See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Select the clips to delete in the clip list thumbnail screen multiple selections possible 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu Select Delete Sub Clips and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion 4 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required B Save the clip list see page 131 To play the clip list Note When this unit is in single clip playback mode see page 79 only the selected sub clip can be played See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations To play using GUI screens 1 m the clip list thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the sub clip where you want to start play To start play from the start of the clip list Select the thumbnail of the first sub clip 2 Press the PLAY PAUSE button To play using the clip list playback screen 1 Display the clip list playback screen 2 Press the PREV button or the NEXT button to display the sub clip that you want to play To start play from the first sub clip Pres
415. ttempted with no USB flash drive connected A write inhibited USB flash drive was connected with MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu set to ENABL The connected USB flash drive was not usable when a USB flash drive write operation was attempted A USB flash drive write operation was attempted without enough free memory in the USB flash drive A USB flash drive write operation was attempted without free memory in the USB flash drive A USB flash drive write operation failed with MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu set to ENABL An attempt was made to switch GUI screens during a USB flash drive write operation A clock error has occurred Set the date and time of the internal clock again The total duration of sub clips in the current clip list is over the upper limit 24 hours Operation Warnings Alarm messages during thumbnail search scene selection and clip list operations An alarm message may appear in the LCD monitor during thumbnail search scene selection and clip list operations In that case take the action indicated in the following table Cannot Expand Clip any Further Selected Essence Mark Does not Exist Sub Clip is Invalid Set Appropriate IN OUT Points Duration of One Clip List must be Less than 24 Hours No More Sub Clips can be Added to the Clip List Sub Clip does not Exist C
416. tton 18 File ALL 150 ID 221 lens 150 reference 150 scene 150 user 150 FILE menu 150 187 File operations 228 FTP 233 recording continuous timecode 239 restrictions 229 Filter 31 Filter Clips function 119 FILTER selector 14 Fitting for microphone holder 13 Flange focal length adjusting 42 Focus Assist function 81 Format 53 Frame frequency groups 54 FREEZE 210 Freeze Mix function 80 F RUN SET R RUN switch 22 FTP 233 command list 235 G GAIN selector 16 Gain value 31 setting 208 GENLOCK IN connector 24 GPS 272 Location information 103 Setting the clock 40 Green tally indicator 27 GUI screen operations 114 switching 105 GUI screen operations section 22 H HOLD CHAPTER button 18 Index picture changing 120 Indicators and status display 26 Internal clock 39 Interval Rec function 84 Iris setting auto iris override 32 Iris automatic adjustment 64 L LCD monitor 17 selecting display items 201 status display 19 Lens cable clamp 13 LENS connector 13 Lens file selecting 217 Lens locking lever 13 Lens mount 13 Lens mount cap 13 Lens mount securing rubber 13 Lens mounting 41 Lid of the disc compartment 23 LIGHT connector 13 LIGHT switch 11 LINE AES EBU MIC selectors 25 Line input audio equipment connecting 46 Live Logging function 99 Maintenance 244 MAINTENANCE menu 150 170 Marker display setting 203 Memory symbol and remaining memory capacity 30 Menu disc menu 112 setting menulist 151 setting m
417. tton or the MENU knob Deleting clips You can delete clips while checking their contents Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position Locked clips cannot be deleted If a deletion target clips is referenced by clip lists on the disc all of those clip lists are deleted as well Ifa deletion target clip is referenced in the current clip list only those referencing sub clips are deleted at the same time as the deletion target clip See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to delete 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Delete Clip A window appears asking you to confirm the deletion The window displays thumbnails of four frames from the target clip the first frame two intermediate frames and the last frame along with the name title 1 date of creation and duration of the clip One of the following messages also appears depending on whether the clip is referenced ina clip list When the clip is not referenced in a clip list Delete Clip When the clip is referenced in a clip list Delete Clip amp Clip List All clip lists that reference the target clip are deleted along with the clip Thumbnail Operations su 199 N9 ul suoneiedo g 1e1deu 125 SueeJog MH ui suonejedo c Jajdeyo 126 Delete Clip amp Clip List IN
418. ued b Other BEFORE 11 5V to 11 8V Used when a battery pack other than a Sony END to 17 0V in battery pack is used Sets the voltage level of 0 1V steps the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Other END 11 0V to 14 0V Used when a battery pack other than a Sony in 0 1 V steps battery pack is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued DC IN BEFORE 11 5V to 11 8V Used when an external power source is END to 17 0V in 0 1 connected to the DC IN connector Sets the V steps voltage level of the connected external power source at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued DCIN END 11 0V to 14 0V Used when an external power source is in 0 1 V steps connected to the DC IN connector Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the END warning should be issued DETECTED Info Sony Other Displays the type of automatically detected BATTERY DC IN battery Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nuey 9 Jajdeyo 171 sBumes p je q pue s ejdsiq nua 9 Jaldeyp 172 No Page Item Settings Description 05 BATTERY 2 TYPE DETECTION AUTO OTHER AUTO Automatically detects the type of the battery OTHER Always judges the battery to be of the OTHER type regardless of the actual battery type SEGMENT NO 7 11 0V to 17 0V When the battery type in 0 1 V steps judgment is OTHER sets the v
419. ugh the DC IN connector or battery pack The brightness or color temperature of the light will not change according to voltage increase Do not use a video light with power consumption of over 50 W The brightness or color temperature of the light will change when the voltage supplied through the DC IN connector or from the battery pack is under 12 V To attach the video light Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder grip and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT connector The accessory fitting shoe on this unit is of the 1 inch tapped hole type If you want to replace this with a slide type shoe contact a Sony service representative To remove the shoulder strap Using the Shoulder Press here and pull in the direction Stra p shown by the arrow to release To attach the shoulder strap 1 Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting Pull up the strap to lock the fitting suonejedeJjg z e1deuj uU WU pea Er T on LE D I A Ge 2 Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting on the other side of the grip in the same way as in step 1 Using the Shoulder Strap 49 suonejedeJd Z Jejdeuo 50 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position the factory default setting backward by up to 10 mm 3 59 inch or forward by up to 25 mm 1 inch This adjustment helps you get the best balance for sh
420. ui suonejedQ g Ja deuD 112 Disc Menu The Disc Menu allows you to do the following Underlined values in the Operation Setting column are the factory defaults Item Operation Setting Load Clip List Load clip list into this unit s memory Save Clip List Save a clip list to the disc under its current name overwriting the old contents Save Clip list as Save a clip list to the disc under a new name Delete Clip List Delete a clip list from the disc Clear Clip List Clear the current clip list from the unit s memory Load Planning Metadata Select Drive Select a media disc or drive and load planning metadata into this unit s memory Planning Metadata Properties Display the properties of the currently loaded planning metadata Planning Clip Name Suffix Change the serial number added to clip names created by using planning metadata Clear Planning Metadata Clear the currently loaded planning metadata from the unit s memory Lock or Delete All Clips Sub Item Lock All Clips Lock all clips Unlock All Clips Unlock all clips Delete All Clips Delete all clips Delete All Voice Delete all voice data Disc Properties Display the properties of the currently loaded disc Or edit the user disc ID title 1 and title 2 Format Disc Format initialize the currently loaded disc Download Clip via Direct FTP Used to send clip to and from
421. unction allows you to start and stop recording while continuously recording to the same clip for as long as the function remains enabled This is convenient when you do not want to generate a large number of short clips and when you want to record without worrying about exceeding the clip limit up to 300 clips It is still easy to find recording start points because a Rec Start essence mark is recorded at the recording start point each time you start recording 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page in the OPERATION menu See Basic menu operations page 193 for more information about menu operations 2 Select CLIP CONT REC and turn the MENU knob until ON appears CONT appears in the viewfinder and the function is enabled You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on off function to one of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 5 switches or the RET button on the lens For details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches page 209 Clip Continuous Rec settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states The Picture Cache function is enabled The Interval Rec function is enabled The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode During Slow amp Quick Motion shooting To stop the function When the function is enabled you can stop it by executing any of the following operations A new clip will be created when you next start recording Operate on a clip lock d
422. unloading a disc page 74 Important Notes on Operation 255 xipueddy 256 Fitting the zoom lens It is important to fit the lens correctly as otherwise damage may result Be sure to refer to the section Mounting the Lens page 41 Viewfinder Do not leave the unit with the eyepiece pointing directly at the sun The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun s rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder Do not use the viewfinder close to strong magnetic fields This can cause picture distortion About the LCD panels The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured with high precision technology giving a functioning pixel ratio of at least 99 99 Thus a very small proportion of pixels may be stuck either always off black always on red green or blue or flashing In addition over a long period of use because of the physical characteristics of the liquid crystal display such stuck pixels may appear spontaneously These problems are not a malfunction Note that any such problems have no effect on recorded data Phenomena specific to image sensors The following phenomena that may occur in images are specific to image sensors They do not indicate a malfunction White flecks Although the image sensors are produced with high precision technologies fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases caused by cosmic rays etc This is related to the principle of image se
423. ure has been changed to any frame other than the first frame of a clip see page 120 When you cue up a clip the unit always cues up the first frame even when the index picture has been changed to a different frame S mark This mark appears when shot marks or other essence marks have been set in the clip see page 82 The chapter thumbnail screen can be displayed for clips that show this mark see page 109 E Clip flag icon Displays the corresponding icon when a clip flag OK NG KP KEEP is set in the clip see page 124 Clip and frame information Displays the clip or frame information selected with the Clip Information item in the Thumbnail Menu see page 120 The factory default Overview selection is the timecode of the first frame or the timecode of the thumbnail frame 3 Lock icon This icon appears when the clip is locked protected see page 124 Clips cannot be deleted and their clip information cannot be changed when this mark is displayed Clip list thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of the clips in the current clip list You can use this screen to create and edit clips lists TC 00 00 00 00 TC 00 00 28 08 Clip list name Displays the name or a title of the clip list see page 107 Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 107 Sub clip number number of sub clips Displays the total number of sub clips in the cl
424. us When a USB flash drive is connected to the enabled USB connector a memory symbol appears indicating the mount status of the USB flash drive and its remaining capacity Memory symbol and remaining capacity display Icon Remaining Description capacity display Lit Proxy data recording is nied and there at least 5 minute of remaining capacity Flashing Proxy data recording is enabled but there is less than 5 minute of remaining capacity Out Proxy data recording is disabled INH The USB flash drive is write protected 9 Out The USB flash drive could not be mounted a Use a USB flash drive with enough free capacity remaining b Enable the proxy data recording function c Clear the write protection on the USB flash drive d Format or exchange the USB flash drive When Wi Fi on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu is set to ENABL the Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls wireless LAN connection status is displayed in this area as follows Not connected or connection destination unknown An x lights Connecting Four gray segments flash Connection completed signal strength 0 One gray segment lights Connection completed signal strength 1 to 4 White segments light The number of white segments 1 to 4 indicates the reception signal level 1 to 4 When the optional CBK WA100 Wireless Adaptor is connected via USB the remaining m
425. val Rec mode settings and shooting To make settings 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations page 193 Select CACHE INTVAL REC and turn the MENU knob to display A INT OOSOREC FUNCTION TOP SLOU amp QUICK ON FRAME RATE E 30P CACHE INTVAL REC A INT TAKE TOTAL TIME REC TIME PRE LIGHT ING OFF DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF CLIP CONT REC d OFF SMIN SSEC As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows OFF CACHE gt AINT gt M INT Select TAKE TOTAL TIME and turn the MENU knob to select the desired total time for shooting As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows SMIN gt 10MIN gt 15MIN gt 20MIN gt 30MIN gt 40MIN gt 50MIN gt 1H 2H 3H gt 4H gt 5H gt 7H gt 10H gt 15H 20H 30H gt 40H 50H gt 70H gt 100H Here MIN means minutes 5MIN is 5 minutes and H means hours 1H is one hour Advanced Operations for Shooting Bunoous y je1deu 85 Bunooug y je1deuo 86 4 Select REC TIME and turn the MENU knob to select the desired time to be recorded on the disc As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows SSEC 10SEC lt gt 15SEC gt 20SEC gt 30SEC gt 40SEC 50SEC gt IMIN 85MIN Here SEC means seconds 5SEC is 5 seconds and MIN means minutes 1 MI
426. vents the decrease in sensitivity F drop that occurs when the lens extender function is used Focus assist function A focus assist indicator is displayed in the viewfinder to aid in focusing This function is useful when trying to focus using only the image in the viewfinder Assignable switches Frequently used function can be assigned to switches for quick and convenient operation Hyper gamma This enables a wide dynamic range without using the Knee function by smoothly compressing the high luminance range Supports digital wireless microphone system The digital wireless microphone system offers high quality superior resistance to noise and simultaneous multi channel operation Installation of the DWR SO2D Digital Wireless Receiver P enables simultaneous reception of two channels 1 These products are not available in countries where they are prohibited by radio frequency regulations 3 5 inch high resolution LCD monitor The high resolution 3 5 inch QHD color LCD monitor displays audio meters menus disc and battery capacity indications and thumbnails of clips stored on disc Inherits unique features of XDCAM series The unit inherits the workflow features of the XDCAM series including thumbnail display and metadata management and improves them by introducing an improved man machine interface Metadata includes new user settable clip flags OK NG KEEP in addition to the existing Rec Start essence mark
427. video signal complying with the SMPTE standard and in proper phase relationship to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN connector respectively Setting Time Data Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjueunsn py e 4e1deuo 71 Bunooys 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Je deyo 72 This operation synchronizes the internal timecode generator with the external timecode After about 10 seconds you can disconnect the external timecode without losing the synchronization However there will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or disconnect the timecode signal during recording When you finish the above procedure the internal timecode is immediately synchronized with the external timecode and the counter display will show the value of the external timecode However wait for afew seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the system frequency of the camcorder the camera cannot be correctly genlocked In such a case the internal timecode is not correctly synchronized with the external timecode When the GENLOCK ON OFF item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu the timecode cannot be synchronized with the reference video signal In this case set the GENLOCK item to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu User bit settings during timecode synchronization When the timecode is synchronized only the time data is sync
428. ving a scene file To save a scene file on a USB flash drive connect the USB flash drive into the USB connector before starting the following operation How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operation see Basic menu operations page 193 FO4 SCENE FILE STANDARD To set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 2 For details on setting the file ID see To set the file ID page 221 Saving and Loading Scene Files ejeq Pumes sn DBuipeo1 pue Bunes 7 JaydeyD 223 geq Buses sn Bulpeo7 pue Hues 7 Jeydeyo 224 2 Select SCENE STORE and press the MENU knob The SCENE STORE page appears 3 Press the MENU knob then select the desired file number and press the MENU knob again The file to be saved is selected When no USB flash drive is connected Select the desired memory number and press the MENU knob When the save is completed the SCENE FILE page appears again When you select a file number where data has already been saved The message OVERWRITE OK YES NO appears Tocancelthe overwriting press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO To overwrite select YES and press the MENU knob When a USB flash drive is connected You can use up to 20 pages from POI
429. wfinder shoe up to detach the viewfinder slide assembly 2 Attach the BKW 401 with the supplied bolts Bolts supplied with the BKW 401 To attach the viewfinder at the top To attach the viewfinder at the bottom factory default 3 Adjust the front to back position so 4 Attach the viewfinder slide assembly that the arm of the BK W 401 does not reversing the steps of the removal touch the handle when it is raised procedure 36 Attaching the Viewfinder Adjust position so that arm does not touch handle Detaching the eyepiece Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the screen from further away It is also easy to remove dust from the viewfinder screen and mirror when the eyepiece is detached 1 Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise to align the red marks on the locking ring and the viewfinder barrel Locking ring Locking ring match mark Match mark on the viewfinder barrel 2 Detach the eyepiece Match mark on end of eyepiece To reattaching the eyepiece 1 Align the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel 2 Align the red mark on the end of the eyepiece end with the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel Then insert the eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel 3 Turn the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its LOCK arrow points at the red mark on the viewfinder barrel suoneje
430. when the gain is set to 18 dB or higher When you display the focus assist indicator the display of effective pixels which you select by setting 100 MARKER in the MARKER 1 page of the OPERATION menu to ON is hidden When you display the frame of the focus detection range the box cursor which you select by setting User Box in the MARKER 2 page of the OPERATION menu to ON is hidden How to read the focus assist indicator The in focus position is the position where the bar reaches its maximum length Focus on a subject by rotating the focus ring so that the bar extends to its maximum length In focus position Position where bar is at maximum length The focus indicator may show little or no variation when you are shooting a smooth subject or a dark scene Basic Procedure for Shooting Dunoous y 1e1deu 81 Bunooug y je1deuo 82 Advanced Operations for Shooting Recording essence marks Shot marks and other essence marks can be recorded on the disc Recording essence marks for scenes containing important images and sounds enables quick access to the marked points This increases editing efficiency To record a shot mark using the RET button on the lens To make it possible to record shot marks using the RET button on the lens carry out the following procedure How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the ESSENCE MAR
431. y WRR CH SELECT the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device TX LCF FREQ channel number B Sets the Low Cut Filter frequency of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device TX SYSTEM DELAY channel number i AUTO 0 0ms 8 0ms Sets the amount of audio delay for the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT AUTO Automatically adjusts the amount of delay so that the delay in the audio received from the wireless receiver is Zero 0 0ms 8 0ms Sets the amount of anticipated wireless system delay for cases in several wireless systems are being used over a device such as an audio mixer Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 10 TIMECODE TC OUT AUTO GENE _ Selects the timecode signal output AUTO Outputs the timecode generator output during recording and outputs the timecode reader output during playback GENE Outputs the timecode generator output during recording and playback DF NDF DF NDF Sets DF or NDF mode When SYSTEM DF Drop frame mode FREQUENCY is set NDF Non drop frame mode to 59 94i 29 97P or 59 94P EXT LK DF NDF INT EXT Selects either internal setting or external When SYSTEM setting for DF NDF FREQUENCY is set INT Internal to 59 941 29 97P or EXT External 59 94P EXT LK UBIT I
432. yback sound during playback The speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack the speaker output is suppressed automatically For details about alarms see Operation Warnings page 246 LCD monitor Displays camera video VDR related warnings remaining battery capacity remaining disc capacity audio levels time data and so on For details see Status display on the LCD monitor page 19 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 17 M Q Je deUuD 18 WARNING indicator Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs in the VDR section For details about the meaning of the states of the WARNING indicator see Operation Warnings page 246 E ACCESS indicator This lights when data is written to or read from the disc El Protection cover of the audio control section Open to access the audio control section see page 22 al Protection cover of the GUI screen operations section Open to access the GUI screen operations section see page 22 EJECT button and indicator Press this button to insert a disc or eject the disc The indicator flashes while the disc is being ejected El F REV fast reverse button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the reverse direction The indicator lights during high speed playback in the reverse direction E PLAY PAUSE button and indicator Press this button to view play b

now

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents